diff options
Diffstat (limited to '39009.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009.txt | 8513 |
1 files changed, 8513 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/39009.txt b/39009.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f65a562 --- /dev/null +++ b/39009.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8513 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The History of the Great and Mighty Kingdom +of China and the Situation Thereof, Volume I (of 2), by Juan Gonzalez de Mendoza + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The History of the Great and Mighty Kingdom of China and the Situation Thereof, Volume I (of 2) + +Author: Juan Gonzalez de Mendoza + +Editor: George T. Staunton + +Translator: R. Parke + +Other: The Hakluyt Society + +Release Date: February 29, 2012 [EBook #39009] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GREAT AND MIGHTY KINGDOM OF CHINA *** + + + + +Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper, Melissa McDaniel +and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + + +Transcriber's Note: + + The hyphenation and spelling in the original document have been + preserved. + + Italic text is denoted by _underscores_. + + The letter o with a macron is represented as [=o]. + + + + + WORKS ISSUED BY + The Hakluyt Society. + + MENDOZA'S HISTORIE OF THE + KINGDOME OF CHINA. + + VOL. I. + NO. XIV + + ORIGINALLY PUBLISHED BY THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY + + REPRINTED BY PERMISSION + + Published by LENOX HILL Pub. & Dist. Co. (Burt Franklin) + 235 East 44th St., New York, N.Y. 10017 + Originally Published: 1854 + Reprinted: 1970 + Printed in the U.S.A. + + S.B.N.: 8337-23618 + Library of Congress Card Catalog No.: 73-141353 + Burt Franklin: The Hakluyt Society First Series 14 + + + + + THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. + + SIR RODERICK IMPEY MURCHISON, G.C.St.S., F.R.S., Corr. Mem. Inst Fr., + Hon. Mem. Imp. Acad. Sc. St Petersburg, &c., &c., PRESIDENT. + + THE EARL OF ELLESMERE. } + CAPT. C. R. DRINKWATER BETHUNE, R.N., C.B. } VICE-PRESIDENTS. + REAR-ADMIRAL SIR FRANCIS BEAUFORT, K.C.B., F.R.S. + CAPTAIN BECHER, R.N. + CHARLES T. BEKE, ESQ., Phil. D., F.A.S. + WILLIAM DESBOROUGH COOLEY, ESQ. + BOLTON CORNEY, ESQ., M.R.S.L. + THE RIGHT REV. LORD BISHOP OF ST. DAVID'S. + RT. HON. SIR DAVID DUNDAS. + SIR HENRY ELLIS, K.H., F.R.S. + JOHN FORSTER, ESQ. + R. W. GREY, ESQ., M.P. + JOHN HOLMES, ESQ. + JOHN WINTER JONES, ESQ. + SIR CHARLES LEMON, BART., M.P., F.R.S. + P. LEVESQUE, ESQ., F.A.S. + SIR JOHN RICHARDSON, M.D. + THE EARL SOMERS. + SIR GEORGE T. STAUNTON, BART., F.R.S. + + R. H. MAJOR, ESQ., F.R.G.S., HONORARY SECRETARY. + + + + +INTRODUCTION. + + +In presenting to the members of the Hakluyt Society a reprint of the +cotemporary English translation by Parke of Mendoza's interesting and +now rare account of China, the editor thinks it due to his readers that +some explanation should be given of the circumstances under which the +original work was compiled, and that at the same time it should be shown +what previous accounts had reached Europe respecting that remarkable +country. The interest of the narrative itself, abounding as it does with +minute and curious details of the manners and customs of so peculiar a +race as the Chinese, requires no vindication: it will speak for itself. +It will nevertheless interest those who appreciate the objects of the +Society, to know, that the present translation was made at Hakluyt's own +suggestion, shortly after the appearance of Mendoza's original work in +Spanish. + +It is the leading purpose of the Hakluyt Society to deal with the +Archaeology of Geography, and more especially so in connexion with the +progress made by our own English ancestors in the advancement of that +important science. In pursuance of that object, therefore, Mendoza's +account of China has been selected for re-publication, as being the +earliest _detailed_ account of that country ever published in the +English language. We say _detailed_ account, because we must not omit to +mention that it was preceded by a short but interesting document, +published by Richard Eden in his _History of Travayle in the West and +East Indies_, entitled "Reportes of the Province of China," of the +history and contents of which we shall hereafter speak in its proper +place. While, however, in the selection for re-publication, respect is +paid to the earliest narratives which appeared in our own tongue, the +reader's appreciation of the subject is best secured by an introductory +notice of all the antecedent descriptions which may at intervals have +appeared in other languages. This plan is more especially desirable with +respect to those earlier glimmerings of information which Europe +obtained respecting a country so removed from the civilized world, by +its geographical position and ethnological peculiarities, as China, yet +so marvellously in advance of it at the times of which we speak, both in +its intellectual and moral developments. In such notice, meanwhile, we +propose to pass by all discussion as to the much disputed question of +the position of the Thinae of Eratosthenes, Strabo, and the Periplus of +the Erythraean Sea, or of the application of Marinus's Serica, as +preserved to us by Ptolemy, to the kingdom of China. Upon these more +uncertain data we shall dwell no longer than to state, that our own +impression agrees with that of Vossius, that China is the country +referred to, and that the Seres of Ammianus Marcellinus, corresponding +as they so closely do in character with the modern Chinese, were +intended to represent that people. That the Romans possessed some +knowledge of China, would seem to be shown by a discovery made by the +learned De Guignes, of a statement in a Chinese historical work, that in +the year of our Lord 166, an embassy, said to have come by sea, arrived +from An-thon (Antoninus) to the Emperor Yan-hi; and the use of the +"serica vestis", alluded to by Horace and Propertius, would appear to +confirm the impression, provided only that silk, and not muslin, were +the commodity really alluded to. + +On these less certain points, however, we are, as we have said, +unwilling to dwell. We pass on therefore to the mention of more explicit +and unquestionable record. First of these is the narrative given in an +Arabic manuscript, written about the year 1173, describing the +observations of two Arab merchants, who, from the style of the +documents, were evidently in China a couple of centuries earlier. Their +respective dates, indeed, are concluded to be 851 and 867. This curious +and valuable manuscript, discovered by the learned M. Eusebe Renaudot in +the Comte de Seignelay's library, was translated by him into French, and +published at Paris in 1718. A translation appeared in English in 1733. +Although thus concealed from the acquaintance of Europeans till this +comparatively recent date, it rightly takes its place here as comprising +the two earliest accounts of China, of which we have as yet received any +information. Though adulterated with some few exaggerations, and +statements manifestly fabulous, they contain so many curious +particulars, which even now, from the permanence of institutions and +manners in China, may be considered as accurate, that no doubt can be +entertained of their genuineness, or of the intelligence of the +narrators. + +The two narratives were written consecutively, one of them forming a +sort of comment or supplement to the other. + +The country is described as extensive, but, though more populous, less +extensive than the Indies, and divided into many principalities. It is +represented as fruitful, and containing no deserts, while India is said +to contain some of great extent. + +Tea, under the name of _tcha_, is distinctly referred to, as being +universally drunk infused in hot water, and supposed to be a cure for +every disease. + +Porcelain is spoken of as an excellent kind of earth, of which is made a +ware as fine and transparent as glass. + +The Chinese are described as more handsome than the Indians, and are + + "dressed in silk both winter and summer; and this kind of dress is + common to the prince, the soldier, and to every other person, + though of the lowest degree. In winter they wear drawers, of a + particular make, which fall down to their feet. Of these they put + on two, three, four, five, or more, if they can, one over another; + and are very careful to be covered quite down to their feet, + because of the damps, which are very great and much dreaded by + them. In summer they only wear a single garment of silk, or some + such dress, but have no turbans. + + "Their common food is rice, which they often eat with a broth, like + what the Arabs make of meat or fish, which they pour upon their + rice. Their kings eat wheaten bread, and all sorts of animals, not + excepting swine, and some others. + + "They have several sort of fruits, apples, lemons, quinces, + sugar-canes, citruls, figs, grapes, cucumbers of two sorts, trees + which bear meal, walnuts, filberts, pistachios, plums, apricocks, + services [cherries], and coco-nuts; but they have no store of + palms; they have only a few about some private houses. + + "Their drink is a kind of wine made of rice; they have no other + wine in the country, nor is there any brought to them; they know + not what it is, nor do they drink of it. They have vinegar also, + and a kind of comfit like what the Arabs call Natef, and some + others. + + "They are not very nice in point of cleanliness. They eat also of + dead animals, and practice in many other things like the Magians; + and, in truth, the religion of the one and the other is much the + same. The Chinese women appear uncovered, and adorn their heads + with small ivory and other combs, of which they shall wear + sometimes a score together. The men are covered with caps of a + particular make. They are very expert mechanics, but ignorant of + the arts that depend on the mathematics." + +The knowledge of reading and writing is described as being general +amongst them, all important transactions being put into writing. +Idolatry is mentioned as very prevalent, and a hideous and +incomprehensible statement is made, of human flesh being publicly +exposed for sale in the markets. At the same time the punishment of vice +is represented as most severe, and the surveillance over individuals +extremely rigid, "for everybody in China, whether a native, an Arab, or +any other foreigner, is obliged to declare all he knows of himself, nor +can he possibly be excused for so doing". And thieves are put to death +as soon as caught. + +Canfu (Canton) is mentioned as the seaport of China, resorted to by +Arabian shipping; and Cumdan, described as a very splendid city, +supposed to be Nanking, was the residence of the monarch. + +Renaudot, to whom the world is indebted for rescuing this narrative from +obscurity, believes that it supplied Edrisi, the celebrated Arab +geographer of the twelfth century, with the materials for the +observations on China which occur in his _Geographia Nubiensis_; but +this reproach would seem to be unfounded, inasmuch as his details are +too few and vague, to warrant the conclusion that they were digested +from the more lucid and ample account to which we have been referring. +The most observable point of information with which Edrisi supplies us, +is the fact, that the northern parts of _Sin_ had by that time been +conquered by a Tartar nation, whom he calls the Baghargar Turks. +Abulfeda also, who flourished nearly two centuries later, seems to have +been equally ignorant of the existence of the two Arab travellers; for +he gives, as an apology for the ignorance of the geographers of that day +respecting China, that no one had been there from whom they could +procure information. + +The incidental reference to China by Benjamin of Tudela, a Jewish +traveller in the east, of the twelfth century, should not be omitted. It +is but a reference, but curious enough to be quoted. It is as follows:-- + + "From thence (the Island of Khandy) the passage to China is effected + in forty days; this country lies eastward, and some say that the + star Orion predominates in the sea which bounds it, and which is + called Sea of Nikpha. Sometimes so violent a storm rages in this + sea, that no mariner can reach his vessel; and whenever the storm + throws a ship into this sea, it is impossible to govern it; the crew + and the passengers consume their provisions, and then die miserably. + Many vessels have been lost in this way, but people have learned how + to save themselves from this fate by the following contrivance. They + take bullocks' hides along with them, and whenever this storm arises + and throws them into the Sea of Nikpha, they sew themselves up in + the hides, taking care to have a knife in their hand, and being + secured against the sea-water, they throw themselves into the ocean; + here they are soon perceived by a large eagle, called griffin, which + takes them for cattle, darts down, takes them in his gripe, and + carries them upon dry land, where he deposits his burthen on a hill + or in a dale, there to consume his prey. The man, however, now + avails himself of his knife, therewith to kill the bird, creeps + forth from the hide, and tries to reach an inhabited country. Many + people have been saved by this stratagem." + +The first European reference to China described by a traveller from +_hearsay_, is that given by the Minorite friar John de Plano Carpini, +who, with five other brothers of the order, in 1245 was sent by Pope +Innocent IV into the country of the Mongolians. The purpose of this +mission was, if possible, to divert these devastating conquerors from +Europe, and to instigate them rather to a war with the Turks and +Saracens. At the same time they were to inculcate, as much as might be, +the Christian faith, and at all events to collect every possible +information respecting a people so little known. + +Carpini was absent sixteen months. A copy of his narrative, formerly +belonging to Lord Lumley, is in the British Museum, and is the same +which was used by Hakluyt for his _Principal Navigations_, from which +the following extract is taken. It is after describing a battle between +the Mongals and the Chinese, whom he calls Kythayans, that he describes +the latter as follows: + + "The men of Kytay are Pagans, hauing a speciall kinde of writing by + themselues, and (as it is reported) the Scriptures of the Olde and + Newe Testament. They haue also recorded in hystories the liues of + their forefathers: and they haue Eremites, and certaine houses made + after the manner of our churches, which in those dayes they greatly + resorted vnto. They say that they haue diuers saints also, and they + worship one God. They adore and reuerence CHRIST JESVS our Lord, + and beleeue the article of eternall life, but are not baptized. + They doe also honorably esteeme and reuerence our Scriptures. They + loue Christians, and bestowe much almes, and are a very courteous + and gentle people. They haue no beardes, and they agree partly with + the Mongals in the disposition of their countenance. In all + occupations which men practise, there are not better artificers in + the whole worlde. Their countrey is exceeding rich in corne, wine, + golde, silke, and other commodities." + +The first traveller, from whom accounts collected from personal +experience respecting China were received in _Europe_, was William Van +Ruysbroeck, commonly known by the name of De Rubruquis, a friar of the +Minorite order, and sometimes called William of Tripoli, from the +circumstance of the narrative of his travels having been transmitted +from Tripoli to St. Louis, king of France, at whose instance they were +undertaken. The cause of his mission was a rumour, which had spread +through Europe, that the Mongolian chief, Mangu Khan, had embraced the +Christian religion; and St. Louis being then engaged in the fourth +Crusade against the Saracens, was anxious to cement an alliance with the +Tartars, who were at that time in hostility with the same power on the +side of Persia. This political purpose was enhanced by sanguine hopes +that the Tartars were even then, or likely soon to be, converted to the +Christian faith. The passage of Rubruquis was by Constantinople over the +Black Sea, through the Crimea, to the district of the city of the +Caraci, in the Gobi Desert, where Mangu Khan was then residing. + +His first reception was not of the most hospitable kind, but nine days +after his arrival he succeeded in obtaining an imperial audience; and +when Mangu Khan, a short time after, departed for Karakorum, a city on +the east side of the river Orchon, he and his companions followed in his +train. This city, of which no traces have been found in the desert for +some centuries, is mentioned by Marco Polo, who visited it about +eighteen years after Rubruquis, as having been the first in which these +Tartars ever fixed their residence, and was at that time the capital of +Mangu Khan, and the only considerable city in that part of Asia. +Rubruquis, in describing it, says: "There are two grand streets in it, +one of the Saracens, where the friars are kept and many merchants resort +thither, and one other street of the Catayans (Chinese), who are all +artificers." The explanation of this is, that the Tartars had already +conquered the greater part of northern China, then known under the name +of Cathay. + +Rubruquis and his companions, who by this time had gained considerable +favour in the eyes of the Khan, entered Karakorum with great +distinction. He describes the city itself as not equal to the village of +St. Denis, near Paris, the monastery of which he asserts was "tenne +times more worth than the palace, and more too." The place was +surrounded by a mud wall, and had four gates. The description of the +palace conveys the idea of a hall, at one end of which was a raised seat +for the Khan, on which he "sitteth above like a god". In this city the +friar found to his surprise a French goldsmith, named Guillaume +Bouchier, who is not unfrequently mentioned by early writers under the +name of William of Paris, and who had constructed a piece of mechanism, +the ingenuity of which deserves the highest praise, when the early +period at which he worked is taken into consideration. Its description +is thus given by Purchas, in a translation of the greater part of the +travels of Rubruquis, inserted in the third volume of his _Pilgrimes_. + + "Master _William Parisiensis_ made him (the Khan) a great silver + tree, at the root whereof were foure silver lions, having one pipe + sending forth pure cowes milke, and the foure pipes were convayed + within the tree, unto the top thereof: whose tops spread backe + again downward: and upon every one of them was a golden serpent, + whose tayles twine about the bodie of the tree. And one of those + pipes runs with wine, another with caracosmos, that is, clarified + whay; another with ball, that is, drinke made of honey; another + with drinke made of rice, called _teracina_. And every drinke hath + his vessell prepared of silver, at the foot of the tree, to receive + it. Betweene those foure pipes in the top, he made an angell + holding a trumpet; and under the tree, he made an hollow vault, + wherein a man might be hid; and a pipe ascendeth through the heart + of the tree unto the angell. He first made bellowes, but they gave + not wind enough. Without the palace there is a chamber, wherein the + drinkes are layd, and there are servants readie there to poure it + out, when they heare the angell sounding the trumpet. And the + boughes of the tree are of silver, and the leaves and peares. When + therefore they want drinke, the master butler cryeth to the angell + that he sound the trumpet. Then he hearing (who is hid in the + vault) blowes the pipe strongly, which goeth to the angell. And the + angell sets his trumpet to his mouth, and the trumpet soundeth very + shrill. Then the servants hearing, which are in the chamber, every + of them poure forth their drink into their proper pipe, and the + pipes poure it forth from above, and they are received below in + vessels prepared for that purpose. Then the butlers draw them, and + carry them through the palace to men and women."[1] + +Amongst the various points of information gathered by Rubruquis +respecting the Chinese or Catayans, as they were so long called, occur +the following important items. The characteristic principle of their +religious and political creed, embodied the great truth of the existence +of one supreme presiding deity, under whom the grand khan maintained the +presidency over his extensive dominions, and resistance to that dominion +consequently involved not only treason but heinous impiety. Another +curious fact, first communicated by Rubruquis, and afterwards confirmed +by Marco Polo, is that of paper currency, which was not adopted in +Europe for some centuries after, being then in general use in China. To +him also we are indebted for some notion of the peculiar characters and +mode of writing practised by the Chinese, who, as he says, do not write +with pens as we do, but with small brushes, such as are used by our +painters, and in one character or figure give a whole word. + +He also speaks at length of a strong drink called Cosmos, which he +describes as follows:-- + + "Their drinke, called Cosmos, which is mare's milk, is prepared + after this manner. They fasten a long line unto two posts, standing + firmly in the ground, and unto the same line they tye the young + foales of those mares which they meane to milke. Then come the + dammes to stand by their foales, gently suffering themselves to be + milked. And if any of them be too unruly, then one takes her foale + and puts it under her, letting it sucke a while, and presently + carrying it away againe, there comes another man to milke the said + mare. And having gotten a good quantitie of this milke together + (being as sweet as cowes milke) while it is new, they powre it into + a great bladder or bag, and they beat the said bag with a piece of + wood made for the purpose, having a club at the lower end like a + mans head, which is hollow within: and soone as they beat upon it, + it begins to boyle like new wine, and to be sowre and sharpe of + taste, and they beat it in that manner till butter come thereof. + Then taste they thereof, and being indifferently sharpe they drinke + it; for it biteth a mans tongue like the wine of raspes when it is + drunke. After a man hath taken a draught thereof, it leaveth behind + it a taste like the taste of almond-milke, and goeth downe very + pleasantly, intoxicating weake braynes. Likewise Karacosmos, that + is to say, blacke Kosmos, for great lords to drinke, they make on + this manner. First, they beat the said milke so long till the + thickest part thereof descend right downe to the bottome like the + lees of white wine; and that which is thinne and pure remaineth + above, being like unto whay or white must. The said lees and dregs + being very white, are given to servants, and will cause them to + sleepe exceedingly. That which is thinne and cleere their masters + drinke, and in very deede it is maruellous sweet and wholesome + liquor."[2] + +This limited stock of information, however, valuable as it is from the +priority of its date, sinks into insignificance before the detailed and +almost cotemporaneous narrative of that once reviled but now much +honoured pioneer of geographical investigation, Marco Polo. In the +present advanced age, when enlarged facilities have opened up to the +knowledge of the world the characteristic peculiarities of remote +countries and their inhabitants, we can do justice to the courage and +fidelity of those who, six centuries ago, could dare to describe such +apparent anomalies, while at the same time we can find an excuse for the +disbelief of those who regarded them as extravagant and impudent +fictions. Nor can we, indeed, conceive of any country and people, the +description of which, unconfirmed by the repeated observation of many, +was more calculated to excite suspicion and disbelief, while those very +peculiarities, now that they are authenticated, become the staple proof +of the trustworthiness of the early narrator. The father and uncle of +Marco Polo, natives of Venice, had in 1254 made a trading journey to +Tartary; the exploration of the east, and the importation of its rich +and beautiful productions, offering a peculiar attraction to the +commercial enterprise of that great and flourishing city. Marco was not +born till some months after the departure of his father, but by the time +of the return of the two brothers was become a young man, fifteen years +having been devoted to their interesting and extraordinary +peregrinations. They had crossed the Euxine Sea to Armenia, whence they +travelled by land to the court of a great Tartarian chief named Barba. +By him they were favorably received, and were enabled to effect +advantageous sales of their merchandise. After a year, however, spent in +his capital, a war broke out between him and a neighbouring chieftain, +and the return of the travellers to Europe being thus intercepted, they +took a circuitous course round the head of the Caspian, and so through +the desert of Karak to Bokhara. + +After an abode there of three years, during which they obtained a +knowledge of the Tartar language, they attached themselves to the +company of an ambassador going to the court of Kublai, grand Khan of the +Tartars, where they arrived after a year's journey. This potent monarch +gave them a gracious reception, and was curious in his enquiries +concerning the affairs of Europe and the Christian religion. Learning +from them that the Pope was the person regarded with the greatest +veneration in Europe, he resolved on despatching them as his ambassadors +to His Holiness, with the request that he would send persons to instruct +his people in the true faith. Protected by his signet they set out, and +pursuing their journey across Asia, arrived in Venice in the year 1269. +At this time there was a vacancy in the popedom, and the brothers +remained in Venice two years before it was filled. At length, on the +accession of Gregory X, they obtained letters from him, accompanied with +presents to Kublai Khan, and taking with them young Marco, now seventeen +years of age, and accompanied by two friars of the order of Preachers, +they again departed for the east. They landed at a port in Armenia named +Giuzza (Ayas), but finding that the Sultan of Babylon was at war with +the province, the two friars became intimidated and returned home. The +three Venetians, however, pursued their way, and after travelling for +three years and a half across Asia, and encountering numerous perils and +disasters, at length reached the court of Kublai. He was greatly pleased +at their return, and Marco, becoming a great favourite with him, was +employed by the Khan in various important missions to distant provinces. +After a residence of seventeen years at the court of Kublai, the three +Venetians were extremely desirous of returning to their native land, and +at length obtained permission to accompany the ambassadors of a king of +India, who had come to demand a princess of the Khan's family in +marriage for their sovereign. It was a voyage of a year and a half +through the Indian seas before they arrived at the court of this king, +named Argon. Thence they travelled to Constantinople, and finally +reached Venice in 1295. + +Such is the narrative of the travels and foreign residence of the three +Polos, as related by Marco. They returned rich in jewels and valuable +effects, after an absence of twenty-four years, which had so altered +them, that nothing less than a display of their wealth was necessary to +procure their recognition by their kindred. Hence, Marco gained the name +of Il Millione, the house in which he had lived in Venice being still +known in the time of Ramusio under the name of "_La Corte del +Millioni._" Not long afterwards, news came to Venice that the Genoese +were approaching with a powerful armament, and a number of galleys were +immediately fitted out to oppose them, and Marco Polo was made +_sopracomito_ of one of them. In an engagement that ensued he fell into +the hands of the Genoese Admiral Lampa Doria, and was carried prisoner +to Genoa, to which circumstance we owe the advantage of possessing a +permanent record of his travels. Then he spent four years in prison; but +the interest excited amongst the Genoese nobles by the stirring +narrative of his adventures, led them to urge him to allow an account of +his travels to be drawn up from his notes and dictation. His narrative +was thus taken from his mouth in his prison at Genoa, by the hand of his +friend and fellow-traveller Rustichello, a native of Pisa. He afterwards +regained his liberty, but of his subsequent history little or nothing is +known. + +The most interesting portion of his narrative is unquestionably that +which refers to China, of which he speaks under the names of Kataia and +Manji; the former, as we have already stated, denoting the northern, and +the latter the southern part of the empire. The northern kingdom of +Kataia contained the residence of Kublai Khan, while the south, although +subjugated, had not been completely incorporated into the almost +boundless Tartar dominion, which had been established by Kublai's +victorious ancestor, the renowned Zenghis Khan. + +The route by which Polo entered China was along the northern frontier, +and is thus referred to by Mr. Marsden:--"Having reached the borders of +Northern China, and spoken of two places (Succuir, the modern Sucheu, +and Kampion, the modern Kancheu) that are within what is named the Great +Wall, our author ceases to pursue a direct route, and proceeds to the +account of places lying to the north and south, some of them in the +vicinity and others in distant parts of Tartary, according to the +information he had acquired of them on various occasions. Nor does he in +the sequel furnish any distinct idea of the line he took upon entering +China, in company with his father and uncle, on their journey to the +emperor's court, although there is reason to believe that he went from +Kan-cheu to Sining, and there fell into the great road from Thibet to +Peking." Before reaching the latter city, however, they visited +Karakorum, already referred to as the capital of the Khan's dominions +visited by Rubruquis. This city, Mr. Marsden says, was built by Oktar +Khan, the son and successor of Jenghis Khan, about the year 1235, whose +nephew Mangu Khan, made it his principal residence. No traces of it have +been in existence for some centuries, but its position is noted in the +Jesuits' and Danville's maps. J. Reinhold Forster, however, on the +authority of Fischer's _History of Siberia_, observes, that it must be +looked for on the east side of the river Orchon, and not on the Onghin +or Onguimuren, where D'Anville has placed it. + +From the length of time which had elapsed since Nicolo and Maffeo Polo +had left China as Kublai's ambassadors, they were forgotten, but as soon +as the Khan, who was then absent, heard of their arrival at Karakorum, +he issued orders that they should be received with all honour and +escorted to his presence. The appearance of young Marco produced a +highly favourable impression upon the Khan, who immediately took him +under his especial protection. The assiduity of Marco in studying the +language and manners of the Tartars, and the wisdom and prudence which +he exhibited in the exercise of the various important functions in which +he was employed by the Khan, caused him rapidly to rise in the +estimation and favour of that liberal-minded monarch. Upon the removal +of the Khan to Khambalu, a corruption of Khambalig (capital of the +Khan), and understood to be the modern Pekin, Marco followed in his +train. This city was found to surpass in splendour everything that he +had yet met with. The dimensions of the palace comprehended a square, +each side of which was six miles long, a statement not very widely +different from the truth. This enclosure, however, comprised all the +royal armouries, as well as fields and meadows, stored with various +descriptions of game. The roofs of the spacious halls were covered with +gorgeous gilding, and painting in brilliant colours, while +representations of dragons and battles were carved upon the sides. To +the north of the palace stood an eminence called the Green Mountain, of +about a mile in circuit, covered with the finest trees which could be +collected from all parts of the empire, and which had been brought by +elephants to this spot. + +This account strikingly agrees with those of modern travellers, and the +description of the internal government of the country, its postal +arrangements, and the beneficent distribution of grain from the imperial +granaries in times of scarcity, agree with since recognized Chinese +history. + +Marco subsequently made an excursion into the country of Manji, or +Southern China, his route lying by the course of the imperial canal. In +his southward progress, after passing by various cities, he at length +reached Tinqui (Taitcheou), distant about three days' journey from the +sea, where there is an extensive manufactory of salt, an article which +forms a leading article of commerce in China. He next came to Yanqui +(Yangtcheoufou), at the mouth of the river Yang-tsi-kiang, the seat of a +viceroy, in which Polo himself exercised for the space of three years +the supreme jurisdiction. His subsequent route lay along the banks of +the Yang-tsi-kiang, and he incidentally alludes to the noble city of +Nanghin (Nanking), where he speaks of the manufacture of cloths of gold +and silver, but does not seem to have visited the city itself. Taking +thence a southward course, he reached Quinsai (Hang-cheou), or the city +of heaven, the splendour of which still important place was at that time +such, that he speaks of it in the following terms: "In the world there +is not the like, nor a place in which there are found so many pleasures, +that a man would imagine himself in paradise." This city, then the +metropolis of Manji, was in the height of its glory, and may well be +supposed to have surpassed in grandeur any city which Polo had seen; and +if he is to be charged with exaggeration in describing it as one hundred +miles in circumference, and to have contained one million six hundred +thousand houses, and twelve thousand bridges, it must be remembered that +its really immense extent was calculated to mislead the judgment of an +observer, and to make him credulous of the accounts of the inhabitants. +It is still a splendid and very extensive city, and it is not to be +wondered at that Polo, who witnessed its unfaded glories, should have +dwelt with enthusiasm on its spacious and beautiful palaces, and its +waters covered with richly decorated barges. The character of the +inhabitants he describes as effeminate, luxurious, and unwarlike. + +In his southward journey Polo mentions many great cities in Manji, which +it would be difficult to identify with their modern nomenclature. Among +these Unguen, a city of the province of Fokien, is referred to, as +remarkable for its extensive manufacture of sugar, sent from thence to +Khambalu; its natives being described as skilled in the art of refining +it with wood ashes, from persons belonging to Babylonia (Egypt). It is +also worthy of notice, that his embarcation took place at a famous port +called Zaitun, which was much frequented by ships with rich cargoes from +India for the supply of Manji and Kataia, and exceedingly productive in +revenue to the grand Khan, who received ten per cent. on all +merchandise. In spite of this impost, and the heavy freights, amounting +to nearly fifty per cent., the merchants are described as making +enormous profits. + +The inhabitants of the place are represented as distinguished for their +skill in embroidery and tapestry. This has been supposed to mean +Fou-cheou-fu, Amoy, or some neighbouring port in Fokien; but it is +difficult to reconcile this with the statement that one arm of the river +on which this city stood reached to Quinsay, which, as we have already +stated, appears to be intended for the great city of Hang-cheou. + +The next in rotation on our list of eastern travellers, is Giovanni di +Monte Corvino, a Franciscan monk of Calabria, who went as ambassador +from Pope Nicholas IV in 1288 to the grand Khan, and died in Khambalu, +that is, Pekin, holding the distinguished position of archbishop of the +missions in that city. His letters refer to little more than the +progress he made in the advancement of the Roman Catholic religion in +that capital. + +The next traveller in China of whom we have to speak is Oderico +Mattheussi, a Minorite friar, more commonly known under the name of +Oderico de Pordenone, from Pordenone in Friuli, in which place he was +born about the year 1285. He undertook a journey in 1317, accompanied by +several other monks, through Tartary, by Trebizond, to China, and +returned by Thibet to Europe. In 1330, a year before his death, he +dictated in Padua, to Guglielmo di Solagno, a monk, an account of his +travels as they occurred to his memory, in the Italian language. An +English translation is given by Hakluyt in his second volume, from which +we quote the following extracts. + + "Travelling more eastward, I came vnto a city named Fuco, which + conteineth 20 miles in circuit, wherein be exceeding great and + faire cocks, and al their hens are as white as the very snow, + having wol in stead of feathers, like vnto sheep. It is a most + stately and beautiful city, and standeth vpon the sea. Then I went + 18 daies iourney on further, and passed by many prouinces and + cities, and in the way I went ouer a certain great mountaine, vpon + ye one side whereof I beheld al liuing creatures to be as black as + a cole, and the men and women on that side differed somewhat in + maner of liuing fro' others: howbeit, on the other side of the said + hil euery liuing thing was snow-white, and the inhabitants in their + maner of liuing were altogether vnlike vnto others. There, all + maried women cary, in token that they haue husbands, a great trunke + of horne vpon their heads. From thence I traueiled 18 dayes journey + further, and came vnto a certaine great riuer, and entered also + into a city, whereunto belongeth a mighty bridge to passe the said + river. And mine hoste with whom I soiourned, being desirous to shew + me some sport, said vnto me: 'Sir, if you will see any fish taken, + goe with me.' Then he led me vnto the foresaid bridge, carying in + his armes with him certaine diue-doppers or water-foules, bound + vnto a company of poles, and about every one of their necks he tied + a thread, least they should eat the fish as fast as they tooke + them: and he caried 3 great baskets with him also: then loosed he + the diue-doppers from the poles, which presently went into the + water, and within lesse then the space of one houre, caught as many + fishes as filled 3 baskets: which being full, mine hoste vntyed the + threads from about their neckes, and entering a second time into + the river they fed themselues with fish, and being satisfied they + returned and suffered themselues to be bound vnto the saide poles + as they were before. And when I did eate of those fishes, methought + they were exceeding good. + + "Trauailing thence many dayes iourneys, at length I arriued at + another city called Canasia [Quinsay, or Hang-cheou], which + signifieth in our language the city of heaven. Neuer in all my life + did I see so great a citie; for it continueth in circuit an + hundreth miles: neither saw I any plot thereof, which was not + thoroughly inhabited: yea, I sawe many houses of tenne or twelue + stories high, one above another. It hath mightie large suburbs, + containing more people then the citie it selfe. Also it hath twelue + principall gates: and about the distance of eight miles, in the + high way vnto every one of the saide gates, standeth a city as big + by estimation as Venice and Padua. The foresaid city of Canasia is + situated in waters and marshes, which alwayes stand still, neither + ebbing nor flowing: howbeit it hath a defence for the winde like + vnto Venice. In this citie there are mo then 10,002 bridges, many + whereof I remembered and passed over them: and vpon euery of those + bridges stand certaine watchmen of the citie, keeping continuall + watch and ward about the said city, for the great Can the emperour + of Catay. + + "The number of his owne followers, of his wives attendants, and of + the traine of his first begotten sonne and heire apparent, would + seeme incredible vnto any man, vnlesse hee had seene it with his + owne eyes. The foresayd great Can hath deuided his empire into + twelue partes or prouinces, and one of the sayd prouinces hath two + thousand great cities within the precincts thereof. Whereupon his + empire is of that length and breadth, that vnto whatsoeuer part + thereof he intendeth his iourney, he hath space enough for six + moneths continual progresse, except his islands, which are at the + least 5,000. + + "The foresayd emperor (to the end that trauailers may haue all + things necessary throughout his whole empire) hath caused certaine + innes to be prouided in sundry places upon the high wayes, where + all things pertaining vnto victuals are in a continuall readinesse. + And when any alteration or newes happens in any part of his empire, + if he chance to be farre absent from that part, his ambassadors + vpon horses or dromedaries ride post vnto him; and when themselues + and their beasts are weary, they blow their horne; at the noise + whereof, the next inne likewise prouideth a horse and a man, who + takes the letter of him that is weary, and runneth vnto another + inne: and so by diuers innes, and diuers postes, the report, which + ordinarily could skarce come in 30 dayes, is in one naturall day + brought vnto the emperor: and therefore no matter of any moment can + be done in his empire, but straightway he hath intelligence + thereof." + +The next traveller of whom we have to make a short mention, is the +celebrated Arabian author Ibn Batuta, the date of whose journey is 1324. +His point of arrival in China was Zaitun, the port already mentioned of +Marco Polo's embarcation. Its identity is not easy of recognition. From +this port he would seem to have travelled to Hang-cheou and back again, +embarking again at Zaitun. Although his route is not distinctly +traceable, the account he gives of the country appears very accurate. He +particularizes the facility and safety of travelling, and the +convenient, but at the same time rigid surveillance of the hostelries, +in which a register was kept of all strangers who lodged in them. +Silkworms and silk are mentioned, but the latter as being inferior in +value to cotton. The paper money and the manufacture of porcelain are +also referred to. + +In pursuance of our chronological arrangement of travels in China, we +shall here introduce the account of an embassy, though not European, +sent by Mirza Shah Rokh, one of the sons of Tamerlane, to Cathay, in the +year 1419. The ambassadors set out from Herat in Persia, about the month +of November in that year, and reached a spot in the desert within twelve +stages of Sekju (Sucheu), near the great wall in Shensi, on the 14th of +June 1420. At this place they were met, by order of the khan, by some +Cathayans, who erected tents or huts for their accommodation in the +desert, and plentifully supplied them with roasted geese, fowls, and +various kinds of meat, fruits, etc., which were served to them on china +dishes; they likewise regaled them with a variety of strong liquors, +together with a pot of Chinese tea. The chief person in the embassy was +the Emir Sadi Khoja; and, according to the list of the names of the +ambassadors and the number of their retinue, taken down by some Cathayan +secretaries, the entire embassy, including merchants, amounted to eight +hundred and sixty persons. In taking this list, the Cathayan officers +earnestly desired that the exact number should be stated, as a want of +truthfulness would involve them in discredit. Two days after their +arrival, they were invited to the encampment of the dankji or governor +of the borders of Cathay, by whom they were entertained with a +magnificent feast. On reaching the spot, they found a square space of +ground enclosed with tents, in the centre of which was a lofty awning of +cloth supported on wooden pillars, with an imperial canopy of state at +one end, where the throne was placed, as if for the emperor, with other +seats on each side: on the left of this throne were placed the +ambassadors, and on the right the Cathayan officers. Each ambassador had +placed before him two tables, the one covered with a variety of meats +and fruits, the other with cakes and bread, gracefully ornamented with +silk and paper. The other persons present had but one table apiece. At +the lower end of the tent stood a sideboard covered with silver and +china. After the banquet they were entertained with music and a comedy, +in which the actors wore masks representing the faces of animals: among +these a child, enclosed in the body of an artificial stork, amused them +by performing a variety of curious antics. On the next day they reached +a karawl, a strongly fortified outpost, built in a defile in the +mountains, through which all travellers that way must unavoidably go. +Here their retinue was again carefully numbered. They next arrived at +Sucheu, a large and strong square city, where they had lodgings +appointed to them in a public building over the city gates, and were +amply provided with every convenience and comfort for themselves and +their horses, even the servants having mattresses and counterpanes +allowed them for their beds. + +They next came to a city called Khamchu, after which we find them +crossing the river Karamoran by a bridge of boats, and arriving at a +magnificent city containing many splendid temples. From the beauty of +the women, who, contrary to usual Chinese observances, were seen +standing at the doors of the taverns, they designated this town in the +Persian language, Rhosnabad, the city of Beauty. After passing several +rivers they reached Sedinfur, a large city, in which they saw a cast +image of gilt metal of immense proportions, having a great number of +hands with an eye in each. This image rested on a pedestal of polished +stone, and was surrounded by six tiers of balustrades. + +In December 1420, after a journey of ninety-five days, they reached +Kambalu or Pekin, the whole road thither from Sucheu being through so +populous a country that they lodged every night in a large town. Workmen +were at that time still occupied in building the walls of Kambalu. +Immediately on their arrival they were conducted to the palace, and, +though before sunrise, they found a multitude assembled in the outer +court, amounting apparently to no less than one hundred thousand men. At +sunrise, at beat of drum, the prince took his seat on a lofty throne, +placed under a canopy at the outside of the palace, and amidst profound +silence a number of criminals were led in, who had been brought to the +capital from all parts of the empire. Each man had a board fastened to +his neck, specifying his crime and his legal punishment, and was led by +the hair to the emperor, who after inspecting the board pronounced +sentence. Upon the dismissal of the criminals, the Persian ambassadors +were introduced, and after prostrating themselves as demanded, were +graciously received by the emperor. An amusing occurrence, however, had +nearly destroyed all their prospects of success. The monarch having been +slightly injured by a fall from a horse which had been presented to him +by the ambassadors, was so exasperated, that he condemned them all to +imprisonment for life in a distant part of the empire. He afterwards, +however, thought better of his resolution, and merely upbraiding Sadi +Khoja, with the taunt that such a horse ought not to be presented by one +sovereign to another, overlooked the offence; and on hearing that the +animal was sent to him by Tamerlane as an especial favourite, his anger +was entirely appeased. + +Previous to their departure, a circumstance occurred which threw a gloom +over the imperial court,--the most beloved of the emperor's wives died. +And here, _par parenthese_, we would mention a curious custom recorded +in this narrative, respecting the burial of ladies belonging to the +imperial family: they are interred on a certain mountain, on which all +the horses belonging to them are turned out to graze at liberty for the +rest of their lives; all the maidens of their retinue also are placed in +attendance on the grave, and have provisions allowed them for about five +years, and when these are exhausted they are left to die of famine. In +addition to this loss of his favourite wife, the new palace of the +emperor was struck by lightning on the night after the funeral, the +flames causing fearful devastation and loss of life. These afflictions +so affected the emperor, that he fell sick, and the prince his son +assuming the reins of government, gave the ambassadors their audience of +leave. On their return through Cathay they were furnished as before with +every necessary, and at Sucheu, some articles which had been detained +were honourably restored to them. They took their departure by a +circuitous route, in consequence of intestine commotions, and passing +through Khoten and Cashgar proceeded homewards to Herat, which they +reached in September 1422. + +Hitherto we have had to treat of travellers who in the middle ages +reached China by an overland journey; we have now to allude to those who +have visited that country by sea, subsequent to that grand achievement +of the Portuguese, the discovery of the passage by the Cape of Good +Hope. + +The Portuguese themselves were, as might be expected, the first to take +advantage of this expeditious route, and about the same time that they +had succeeded in establishing a communication with the King of Siam they +aimed at forming relations with China. On gaining information of the +boundless wealth of the east and its empires in the productions of +nature and art, King Manoel determined on despatching a squadron farther +eastward to Bengal and China. This squadron, consisting of eight sail, +the commander of which was Fernando Peres d'Andrade, selected on account +of the ability he had shown previously in India, especially at Malacca, +departed, after various unsuccessful cruises, from Malacca on the 17th +June 1517, and arrived on the 15th August at the Island of Tamang +(called by the Portuguese Beniaga), lying three miles from the mainland, +where all foreign ships that trade to Canton must lie at anchor and +transact their business.[3] In the harbour Andrade found Edward Coelho, +who, in a previous expedition, had been separated from him by a storm, +had wintered at Siam, and had already been there a month. Andrade caused +it to be notified to the commander of the Chinese fleet, which was +stationed off the coast there for the protection of merchant ships +against pirates, that he was come on a peaceful embassy from the King of +Portugal to the Emperor of China. The commander bade him welcome, but +referred him to the Pio (great admiral) at Nanto upon the subject of his +business. After various delays and difficulties, occasioned by the +numerous gradations of rank amongst the Chinese authorities, their +ceremoniousness, and the mistrust, imperfectly veiled by civility, of +the Chinese towards strangers, Andrade reached Canton at the close of +September, and ran into the harbour with all the usual nautical +ceremonies. When surprise was expressed at this, he justified himself by +referring to the practice of the Chinese in this particular when their +ships came to Portuguese Malacca. He then begged that he might forward +to the emperor the ambassador and the presents which he had brought with +him, and that the Portuguese fleet might be dismissed as soon as +possible. He was answered civilly, that they would receive the +ambassador, and as soon as permission was obtained from the emperor, +would escort him to court. Meanwhile the commander had permission to +carry on trade in the town, after the ambassador had landed. Andrade now +caused the ambassador, Thomas Pires, with seven Portuguese, richly +dressed, to be put on shore with sound of trumpets and discharge of +cannon. This Tomas Pires, erroneously called by Mendoza, Bartholomew, +though a man of no rank, had been selected for this mission on account +of his scientific qualifications, his tact, and experience. He was an +apothecary by profession, and a practised and competent judge of the +merchandize and productions of India. They not only granted him one of +the best houses in the town, wherein he and his companions received +visits from the most distinguished inhabitants, but also offered them +maintenance, according to the custom observed with ambassadors. This, +however, the commander declined, nor did he accept the invitation to +come on shore, but, excusing himself, sent the factor with some +assistants in his stead, and when a warehouse was granted them near the +fleet, allowed the merchandize to be landed by degrees, and an +interchange of traffic commenced. + +Matters were in this prosperous condition, when circumstances rendered +it necessary for the commander to leave Canton. Many of his people had +become sick from malaria, and nine, including the factor, were dead. +These and other disasters compelled Andrade to take leave of the Chinese +commanders, and he went back to the island of Tamang, where he was +plentifully supplied with all that he required for the repair of his +ships. Before his departure Andrade caused proclamation to be made in +Canton, Nanto, and the harbour of Tamang, that those who had demands on +the Portuguese, should apply to him in order that they might be fully +satisfied. This proceeding gave the Chinese a high opinion of the +integrity of the Portuguese. At the end of September 1518, Fernando +Peres d'Andrade again set saile with his whole fleet, and entered the +harbour of Malacca loaded with renown and riches.[4] + +At his departure from Canton, he left the affairs of the Portuguese so +arranged that their trade with the Chinese might be carried on securely +and peacefully, and with profit to both parties. His brother, Simon +d'Andrade, received from the king a commission to make another voyage to +China, and departed in April 1518 from Malacca. Upon his arrival in +August in the harbour of Tamu, he found that the Portuguese ambassador, +Thomas Pires, had not yet left Canton, as, in spite of three +applications, no order had yet been received from the court to escort +him thither. At length the order came, and Pires went in the beginning +of January 1520 by water as far as the mountain range Malenschwang, +thence to Nankin, where the emperor was, who ordered him to Pekin, where +he himself usually resided on account of the nearness of the Tartars, +with whom he was continually at war. In January 1521, the emperor came +there, and immediately dismissed the embassy. He had received +unfavourable accounts of the Portuguese from the authorities at Canton +and Nankin, whom the King of Bintang had influenced by an emissary; they +told the emperor that, under the pretext of trading, the Portuguese +explored the country with the view of taking it by force of arms, and +that in this way they had made themselves masters of India and Malacca. +Pires therefore was admitted no more into the palace. Meanwhile the +emperor fell ill and died, and the counsellors of his successor were of +opinion that Pires and all his companions should be put to death as +spies. The emperor however ordered the ambassador, real or pretended, to +be sent back to Canton with the presents, and to be kept in custody +there until answer should be received from the Portuguese authorities at +Malacca. Until then no Portuguese or Portuguese merchandise was to be +admitted into the empire. The emperor further commanded that the king of +Malacca, who was an ally of the emperor, and who had been driven out by +the Portuguese, should be restored. + +The severe conditions imposed upon the Portuguese by the emperor are not +to be wondered at, for all the accounts which he had received from his +authorities respecting them were prejudicial, and Simon d'Andrade +himself gave frequent occasion for complaint by inconsiderate or unjust +regulations, contrary both to the laws and to the received opinions of +the country, and provoked the Chinese against the Portuguese; and even +his personal behaviour seems to have been calculated to provoke +animosity.[5] At last a hot encounter took place between the Portuguese +and Chinese ships, during which, fortunately for the Portuguese, a storm +arose, which scattered the Chinese fleet and favoured the flight of the +Portuguese, so that they happily reached Malacca at the end of October. + +Thomas Pires meanwhile was, upon his arrival in Canton, thrown into +prison with all his companions, and died in chains; the presents which +he had brought with him were stolen. The letters, which two or three +years afterwards arrived from the prisoners, contained lamentable +descriptions of the oppressions they had to endure, and of the robberies +which were committed in foreign ships, upon the pretence that they had +Portuguese on board. The great stores of valuable merchandize, gold and +silver from India, were entirely lost. Mendoza does not complete the +tale of Pires's adventures, but some interesting details are given by +Remusat in his _Nouveaux Melanges Asiatiques_, page 205, tom. ii. + +The next Portuguese adventurer who comes within the range of our special +notice, is Ferdinand Mendez Pinto, who from the apparent extravagance of +his accounts became proverbial as an accomplished romancer. Congreve, in +his _Love for Love_, makes Foresight thus address Sir Sampson Legend: +"Ferdinand Mendez Pinto was but a type of thee, thou liar of the first +magnitude." Like most of his predecessors, however, in early travel, he +has by this time recovered much of his forfeited reputation, and, as in +their case, some of his most remarkable statements have been confirmed +by more recent explorations. Being compelled to leave his country from +some accident, which he describes as casting "him into manifest peril of +his life", he took to the sea. The chances of his life led him to +Abyssinia, and subsequently along the coast of Arabia to India. With his +adventures in these countries we have here nothing to do, but pass at +once to the circumstances under which he was thrown upon the coast of +China. At Goa, Pinto hired himself as a soldier to Pedro de Faria, who +was proceeding as governor to Malacca. In this employ he was selected as +Portuguese agent in the company of the ambassador of the Battas, on the +return of the latter to Sumatra from his complimentary visit to Faria, +at Malacca, the seat of government. Here he fell in with one Antonio de +Faria, with whom he joined in a great commercial expedition to be sent +up the Gulf of Siam. + +We pass over various romantic adventures with pirates, described in his +narrative, especially those with one Coja Acem, a native of Guzerat, and +an implacable enemy of the Portuguese, whom Faria at length overcame in +a desperate encounter. The adventurers then sailed to Liampoo (Ning-po), +where Faria gained intelligence of an island called Calempluy, in which +were the tombs of seventeen kings of China, all of gold, and containing +great treasure of various descriptions. This place they sought and +reached, and having plundered, loaded their ships with the treasure. +About a month after they had put to sea, they were wrecked in a furious +gale in the Gulf of Nanking, and fourteen of the Portuguese alone +escaped with their lives. The Chinese gave the shipwrecked pirates but a +harsh reception; they were first thrust into a pond where they were +almost devoured by leeches, and were afterwards sent with other +criminals to Nanking, where they were punished with a severe whipping. +They were subsequently sent to Peking, also chained together in parties +of three, and on their arrival received thirty lashes apiece by way of +welcome. Pinto gives an animated account of the magnificence of these +two great capitals, but splendid as the objects he observed in them +were, they would scarcely bear comparison with those which presented +themselves along the great rivers and canals. The multitude of cities, +together with the abundance which here prevailed, was almost incredible. +The immense concourse of boats at the time of the great fairs, the mode +of rearing water-fowl, their plan of hatching eggs by artificial heat, +the industry and regularity of populace, and their fashion of eating +with chop-sticks, are detailed with great exactness. Upon the whole, his +remarks leave no doubt, we think, of the truth of his having been an +eye-witness of what he records. Upon the subsequent occurrences of his +eventful life, and his final return to Lisbon in 1558, we shall not here +dwell, but proceed to the consideration of the next in order on our list +of European travellers to China. + +Among a series of letters in Spanish, received in 1555 from various +Jesuits in the East, and appended to the 1561 edition of Francisco +Alvarez's _Historia de Ethiopia_, occurs an account of some matters +regarding the customs and laws of the kingdom of China, which a man (who +was a captive there for six years) related at Malacca, in the college of +the Jesuits. This valuable account, we believe, has never before +appeared in English, and is here translated. + + "The Chinese build their towns in the strongest situations, near + rapid rivers, and chiefly at the curves, in order that they may + serve in part for enclosures; and if the towns are half a league in + circuit, they build walls of a league in extent, so that in case of + war they may hold a considerable number of defenders. The towns are + walled with stone built in mortar, for the most part; some, + especially the large towns, have very strong brick walls. They + contain very large buildings, and bridges of half a league, all of + stone excellently wrought, and there are blocks in them so large + that it appears impossible for men to have raised and set them by + any contrivance. One of the things that surprised us much, was to + see eight columns, upon which the government palace is built, in a + town where we were for three years. We measured these columns, and + two men stretching their arms round them did not touch each other; + they appeared to us to be sixty feet high, little more or less; and + it is very strange that men should have been able to raise them and + place them where they are. The houses which are upon them are very + high, all of wood, painted and gilded. An officer resides there who + collects the revenue of the province, and there are similar ones in + the other provinces. Each of these houses is separately enclosed by + walls, within which they are accustomed to plant trees and make + very pleasant gardens, with all kinds of fruit, which the Chinese + are exceedingly fond of, and also of having ponds at their houses + in which they breed fish for their amusement. + + "What is generally considered by the nobility and principal men as + the greatest distinction, is to erect edifices in front of their + gates, in way of an arch going from one side of the street to the + other, so that the people pass underneath; some build them of + stone, others of wood, with all kinds of painting, colours of gold + and blue, with pictures of various birds and other things that may + gratify the sight of the passers by. And they are so curious and + vain in this particular, that he who goes to the greatest expense + therein, is thought most of amongst them. On the border of the + arches are the name and arms of him who caused them to be erected, + in letters of gold and blue. + + "The houses are covered with glazed tiles of many colours, and the + woodwork is much wrought. The streets are very well made and paved + with stone, and the highways are all raised. I say this because + they took us from that town (where we had been prisoners for three + years), and we went one hundred and twenty days' journey, without + going out of the kingdom, and found all the roads raised and even; + and several times when we passed rivers and inquired if most of the + roads that ran forward were similar, we were told that they were, + and that it was a four months' journey to reach the court of the + king, and the roads were all alike. They treated us very well on + the journey, giving us sumpter beasts and every thing necessary. + + "In all the towns there is a street of very noble houses built by + order of the king, in which the officers who perform the service of + visitation lodge. These officers are commissioned with the royal + authority over the governing presidents (who are called in their + language Taquoan). The governors of provinces and those who hold + any command, are chosen for their learning and great prudence, + without regard to anything else, and if the sons are as able as + their fathers they succeed them in their offices, otherwise they + are not admitted by the king into his service. The special + governors of the towns are obliged to sit to hear and do justice to + all, every morning until midday, and after having dined till + sunset. + + "Officers of the court come twice every year, by command of the + king, to make a stay in all the towns, principally to see if the + governors do their duty well, and to remove them at once and put + others in their place, if they are tyrannical, or oppress the + people, or perform their functions ill. These officers examine all + the walls, and if they are in bad condition, order them to be + repaired. They afterwards inquire concerning the royal revenues and + the expenses of the towns, moderating them if they are excessive. + He who gives out money at usury loses it (if proved), and, + moreover, incurs further punishment. In the towns where these + officers come, they cause public notice to be given, in order that + those who are aggrieved by any injustice may come before them. + + "In the town I was speaking of there are six governors, one of whom + takes precedence; and there are also six others whose business it + is to collect the revenues, and one of them is obliged to watch the + town every night with his men, that thieves may not disturb the + people. Others take care to close the gates, which are very strong + and fortified with iron. The governors and magistrates of every + town are charged to write every moon, to the court of the king, an + account of what takes place; and each has to write separately, that + it may be seen if they concert what they write, and whether they + speak truth; for those who lie to the king incur the punishment of + death; wherefore they dread much to state anything false in their + accounts. No man governs in his native place, where he has + relations, that he may do justice to all without respect of + persons. + + "In the principal towns are many strong gaols; we being prisoners + were distributed in six of them. There are prisoners for various + crimes; the most serious with them is murder. The prisoners are + numerous, because the towns are populous; in every gaol there are + three, four, or five hundred of them. A native of the town, where + we were, told us, that in it alone there might be at that time more + than eight thousand prisoners; and that was because it was a + principal town, where those of the neighbouring places were + assembled together. In every gaol there is a book of the prisoners + therein, whom the gaoler counts every night. In that where I was, + sometimes there were three hundred prisoners, at others four + hundred; and although I did not see the other gaols, it appears to + me from this, that there might be as many prisoners as they told + me. + + "The serious crimes go to the court; and for those who come from + thence sentenced to death, the king gives power to the governors of + the towns--if, upon a re-examination of the case, from being nearer + where the offence was committed, they should find them less + guilty--to spare their lives, and condemn them to banishment, or to + the king's service, for so many years, or for their whole life. + They take all possible pains to avoid condemning any to death. It + can scarcely be expressed how much the king is feared by his + subjects: they call him god and king for the strict government and + justice that he maintains in his kingdom, which is necessary from + the people being bad and malicious. + + "In their ancient books they find that at a certain time, white men + with long beards are to take their kingdom of China; on this + account they are so careful of the walls and of fortifying the + towns; and the officers make a muster of the soldiers, they receive + and examine them to see if they are good soldiers; they do the same + with the cavalry; and to those who excel they give rewards + according to their personal qualities, putting also in their heads + a branch with gold and silver leaves, as a sign of honour; but + those who do not satisfy them they dismiss, paying them their hire + and giving them the money with reproachful words. + + "The people of China are, in general, neither brave nor skilful, + nor have they any natural inclination for warlike affairs; if they + maintain themselves it is by the multitude of the people, the + strength of the walls and towns, and the provision of ammunition. + At the boundary of the kingdom of China, where it borders on the + Tartars, there is a wall of wondrous strength, of a month's journey + in extent, where the king keeps a great military force in the + bulwarks. Where this walls comes upon mountains, they cut them in + such a manner that they remain and serve as a wall; for the Tartars + are very brave and skilful in war. At the time we were prisoners, + they broke through a part of the wall and entered into the + territory within for a month and a half's journey; but as the king + prepared great armies of men provided with artful contrivances (in + which the Chinese are very crafty), he kept back the Tartars, who + fight on horse-back. As their horses had become weak and were dying + of hunger, one of the Chinese officers commanded a large quantity + of peas to be placed in the fields, and thus it was that the horses + (being so hungry as they were) set themselves to eat against the + will of their masters; and in this manner the army of the king of + China put them in disorder and turned to drive them out. And now a + strict watch is kept on the wall. + + "They make great feasts in the provinces of the kingdom of China, + every year on the king's birthday; and in the government palaces of + every town, in a hall covered with an awning, and having the walls + and the floor ornamented with very rich coloured cloths, they place + a seat painted of the same colour. This hall has three doors, and + it is the custom of the officers of the towns to enter by any one + of them, on foot like any other man, without taking anything with + him, and without a sunshade before him; in passing they make + obeisance by seven or eight genuflexions, as if the king were + sitting on the seat. Having finished, they go to their houses, and + at this time enter on foot and by any door; for except on this day + they only enter by the middle door and in very rich litters, in + which their servants carry them. They hold it for greater dignity + to go in these litters than on horseback, taking one or two persons + on the right for state, and a sunshade on foot before them, like + those which they use in India. + + "They make another very great feast on the first day of the year, + which is the day upon which we celebrate the feast of the + Circumcision. These feasts last three days; on every one of which + they represent scenes by day and night, for they are much addicted + to the performance of farces. On these three days the gates of the + town are closed, because from much eating and drinking the people + are at times beside themselves. They make other very great feasts + when the king nominates his son for his heir; upon which day, they + declared to me, they release all the prisoners, even those + sentenced to death. At the time that we were prisoners, there came + news that the king intended to make his son a king, upon which the + prisoners in all the gaols rejoiced much. + + "These great kingdoms of China are divided by the same king into + fifteen provinces, and in every one of them there is a chief town, + where there is a governor, who is changed every three years; in + these chief towns the treasure of the king, from the revenue of all + the province, is collected. The privilege for those who shall + betake themselves to the chief town is, that for crimes which they + have committed elsewhere they cannot be taken; and the reason of + this privilege is, that as they are continually carrying on war + with the Tartars and with other kings, if they did not afford this + security these persons would pass over to the enemy. + + "It has been, and still is, the custom to write everything + remarkable and worthy of remembrance on large stones on the + highways, and in the same places where they occurred, principally + in the towns at the government palaces, where the officers reside. + These antiquities are written in the open courts, many of them in + letters of gold; and the noblemen and men of quality are very + curious to read them, and fond of talking of remarkable actions, + and of the dignity and achievements of the former kings. + + "I have heard much of the grandeur of these kingdoms, and seen + somewhat (although little), which to those who have no knowledge of + China would scarcely appear true; wherefore I only speak of those + things that are most common among the people, leaving the rest to + time, which will discover them. The noblest and most populous town + is one where the king resides, which is called Paquin; the natives + (for I did not see it) say that it takes seven days to traverse it + by a direct road, and thirteen to go round it. It is surrounded by + three enclosures and a very copious river, which entirely + encompasses it, forming, as it were, the interior enclosure. + Marvellous things are reported of the riches and structure of the + royal residence; the designs are taken from many provinces of the + same kingdom, none being allowed to go out of it. Before entering + the palaces seven or eight very strong gates have to be passed, + where there are very tall and stout men for guards. The king + (according to what they say) never goes out of that town, and + everything he eats is produced within the walls; he does not go to + the outer enclosures; and they say he is never seen except by those + who attend upon him, who are all eunuchs, sons of noblemen, and who + when once they enter there into the residence, never more depart + from it until death. The king has noblemen about him, very learned + and of great prudence, with whom he transacts all the business of + the kingdom. And these also never go without the enclosure on any + account; they are called Vlaos. The manner of choosing them for + that dignity is this: when there is a vacancy, the king inquires + for some one distinguished in learning and for discretion, and + inclined to justice; if there be one who is commonly held of this + reputation, he orders him to be summoned from any province of the + kingdom where he may be, and invests him with the office of Vlaos. + + "The Chinese observe much exactness in their courtesies and great + neatness in their apparel, both men and women; they generally go + very well dressed, from the quantity of silk there is in the + kingdom. + + "The soil is very productive of necessaries, fruits, and very + singular waters; there are very pleasant gardens, and all kinds of + game and hunting. The Chinese touch no food with their hands, but + all, both small and great, eat with two little sticks for + cleanliness. + + "Their temples are very large edifices, richly wrought, which they + call Valeras, and which cost a great deal, for the statues, which + are of large size, are all covered with beaten gold. The roof of + the temples is gilded, and the walls ornamented with boards well + wrought and painted in pictures. They are skilful workmen in + carpentry. In these temples there are priests (who are obliged to + remain in them always), with an appointed income. They eat neither + flesh nor fish, only herbs, principally beledas, and some fruits; + on certain days they fast. If they do anything that they ought not, + they are driven out and allowed to be priests no longer, and others + are put in their place. + + "No man can go from one province to another without taking a + licence of the governor, and he who is found without one is + punished; and no traveller can be (by law of the kingdom) more than + three or four days in a town where he has not business; there is a + man whose office it is to go about looking to this, and if any such + is found, he is taken up, for they presume him to be a thief and a + man of bad life. And so every one is accustomed to have some + occupation, and to hold some office, even the sons of the officers + and nobles. All employ their sons, of whatever condition they may + be, setting them to read and write, which they vnderstand + generally. Others put them to trade, and they are also in the habit + of placing their sons with officers and noblemen, that they may + learn how to serve. The officers are waited on with much + veneration; all who speak to them do so with genuflexions, and + whatever they have to ask for must be done in writing. + + "The sentences which the officers pronounce are conformable to the + laws of the kingdom; they judge according to the truth of the + matter, which they inquire into themselves, without taking account + of what the parties say; and so they are very correct in affairs of + justice, for fear of the visitation, which, they say, is made every + six months. Their years have twelve moons, and every three years + they add to the year one moon, and thus it has thirteen. + + "The people of any consequence wear black silk for their dress, + because coloured is held dishonourable for clothing; so much so, + that no one dares to go before any officer or person of quality + without a black dress; and if he has gone away from home with a + coloured cloak, and he happens to have to speak to any officer, he + takes a black cloak from some acquaintance whom he meets, and + leaves him his own while he transacts his business. The common + people always speak to the nobles cap in hand, and they may not + wear black cloaks, but only very short coloured ones. The officers + wear a kind of cap, different from other people, for a certain + dignity is kept up amongst them as with us. In these caps they have + tufts made of horsehair, stuck on every part. The king wears the + same, except that they say he has two points cross-wise at the top. + + "They praise and extol the richness of the king's dress, which they + say is always of the colour of heaven. The officers, on the + principal feasts, on the first day of January and at the beginning + of the moon, dress themselves richly in coloured damask, and on the + breast and back of the vesture they bear a stag and an eagle, very + naturally embroidered, for they are clever designers. These + garments look very well; they reach within a hand's breadth of the + ground, and have very long, large, and wide sleeves. They wear + boots of a blackish colour, with soles of white cloth strong as + boards. + + "The officers and nobles, at the death of father or mother or a + very near relation, wear white dresses, very cross and rough; and + they gird themselves with a girdle as thick as the leg, which + reaches to the ground, as does the dress also. Attached to the cap, + they wear another thinner cord. When the deceased are less nearly + related, they also clothe themselves all in white, from the shoes + to the cap, but not so coarse and rough. + + "These are the matters that are most commonly seen and known in + China, where we were prisoners six years; other very remarkable + things that we heard tell of I omit, because I did not see them, + and because it appears to me that every day will discover more and + more." + +The next account of China is by Gaspar da Cruz, a native of Evora, and +one of the order of Friars Preachers; he is thus described by Barbosa +Machado, in his _Biblioteca Lusitana_. + + "Inflamed with an holy ardour of announcing the gospel to distant + barbarians, who were given to idolatry, he set sail in the year 1548 + with twelve companions, of whom the Friar Diego Bernardo was + vicar-general, to the East Indies; and after building a convent at + Goa, and another at Malacca, he penetrated as far as the kingdom of + Camboya; but as the fruits of his labours did not correspond with + his desires, he resolved upon passing on to China in the year 1556, + being the first missionary who illuminated its inhabitants with the + light of the faith, and had the glory of being the precursor of all + those gospel labourers, who with so much labour and expenditure of + blood cultivated that wild but extensive vineyard. He spent many + years in this laborous undertaking, and several times incurred the + risk of his life, especially on one occasion when, in a sumptuous + pagoda, he threw down a multitude of idols, but at the same time + confounded and silenced by the vehement efficacy of his preaching + the greatest masters of Paganism. He returned to his country in + 1569, and was nominated by King Sebastian, bishop of Malacca, but + this dignity he did not accept. He died in 1570, through exposing + himself in charitable exertions to assist the sufferers in a plague + which then raged at Lisbon." + +The narrative of his travels was published in black letter at Evora in +1569-70, 4to., under the title of "Tractado em que se contam muito por +estenso as cousas de China con suas particularidades y assi do Regno +dormuz." In the preface reference is made to a narrative of China by a +fellow-countryman, one Francisco Henriques, but he appears merely to +refer to him as having presented this relation to Sebastian I, King of +Portugal, which seems to have been an unpublished manuscript. An +abbreviated translation of the narrative of his travels is given by +Purchas, in which he mentions "the storie of certaine Portugals, +prisoners in China," one of which he nameth Galotti Perera, from whom he +received great part of his Chinese intelligence. He is also referred to +by Mendoza, in the first chapter of the second book, as one from whom he +"follows many things in the process of his historie." This person is +mentioned by Barbosa Machado under the name of Galeoti Pereyra, brother +of Ruy Pereira I, first Count of Feyra, and as being captive in Funchien +in China. His account appears to have been first printed in Italian at +Venice, from the original Portuguese MS., and an English translation by +R. Willes was given by Richard Eden in his _Historye of Travaile in the +West and East Indies._ As this, though comparatively short, preceded the +narrative of Mendoza now reprinted, and formed the main basis of the +account of Gaspar da Cruz, we think it right to supply the reader with +copious extracts from it, as being for these reasons a highly important +and interesting document. They are as follows: + + "This land of China is parted into 13 shyres, the which sometymes + were eche one a kyngdome by it selfe, but these many years they + haue been all subject unto one kyng. Fuquien is made by the + Portugalles the first shyre, bycause there their troubles bygan, + and had occasion thereby to know the rest. In this shyre be viii + cities, but one principally more famous than others, called + Fuquico, the other seuen are reasonably great, the best known + whereof unto the Portugalles is Cinceo, in respect of a certain + hauen ioyning thereunto, whyther in tyme past they were wont for + merchandyse to resort. + + "Cantan is the second shyre, not so great in quantitie, as well + accoumpted of, both by the kyng thereof and also by the + Portugalles, for that it lyeth nearer vnto Malacca than any other + part of China, and was first discryed by the Portugalles before any + other shyre in that prouince: this shyre hath in it seuen cities. + + "Chequeam is the third shyre, the chiefest citie therein is + Donchion, therein also standeth Liampo, with other thirtiene or + fourtiene boroughes: countrey townes therein to many to be spoken + of. + + "The fourth shyre is called Xutiamfu, the principall citie therof + is great Pachin, where the kyng is alwayes resident. In it are + fyftiene other very great cities: of other townes therein, and + boroughes well walled and trenched about, I will say nothing. + + "The fyft shyre hath name Chelim: the great citie Nanquin, chiefe + of other fyftiene cities, was herein of auncient tyme the royall + seate of the Chinish kynges. From this shyre, and from the + aforesayde Chequeam forwarde, bare rule the other kynges, untyll + the whole region became one kyngdome. + + "The sixt shyre beareth name Quianci, as also the principall citie + thereof, wherein the fyne claye to make vessels is wrought. The + Portugalles beyng ignorant of this countrey, and fyndyng great + abundaunce of that fyne claye to be solde at Liampo, and that very + good cheape, thought at the first that it had been made there; + howbeit, in fine, they perceiued that the standing of Quinzi, more + neare unto Liampo than to Cinceo or Cantan, was the cause of so + muche fine clay at Liampo: within the compasse of Quinci shyre be + other 12 cities. + + "The seuenth shyre is Quicini, the eight Quansi, the nienth Confu, + the tenth Vrnan, the eleuenth Sichiua. In the first hereof there be + 16 cities, in the next fyftiene: howe many townes the other three + haue we are ignorant as yet, as also of the proper names of the 12 + and 13 shyres and the townes therein. + + "This, finally, may be generally sayde heereof, that the greater + shyres in China prouince may be compared with mightie kyngdomes. + + "In eche one of these shyres be set Ponchiassini and Anchiassini, + before whom are handled the matters of other cities. There is also + placed in eche one a Tutan, as you would say a gouernor, and a + Chian, that is a visitor, as it were, whose office is to goe in + circuit and to see iustice exactly done. By these meanes so + upryghtly thinges are ordered there, that it may bee worthely + accompted one of the best gouerned prouinces in all the world. + + "The king maketh alwayes his abode in the great citie Pachin, as + muche as to say in our language, as by the name thereof I am + aduertised, the towne of the kyngdome. This kyngdome is so large, + that vnder fyue monethes you are not able to traueyle from the + townes by the sea syde to the court and backe agayne, no not vnder + three monethes in poste at your vrgent businesse. The posthorses in + this countrey are litle of bodie, but swyfte of foote. Many doe + traueyle the greater parte of this iourney by water in certayne + lyght barkes, for the multitude of ryuers commodious for passage + from one citie to another. + + "The kyng, notwithstandyng the hugenesse of his kyngdome, hath such + a care thereof, that every moone (by the moones they reckon their + monethes) he is aduertised fully of whatsoeuer thing happeneth + therein, by these meanes folowyng. + + "The whole prouince beyng diuided into shyres, and eche shyre + hauyng in it one chiefe and principall citie, whereunto the matters + of all the other cities, townes, and boroughes are brought, there + are drawen in euery chiefe citie aforesayde, intelligences of suche + thinges as doe monethely fall out, and be sent in writing to the + court. If happely in one moneth euery post is not able to goe so + long a way, yet doeth there notwithstandyng once euery moneth + arryue one post out of the shyre. Who so commeth before the newe + moone, stayeth for the deliuery of his letters vntyll the moone be + chaunged. Then lykewyse are dispatched other postes backe into all + the 13 shyres agayne. + + "Before that we doe come to Cinceo we have to passe through many + places, and some of great importance. For this countrey is so well + inhabited neare the sea syde, that you cannot go one myle but you + shall see some towne, borough, or hostry, the which are so + abundantly provided of all thinges, that in the cities and townes + they liue ciuily. Nevertheles such as dwel abrode are very poore, + for the multitude of them euery where is so great, that out of a + tree you shal see many tymes swarme a number of children where a + man would not haue thought to haue founde any one at all. + + "From these places in number infinite, you shall come vnto two + cities very populose, and beyng compared with Cinceo, not possibly + to be discerned which is the greater of them. These cities are as + well walled as any cities in all the worlde. As you come in to + eyther of them, standeth so great and mightie a brydge, that the + lyke thereof I haue neuer seene in Portugall nor els where. I heard + one of my felowes say, that he told in one bridge 40 arches. The + occasion wherefore these bridges are made so great, is for that the + countrey is toward the sea very plaine and low, and ouerwhelmed + euer as ye sea water encreaseth. The breadth of the bridges, + although it bee well proportioned vnto the length therof, yet are + they equally buylt, no higher in the middle than at eyther end, in + such wyse that you may directly see from ye one end to the other, + the sydes are wonderfully well engraved after the maner of Rome + workes. But that we did most marueyle at, was therewithall the + hugenesse of ye stones, the lyke wherof as we came into the citie, + we dyd see many set up in places dishabited by the way, to no small + charges of theyrs, howbeit to little purpose, whereas no body seeth + them but such as doe come bye. The arches are not made after our + fashion, vauted with sundry stones set togeather; but paved, as it + were, whole stones reaching from one piller to an other, in suche + wyse that they lye both for the arches heades and galantly serue + also for the hygh waye. I haue been astunned to beholde the + hugenesse of these aforesayde stones, some of them are XII pases + long and upwarde, the least a XII good pases long, and a halfe. + + "The wayes echewhere are galantly paued with foure square stone, + except it be where for want of stone they vse to laye bricke: in + this voyage wee traueyled ouer certayne hilles, where the wayes + were pitched, and in many places no worse paued than in the playne + grounde. This causeth us to thinke, that in all the worlde there be + no better workemen for buildinges than the inhabitantes of China. + + "The countrey is so well inhabited, that no one foote of ground is + left untilled; small store of cattell haue we seene this way, we + sawe onely certayne oxen wherewithall the countreymen doe plough + theyr grounde. One oxe draweth the plough alone, not onely in this + shyre, but in other places also wherein is greater store of + cattell. These countrymen by arte doe that in tyllage which we are + constrayned to doe by force. Here be solde the voydinges of close + stooles, although there wanteth not the dunge of beastes; and the + excrements of man are good marchandise throughout all China. The + dungfermers seeke in euery streete by exchange to buye this durtie + ware for hearbes and wood. The custome is very good for keepyng the + citie cleane. There is great aboundance of hennes, geese, duckes, + swyne, and goates; wethers haue they none: the hennes are solde by + weight, and so are all other thinges. Two pounde of hennes fleshe, + goose, or ducke, is worth two Foi of their money, that is, _d. ob._ + sterling. Swines flesh is solde at a peny the pounde. Beefe beareth + the same pryce, for the scarcitie thereof; howbeit northwarde from + Fuquieo, and farther of from the sea coast, there is beefe more + plentie and solde better cheape; beefe onely excepted, great + aboundance of all these viandes we haue had in all the cities we + passed through. And if this countrey were lyke vnto India, the + inhabitants whereof eate neyther henne, beefe, nor porke, but keepe + that onely for the Portugalles and Moores, they would be solde here + for nothing. But it so fallyng out that the Chineans are the + greatest eaters in all the world, they doe feede uppon all thinges, + specially on porke, the fatter that is, vnto them the lesse + lothsome. The highest price of these thinges aforesayde I haue set + downe, better cheape shall you sometymes buye them, for the great + plentie thereof in this countrey. Frogges are solde at the same + price that is made of hennes, and are good meate amongst them, as + also dogges, cattes, rattes, snakes, and all other vncleane meates. + + "The cities be very gallant, specially near vnto the gates, the + which are marueylously great, and couered with iron. The gatehouses + buylt on hygh with towers, the lower parte thereof is made of + bricke and stone, proportionally with the walles; from the walles + vpward, the buyldyng is of tymber, and many stones in it one aboue + the other. The strength of theyr townes is in the mightie walles + and ditches, artillarie haue they none. + + "The streetes in Cinceo, and in all the rest of the cities we haue + seene are very fayre, so large and so streight that it is + wonderfull to beholde. Theyr houses are buylt with tymber, the + foundations onely excepted, the which are layd with stone; in eche + syde of the streetes are paynteles or continuall porches for the + marchantes to walke vnder: the breadth of the streete is + neuerthelesse suche, that in them XV men may ryde commodiously syde + by syde. As they ryde they must needes passe vnder many hygh arches + of triumph that crosse ouer the streetes made of tymber, and carued + diuersely, couered with tyle of fine claye: vnder these arches the + mercers doe vtter theyr small wares, and such as lyst to stande + there, are defended from rayne and the heate of the sunne. The + greater gentlemen haue these arches at their doores, although some + of them be not so myghtyly buylt as the rest. + + "I shall haue occasion to speake of a certayne order of gentlemen + that are called Loutea; I will first therefore expound what this + worde signifieth. Loutea is as muche to say in our language as Syr, + and when any of them calleth his name, he answereth Syr: and as we + doe say, that the kyng hath made some gentleman, so say they that + there is made a Loutea. And for that amongst them the degrees are + diuers both in name and office, I will tell you onely of some + principalles, beyng not able to aduertise you of all. + + "The maner howe gentlemen are created Louteas, and doe come to that + honour and title, is by the gyuynge of a broad gyrdle not like to + the rest, and a cap, at the commandement of the kyng. The name + Loutea is more generall and common vnto moe, than equalitie of + honour thereby signified, agreeth withall. Such Louteas that doe + serue their prince in weightie matters for iustice, are created + after triall made of their learning; but the other, whiche serue in + smaller affayres, as capitaynes, constables, sergeantes by lande + and sea, receyuers, and such lyke, wherof there be in euery citie, + as also in this, very many, are made for fauour: the chiefe Louteas + are serued kneelyng. + + "The Louteas are an idle generation, without all maner of exercises + and pastymes, excepte it be eatyng and drynkyng. Somtymes they + walke abrode in the fieldes to make the souldyers shoot at prickes + with theyr bowes, but theyr eatyng passeth: they wyll stande eatyng + euen when the other do drawe to shoote. + + "The inhabitants of China be very great idolaters, all generally do + worshyppe the heauens: and as we are woont to saye, God knoweth it, + so say they at euery worde, Tien Tautee, that is to saye, _the + heauens do knowe it_. Some do worshyp the sonne, and some the + moone, as they thynke good, for none are bounde more to one then to + an other. In their temples, the which they do cal Meani, they haue + a great altar in ye same place as we have; true it is that one may + goe rounde about it. There set they up the image of a certayne + Loutea of that countrey, whom they haue in great reuerence for + certaine notable thinges he dyd. At the ryght hande standeth the + deuyl, muche more vglie paynted then we do vse to set hym out, + whereunto great homage is done by suche as come into the temple to + aske counsell, or to drawe lottes: this opinion they haue of hym, + that he is malitious and able to do euyl. If you aske them what + they do thynke of the soules departed, they will answeare, that + they be immortall, and that as soone as any one departeth out of + this life, he becometh a deuyle if he haue liued well in this + worlde; if otherwyse, that the same deuyl changeth him into a + bufle, oxe, or dogge. Wherfore to this deuyl do they much honour, + to hym do they sacrifice, praying hym that he wyll make them lyke + vnto hym selfe, and not lyke other beastes. They haue moreouer an + other sorte of temples, wherein both uppon the altars and also on + the walles do stande many idoles well proportioned, but bare + headed. These bare name Omithofon, accompted of them spirites, but + suche as in heaven do neither good nor euyll; thought to be suche + men and women as haue chastlye lyued in this worlde in abstinence + from fyshe and fleshe, fedde only with ryse and salates. Of that + deuyl they make some accompte, for these spirites they care litle + or nothyng at all. Agayne, they holde opinion that if a man do well + in this lyfe, the heauens wyll geue hym many temporall blessynges; + but if he do euyll, then shall he haue infirmities, diseases, + troubles, and penurie, and all this without any knowledge of God. + + "In the principall cities of the shyres be foure cheefe Louteas, + before whom are brought all matters of the inferiour townes + throughout the whole realme. Diuers other Louteas haue the + maneagyng of iustice and receyuyng of rentes, bounde to yeeld an + accompte thereof vnto the greater officers. Other doo see that + there be no euyll rule keept in the citie: eache one as it behoueth + hym. Generally al these do impryson malefactours, cause them to be + whypped and racked, hoysing them vp and downe by the armes with a + corde, a thyng very vsuall there, and accompted no shame. These + Louteas do vse great diligence in ye apprehending of theeues, so + that it is a wonder to see a theefe escape away in any towne, + citie, or village. Upon the sea neere vnto the shore many are + taken, and looke euen as they are taken, so be they fyrst whypped, + and afterward layd in prison, where shortly after they all dye for + hunger and colde. At that tyme when we were in pryson, there died + of them aboue threescore and ten. Yf happely any one hauyng the + meanes to geat foode do escape, he is set with the condemned + persones, and prouided for as they be by the kyng, in such wyse as + hereafter it shalbe sayde. + + "Theyr whyps be certayne peeces of canes, cleft in the middle, in + such sort that they seeme rather playne then sharpe. He that is to + be whipped lieth grouelong on the ground. Upon his thighes the + hangman layeth on blowes myghtely with these canes, that the + standers by tremble at theyr crueltie. Ten strypes drawe a great + deale of blood, twentie or thyrtie spoyle the fleshe altogeather, + fyftie or threescore wyll require long tyme to be healed, and yf + they come to the number of one hundred, then are they incurable. + + "Wee are wont to call this countrey China, and the people Chineans; + but as long as we were prisoners, not hearing amongst them at any + tyme that name, I determined to learne howe they were called: and + asked sometymes by them thereof, for that they vnderstoode vs not + when wee called them Chineans, I answered them that all the + inhabitantes of India named them Chineans, wherefore I prayed them + that they would tell mee for what occasion they are so called, + whether peradventure any citie of theyrs bare that name. Heerevnto + they alwayes answered mee, to haue no suche name, nor euer to haue + had. Than dyd I aske them what name the whole countrey beareth, and + what they would answere beyng asked of other nations what + countrymen they were: It was tolde me that of auncient tyme in this + countrey had been many kynges, and though presently it were all + vnder one, eche kyngdome neuertheless enioyed that name it fyrst + had: these kyngdomes are the prouinces I spake of before. In + conclusion they sayde, that the whole countrey is called Tamen, and + the inhabitantes Tamegines, so that this name China or Chineans is + not hearde of in that countrey. I doe thinke that the nearenesse of + an other prouince thereabout called Cochin-China, and the + inhabitantes thereof Cochinesses, fyrst discouered before that + China was, lying not farre from Malacca, dyd gyue occasion both to + the one nation and to the other of that name Chineans, as also the + whole countrey to be named China. But their proper name is that + aforesayde. + + "I haue hearde moreouer that in the citie Nanquim remayneth a table + of golde, and in it written a kyng his name, as a memory of that + residence the kynges were wont to keepe there. This table standeth + in a great pallace, couered alwayes except it bee in some of theyr + festiuall dayes, at what tyme they are wont to let it be seene: + couered neuerthelesse as it is, all the nobilitie of the citie + goeth of duetie to doe it euery day reuerence. The lyke is done in + the head cities of all the other shyres in the pallaces of the + Ponchiassini, wherein these aforesayde tables doe stande, with the + kyng his name written in them, although no reuerence be done + therevnto but in solempne feastes. + + "I haue lykewyse vnderstoode that the citie Pachin, where the kyng + maketh his abode, is so great, that to goe from one syde to the + other, besydes the subarbes, the which are greater than the citie + it selfe, it requyreth one whole day a horsebacke, going hackney + pase. In the subarbes be many wealthy marchantes of all sortes. + They tolde me furthermore that it was moted about, and in the motes + great store of fyshe, wherof the kyng maketh great gaynes. + + "They haue moreouer one thing very good, and that whiche made vs + all to marueyle at them, beyng Gentiles: namely, that there be + hospitalles in all theyr cities, alwayes full of people, we neuer + sawe any poore body begge. We therefore asked the cause of this: + answered it was, that in euery citie there is a great circuit, + wherein be many houses for poore people, for blinde, lame, old + folke, not able to traueyle for age, nor hauyng any other meanes to + lyue. These folke haue in the aforesayde houses, euer plentie of + rice duryng theyr lyues, but nothyng els. Such as be receyued into + these houses, come in after this maner. Whan one is sicke, blinde, + or lame, he maketh a supplication to the Ponchiassi, and prouyng + that to be true he wryteth, he remayneth in the aforesayde great + lodgyng as long as he lyueth: besides this they keepe in these + places swyne and hennes, whereby the poore be releeued without + goyng a beggyng. + + "The kyng hath in many ryuers good store of barges full of sea + crowes, that breede, are fedde, and do dye therein, in certayne + cages, allowed monethly a certayne prouision of ryce. These barges + the kyng bestoweth vpon his greatest magistrates, geuyng to some + two, to some three of them, as he thynketh good, to fyshe + therewithall after this maner. At the houre appoynted to fyshe, all + the barges are brought togeather in a circle, where the riuer is + shalowe, and the crowes, tyed togeather vnder the wynges, are let + leape downe into the water, some vnder, some aboue, worth the + lookyng vppon: eche one as he hath filled his bagge, goeth to his + owne barge and emptieth it, which done, he retourneth to fyshe + agayne. Thus hauyng taken good store of fyshe, they set the crowes + at libertie, and do suffer them to fyshe for theyr owne pleasure. + There were in that citie where I was, twentie barges at the least + of these aforesayde crowes; I wente almost euery day to see them, + yet coulde I neuer be thoroughly satisfied to see so straunge a + kynde of fyshyng." + +The Spaniards were long behind their neighbours the Portuguese in +prosecuting the important task of eastern investigation. The Papal +division of the world between the discoverers of the two nations by the +boundary of a certain meridian, made them follow the line of exploration +to the westward. + +The Father Andres de Urdaneta, who, previous to entering himself as a +monk of the order of the Augustins, had been a skilful navigator, +persuaded Philip II to realize the conquest of the Philippines, where +the voyages and the life of the celebrated Magellan were brought to a +close. This prince consequently issued orders to the viceroy of Mexico, +to send out an expedition under the command of a native of Mexico, named +Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, and desired that Andres de Urdaneta should +accompany him, together with four other Augustines, viz., Diego de +Herrera, Martin de Herrada, Pedro de Gamboa, and Andres de Aguirre. The +fleet arrived in 1565 at the island of Zebu. On the 1st of June the same +year, the Father Andres de Urdaneta returned to Mexico. In 1566 Legaspi +built the town of Zebu, and the Augustines established a monastery as a +station for their missions among the natives. The Spaniards, pursuing +their conquests, arrived in 1571 at the island of Luzon, the most +northerly and the largest of this archipelago: Legaspi here founded the +city of Manilla. + +The work of conversion and civilization was scarcely begun, when the +island was engaged in a quarrel by the attacks of the Malays of Borneo +and Mindanao. These pirates, too cunning to venture on an open struggle, +landed suddenly on the coast, slaughtered or extorted money from the +missionaries, and carried away several of the natives, whom they +afterwards sold as slaves. In 1574 a more serious aggression diverted +attention from the attacks of these pirates: a Chinese corsair, who was +called King Limahon, appeared before Manilla. For a long time he had +resisted the squadrons of his emperor, but at last, vanquished by +numbers and forced to flee, he entertained the project of conquering +Luzon with seventy-two vessels, which carried two thousand soldiers, +bold adventurers, besides the sailors and one thousand five hundred +women. They effected a landing on the 29th of November 1574, just after +Lopez de Legaspi had been appointed governor-general of the Philippines. +The corsairs marched against the Spanish town, which they expected to +surprise; but a little corps of advanced guard, under the orders of +Captain Velasquez, having given the garrison time to rally, a general +battle took place, and ended in the defeat of the Chinese. Limahon in +vain essayed to renew the attack: repulsed afresh, he took refuge at the +mouth of the river Lingayen, in Pangasinan, the northern province of +Luzon. At the time of his attack, he had been closely followed by a +Chinese captain, charged to watch him, and who had a conference with the +Spanish governor. The latter thought this a favourable occasion for +introducing the Gospel into China. Having sent for Alfonso de Alvarado, +provincial of the Augustins, a venerable and holy old man, one of those +whom Charles V had sent to the discovery of New Guinea, he told him to +select missionaries for the Celestial Empire. The provincial in his joy +offered to go there himself, old as he was; but the governor would by no +means consent to this proposal. The choice fell upon Martin de Herrada, +or Rada, a native of Pampeluna, in Navarre, who had already filled the +office of provincial, and who burned with such desire to convert the +Chinese, that after having studied their language, he had made a +proposal to some merchants of that nation who had come to the +Philippines, that they should carry him as a slave to their country, +where by this means he hoped to introduce the knowledge of the Gospel. +They chose also Friar Geronimo Marin, a native of Mexico, a man equally +distinguished for his piety and learning, and in company with these two +missionaries, who they hoped would be able to remain a considerable time +in China and to spread the knowledge of the Gospel there, they sent two +soldiers, who were to bring back news respecting the progress of the +mission. Besides other presents, the governor gave the Chinese captain +all the slaves of his nation which the Spaniards had taken from Limahon, +who was at that time held under blockade, to take them back free to +their country. The 5th of July 1575, the friars landed at Tansuso +[Gan-hai], whence, on their way to visit the governor of Chincheo +[Tsiuen-cheu] they passed through the town of Tangoa [Tong-gan] in +China.[6] The mandarin of Chincheo, of whom the captain who conducted +them held his commission, gave them a good reception; but as the +ambassadors were sent by a simple lieutenant of the king of Spain, and +not direct from the monarch, he insisted that they should address him on +their knees. This mandarin, after having entertained them at a banquet, +sent them with a good escort to the Tutan or viceroy of the province. +They then made a journey of thirty leagues, carried in palanquins. At +Aucheo [Focheou, so pronounced in the Fokien dialect] they met with an +honourable reception. Each of the monks received a present of six pieces +of silk tissue, which they crossed upon their breast in the manner of a +stole, and two bouquets of silver: the other members of the embassy also +had presents. As to the alliance proposed between Spain and China, and +the permission requested by the missionaries for the exercise of their +apostolic ministry, the viceroy referred them to the emperor. While +waiting the reply from Pekin, the monks bought many books in the Chinese +language, and visited the pagodas. The principal contained one hundred +and eleven idols, all carved in relief and gilded. Three in particular +attracted their attention. The first was a body with three heads, which +looked at one another: they believed they saw in it a vague symbol of +the Trinity. The second was a woman who held a little infant in her +arms; they called her the Virgin Mother and the Divine Infant. The third +represented to them an apostle. The monks having been to examine the +gates of the city, this demand awakened the suspicions of the viceroy, +who would seldom permit them to go out after. Upon his desiring to see +some piece of writing by their hand, they copied for him the Lord's +Prayer and the Ten Commandments, putting the Chinese translation to the +Spanish text; and the viceroy took great pleasure in reading them. He +only retarded their departure till the arrival of the visitor of the +province, who desired to see them. The curiosity of this functionary +once satisfied, he gave them rich presents for the Spanish governor of +the Philippines, saying that they might return when they brought Limahon +dead or alive. They then left Aucheo to return to Chincheo, where they +made no lengthened stay, the mandarin of this town attending them to the +port of Tansuso. After fresh entertainments, the Chinese captain who had +brought them, was charged with the task of reconducting them to Manilla, +and they embarked on the 14th of September 1575. _En route_, they +learned that Limahon, who had been blocked up by the Spaniards, had +contrived to escape with part of his troops, and had gained the island +of Formosa. + +The flight of Limahon disconcerted the Chinese captain who brought back +the missionaries, and who feared that he should be disgraced on this +account when he returned to China. This captain, to whom they explained +the principal points of the Christian faith, would have embraced it, had +he not feared the punishment inflicted in his country on those who +forsake the national religion. He said even that they would easily +succeed in converting the Chinese, if they could first gain over the +emperor, by means of an embassy sent to him by the King of Spain. + +Herrada, thus prevented from preaching, had not been idle during his +stay in China; he composed a vocabulary of the Chinese language, now +apparently unknown, and drew up a succinct account of his voyage, +respecting which we translate some very curious remarks by the Friar +Geronimo de Ramon, in his _Republicas del Mundo_. He says that this +treatise fell into his hands, but was taken away by some one, he could +not tell by whom, and never returned to him; a circumstance which caused +him much annoyance, because he wished to write the _Republic of China_; +but it turned out, he says, the better for him, for he wrote in +consequence to the Licenciate Juan de Rada, Alcalde of the Upper Court +of Navarre and brother of Martin, who sent him a great number of +interesting papers of his brother's. He then proceeds to speak of the +high respectability and credibility of De Rada, on account of his rank +and distinguished piety. An original letter by De Rada, however, giving +a succinct account of his embassy is inserted by the Friar Gaspar de San +Augustin, in his _Conquistas de las Islas Philipinas_, to which we refer +the reader for full accounts of all the movements of those zealous +preachers of the gospel in the Philippines and in China at that early +period. + +De Rada's treatise formed the basis of the narrative compiled by +Mendoza, which is now republished. On his return from China, his ship +being stranded on the island of Bolinao, he and his companions were +stript of everything and left naked; but were saved by the providential +arrival of a Spanish armament, which conducted them safe to Manilla, +where he died in 1577. + +His narrative was transmitted to Philip II, in the year 1576, by the +hands of his companion, the Friar Geronimo Marin, and the king +consequently nominated three ambassadors; viz., Marin, the Father Juan +Gonzalez de Mendoza (the compiler of the work now reprinted, a native of +Toledo, and who had left the career of a soldier for the garb of a monk +of the order of St. Augustine), and Father Francisco de Ortega: all +these were Augustinians. They were dispatched to Mexico for the purpose +of making suitable additions to the costly presents provided by the +king; but the viceroy of Mexico, instead of favouring their immediate +departure, threw so many obstacles in the way, that it was not till 1584 +that the embassy was carried out, and it ultimately proved a complete +failure. + +Meanwhile the work of evangelization was not confined to the +Augustinians. Some Franciscans of the province of St. Joseph, in Spain, +were sent to their assistance, and among these Pedro de Alfaro, the +narrative of whose adventures is given by Mendoza in the second book of +the second part. The place and date of his birth are not recorded. We +know only that he arrived in Manilla from Spain on the 2nd July 1578, +with fourteen brothers of his order, of which he was the superior, to +assume the post of chief "costodio" of the province of St. Gregory in +Luzon, and that he built a church in that city. On his arrival, he soon +became acquainted with the mission of Martin de Rada in China, and +conceived an earnest desire to penetrate that almost inaccessible +empire. He therefore solicited permission for that purpose from +Francisco de Sande, Alcalde of the royal audience of Mexico, Governor of +the Philippines; but the failure of the former mission, and the fear of +compromising the newly opened relations between the countries, caused a +refusal. Upon this the zealous missionary resolved upon embarking +without permission. He took with him Juan Bautista de Pizaro, Augustin +de Tordesilla, and Sebastiano de Becotia, all three Franciscans, three +Spanish soldiers, four natives of the Philippines, and a young Chinese +taken from Limahon, to serve as an interpreter. + +Without any nautical experience, they trusted themselves to a little +boat, and managed to pass, as if by miracle, through the fleet of +vessels which guarded the coast, and entered the port of Canton. On +being led before a judge and asked what they sought, and how they had +found their way, they freely stated the facts, and announced that their +wish was to teach the way to heaven to the inhabitants of China. A +native Christian, however, who acted as interpreter, considering his and +their safety rather than the truth, adroitly modified their statement, +and declared that they were holy men like the bonzes, that they had had +no idea of visiting China, but in sailing from the Philippines to the +Hilocos they had suffered shipwreck and lost most of their crew. Their +only resource had been this little bark, which had unexpectedly brought +them into this unknown port. The mandarin who examined them enquired +what they had in the vessel, and was told that they had no weapons or +merchandize, but only their books and articles used in their worship. He +was much interested with the sight of these when they were brought, but +expressed surprise that they had been saved in such a storm. The +ingenious interpreter replied, that they had been saved as the most +valuable objects they possessed. The result of this examination was a +formal permission to land. They were not, however, allowed to preach. +For some time they suffered much from want, but were at length liberally +supplied from the public funds with the necessaries of life. +Misrepresentations meanwhile were made respecting them, which subjected +them to a second lengthy examination, which resulted in their being sent +to Fucheou by order of the viceroy of that city, in order that +everything they possessed might be inspected. This journey enabled them +to make the observations on the country recorded by Mendoza in the +second volume. The viceroy asked them some questions and handed them +over to his deputy, who treated them with much courtesy. After a stay of +several days in Fucheou, the Timpintao or deputy sent them back to +Canton, upon arriving at which place they were ordered to prepare to +leave the kingdom. This command, in their then state of destitution, +overwhelmed them with dismay, and they made strenuous efforts, but +without success, to gain some assistance in these trying circumstances. +Some of them received a licence to go to Macao, and others to Luzon. +Those who resolved upon returning to the Philippines proceeded to +Tsiuencheu, where they embarked, and reached Luzon on the 2nd February +1580. + +The various and repeated disasters, consequent upon the zealous efforts +of these adventurous friars, may well explain the failure of the mission +of which Mendoza was a member. As a compensation for his failure, +however, he adopted a course which was calculated to be far more +practically useful. He collected the accounts of the various Portuguese +and Spanish priests, which have been already alluded to; viz., Gaspar da +Cruz, Martin de Rada, Pedro de Alfaro, etc., and brought them together +into one volume for publication. In this task he must have received +valuable assistance from his colleague in the mission, Geronimo de +Marin, who, in company with De Rada, had been an eye-witness of the most +important facts detailed throughout the work. To these were added, as a +sort of appendix, an "Itinerario del Nuevo Mundo", in which is inserted +a comparatively short account of the adventures of another party of +Franciscans in China, in the year 1581, at the head of whom was Father +Martin Ignazio [de Loyola], a relation of the celebrated founder of the +Jesuits. It is but a repetition of similar disasters to those already +recounted, the whole party narrowly escaping with their lives. + +The ill success of the Augustinians and Franciscans did not deter the +well-known perseverance of the Jesuits, who, of all the monkish orders, +have undoubtedly done the most for the diffusion of Christianity; and +although it is not our province here to relate the details of their +progress, it appears but an interesting sequel to the discouragements we +have related, to mention the final triumph of the eminent Matteo Ricci, +in the year 1600, in gaining access to the emperor at Pekin, and being +finally permitted to settle in that capital. Nor can we refrain in this +place, and at this particular juncture of Chinese affairs, from +presenting the reader with the following translated extract from a +letter written by that distinguished man in 1584, together with some +observations by its recipient, one Geronimo Roman, factor of the +Philippines at Macao. The document referred to was first printed by M. +Ternaux Compans, in his _Archives des Voyages, ou collection d'anciennes +relations inedites ou tres-rares_, and is, as he observes, especially +curious for the suggestions it contains with reference to the conquest +of China. It is as follows:-- + + "The power of China rests rather upon the great number of towns and + the multitude of inhabitants, than upon the valour of the people. + There are more than sixty millions of rated persons inscribed on + the royal registers, exclusive of the public functionaries and + those people who are too poor to pay taxes. All the neighbouring + kingdoms pay tribute to the King of China, excepting Japan, which + has freed itself recently; it is on this account that the Chinese + are accustomed to consider their country as the centre of the + world, and to despise all other nations. They are very much dreaded + by all the kings in the vicinity, because they can assemble, in a + moment, so considerable a fleet, that it frightens them by the + number of vessels; the Chinese, however, are but poor warriors, and + the military is one of the four conditions which are considered + mean among them. Nearly all the soldiers are malefactors, who have + been condemned to perpetual slavery in the king's service; they are + only fit to war with thieves. Thus, whenever two or three Japanese + vessels happen to make a descent upon the coast, the crews + penetrate into the interior, even seize upon the large towns, + pillage and put everything to fire and sword, and no one dares to + resist them. But, being badly led themselves, they always end by + falling into some ambuscade, and very few of them return to Japan. + It also happens sometimes that brigands intrench themselves upon a + mountain, in the interior of the country, and all the force of the + empire is insufficient to dislodge them. It is said, moreover, that + the Tartars ravage the frontiers of the empire; in short, it + appears to me the most difficult thing in the world to regard the + Chinese as warriors. They have no more spirit than women, and are + ready to kiss the feet of any one who shows his teeth at them. They + spend two hours every morning in combing and plaiting their hair. + Running away is no dishonour with them; they do not know what an + insult is; if they quarrel they abuse one another like women, seize + each other by the hair, and when they are weary of scuffling become + friends again as before, without wounds or bloodshed. Moreover it + is only the soldiers who are armed; others are not permitted to + have even a knife in their houses; in short, they are only + formidable from their numbers. The walls of the towns are, at most, + but fit to protect them from robbers; they are built without any + geometrical knowledge, and have neither _revers_ nor ditches.... + + "The above is [an extract from] Father Resi [Ricci]'s letter + forwarded to me by Father Ruggiero; I think it necessary to add the + following observations:-- + + "The King of China maintains a numerous fleet on this coast, + although he is not at war with any one. In an island called Lintao, + which is situated near this town [Macao], there is an arsenal, the + director or haytao of which is continually occupied in + superintending the building and equipment of vessels. The island + furnishes timber, but every other necessary for them has to be + imported from the continent. There are always more than two hundred + and fifty armed vessels in this province of Canton, as far as + Chincheo, where a separate jurisdiction begins, and the coasts of + which are guarded by another fleet. The admiral has the title of + Chunpin; it is a very high rank, although inferior to the tutan; he + has a numerous guard and many drums and trumpets, which make a most + agreeable music to the ears of the Chinese, but an insufferable din + to ours. + + "These vessels go out a little when it is fine weather, but hasten + back at the least wind. They have some small iron guns, but none of + bronze; their powder is bad, and never made use of but in firing + salutes; their arquebuses are so badly made that the ball would not + pierce an ordinary cuirass, especially as they do not know how to + aim. Their arms are bamboo pikes, some pointed with iron, others + hardened by fire; short and heavy scimitars, and cuirasses of iron + or tin. Sometimes a hundred vessels are seen to surround a single + corsair, those which are to windward throw out powdered lime to + blind the enemy, and, as they are very numerous, it produces some + effect. This is one of their principal warlike stratagems. The + corsairs are generally Japanese or revolted Chinese. + + "The soldiers of this country are a disgraceful set. The other day + they had a quarrel with some other Chinese who were carrying + provisions to market, and beat them; the latter went to complain to + the governor of Macao, who caused forty soldiers to be arrested and + beaten with bamboos. They came out afterwards crying like children. + They are mean, spiritless, and badly armed knaves. There is nothing + formidable in thousands of such soldiers. Besides what can the + soldiers be in a country where their position is looked upon as + dishonourable and occupied by slaves. Our Indians of the + Philippines are ten times more courageous. + + "With five thousand Spaniards, at the most, the conquest of this + country might be made, or at least of the maritime provinces, which + are the most important in all parts of the world. With half a dozen + galleons, and as many galleys, one would be master of all the + maritime provinces of China, as well as of all that sea and the + archipelago which extends from China to the Moluccas." + +Mendoza's work was first published at Rome in 1585, in a small octavo +form, under the following title: "Historia de las cosas mas notables, +ritos y costumbres del gran reyno de la China, sabidas assi por los +libros de los mesmos Chinas, como por relacion de religiosos y otras +personas que an estado en el dicho reyno. Hecha y ordenada por el mvy R. +P. Maestro Fr. Joan Gonzalez de Mendoca de la orden de S. Agustin, y +penitenciario appostolico a quien la Magestad Catholica embio con su +real carta y otras cosas para el Rey de aquel reyno el ano 1580. Al +illustrissimo S. Fernando de Vega y Fonseca del consejo de su Magestad y +su presidente en el Real de las Indias. Con vn Itinerario del nueuo +Mundo. _Con privilegio y licencia de su Sanctidad._ En Roma, a costa de +Bartholome Grassi, 1585, en la stampa de Vincentio Accolti." + +This edition, of which there is a copy in the British Museum, having on +its title-page the autograph of Sir Hans Sloane--is described by Brunet +as "rare". The text comprises four hundred and forty pages: it is +preceded by the Latin Privilege of Pope Sixtus V, dated June 13th; +Mendoza's dedication to Fernando de Vega, dated Rome, June 17th; a note +or post-script "al lector", in which Mendoza alludes to the recent +receipt of letters from Father Andres de Aguirre, provincial of the +Philippines, conveying the startling intelligence that the King of China +and his subjects were ready and willing to embrace the Catholic faith; +this is followed by Mendoza's Preface to the reader, and two sonnets in +Spanish, the first entitled: "Soneto de ... en la reducion del Reyno de +la China a la Iglesia Catholica." This interesting and important little +volume is also remarkable as being the first European work in which +Chinese characters were printed. + +We learn from Brunet that two editions of the original Spanish were +published the following year (1586), one at Madrid, the other at +Barcelona: it was again printed at Medina del Campo in 1595, and at +Antwerp in 1596. + +An Italian translation by Francesco Avanzo was published at Venice in +1586, 8vo.; at Rome and Genoa in the same year, 4to.; and again at +Venice in 1587, in 12mo.; 1588 and 1590 in 8vo. + +The English and French translations appeared in the same year, viz., +1588; the rare black-letter English version now reprinted, being made by +Parke at the instance of Hakluyt himself, as we learn from the +translator's dedication to the celebrated navigator Thomas "Candish" +(Cavendish), which is dated on new-year's day, 1589. + +The French translation, which was made by Luc de la Porte, was reprinted +at Paris in 1589 and 1600; and with a slightly varied title at Geneva in +1606, at Lyon in 1606, and at Rouen in 1604. + +A Latin version by Marcus Henning was published at Frankfort in 1589, +8vo.; and that by Joachimus Brulius appeared at Antwerp in 1655, 4to. + +Adelung (_Fortsetzung zu Joechers Lexikon_) states that a German version +was published at Frankfort in 1589, 4to. + +On his return, as a recompense for his services, Mendoza was made bishop +of Lipari in 1593. In 1607 he went to America with the title of Vicar +Apostolic, and in the same year was made bishop of Chiapa; and in 1608 +was translated to the bishopric of Popayan. He was the author of several +other works, historical and theological. The year of his death is not +exactly known, but it was about the year 1620. Ossinger, in his +_Bibliotheca Augustiniana_, describes him as a most eminent historian, a +very eloquent orator, and a highly accomplished preacher. + + + + + THE HISTORIE OF THE + GREAT AND MIGHTIE KINGDOME + OF CHINA, AND THE SITUATION + THEREOF: + + Togither with the great riches, huge + citties, politike gouernement, and + rare inuentions in the same. + + Translated out of Spanish by _R. Parke_. + + + + +TO THE RIGHT WORSHIPFULL AND FAMOUS GENTLEMAN, M. THOMAS CANDISH, +ESQUIRE, INCREASE OF HONOR AND HAPPIE ATTEMPTES. + + +It is now aboue fiue and thirty yeares passed, right worshipfull, since +that young, sacred, and prudent Prince, king Edward the sixt of happie +memorie, went about the discouerie of Cathaia and China, partly of +desire that the good young king had to enlarge the Christian faith, and +partlie to find out some where in those regions ample vent of the cloth +of England, for the mischiefs that grew about that time neerer home +aswell by contempt of our commodities, as by the arrestes of his +merchantes in the Empire, Flanders, France, and Spaine: forsseeing +withall how beneficiall ample vent would rise to all degrees throughout +his kingdome, and specially to the infinite number of the poore sort +distressed by lacke of worke. And although by a voyage hereuppon taken +in hande for this purpose by Sir Hugh Willobie and Richard Chauncellour, +a discouerie of the bay of Saint Nicolas in Russia fell out, and a trade +with the Muscouites, and after another trade for a time with the +Persians by way of the Caspian sea ensued, yet the discouerie of the +principall intended place followed not in his time, nor yet since, +vntill you tooke your happie and renowmed voyage about the worlde in +hande, although sundrie attemptes, at the great charges of diuers +honorable and well disposed persons, and good worshipfull merchants and +others haue beene made since the death of that good king, in seeking a +passage thither both by the North-east, and by the Northwest. But since +it is so (as wee vnderstande) that your worshippe in your late voyage +hath first of our nation in this age discouered the famous rich ilandes +of the Lu Zones, or Philippinas, lying neare vnto the coast of China, +and haue spent some time in taking good view of the same, hauing brought +home three boyes borne in Manilla, the chiefe towne of the said Ilands, +besides two other young fellowes of good capacitie, borne in the mightie +Iland of Iapon, (which hereafter may serue as our interpretors in our +first traficke thither), and that also your selfe haue sailed along the +coast of China, not farre from the Continent, and haue taken some +knowledge of the present state of the same, and in your course haue +found out a notable ample vent of our clothes, especially our kersies, +and are in preparing againe for the former voyage, as hee that would +constantly perseuer in so good an enterprise: we are to thinke that the +knowledge and first discouerie of the same, in respect of our nation, +hath all this time beene by the Almightie to you onely reserued, to your +immortall glorie, and to the manifest shew of his especiall fauour borne +towards you, in that besides your high and rare attempt of sailing about +the whole globe of the earth, in so short a time of two yeares and about +two monethes, you have shewed your selfe to have that rare and especiall +care for your countrie, by seeking out vent for our clothes, that ought +vpon due consideration to moue many thousands of English subiects to +pray for you, and to loue and honor your name and familie for euer. For +as you haue opened by your attempt the gate to the spoile of the great +and late mightie, vniuersall, and infested enimie of this realme, & of +al countries that professe true religion: so haue you by your great care +wrought a way to imploie the merchants of Englande in trade, to increase +our Nauie, to benefite our Clothiers, and (your purpose falling out to +your hoped effect) to releeue more of the poorer sort, then all the +hospitals and almes houses can or may, that haue beene built in this +realme, since the first inhabiting thereof. + +And sir, if to this your late noble attempt, it might please you, by +your incouragement, and by the help of your purse to adde your present +furtherance for the passage to be discouered by the northwest, (for +proofe whereof there bee many infallible reasons, and diuerse great +experiences to be yeelded) our course with our commodities to the rich +Iland of Iapon, to the mightie empire of China, and to the Ilandes of +the Philippinas, for the vent that you haue found out, should be by the +halfe way shortened, and you should double and manyfolde treble the +credite of your fourmer late enterprise, and make your fame to mount, +and yourself to liue for euer in a much higher degree of glorie, then +otherwise it might be, or that by any other mean you could possibly +deuise: In which action so highly importing the generall state of this +lande I haue perfect experience that many worshipfull and wealthie +marchants of this citie and other places would most willingly ioyne +their purses with yours: and to play the blabbe, I may tell you they +attende nothing with greater desire and expectation, then that a motion +hereof being made by some happie man, your selfe and they might friendly +and seriously ioyne together for the full accomplishing of this so long +intended discouerie: And to descende to some particulars, there is one +speciall reason that giueth an edge vnto their desires, proceeding from +the late worthie attemptes of that excellent and skilful pilot M. John +Dauis, made for the search of the aforesaid northwest passage these +three late yeares, hauing entred into the same foure hundred leagues +further than was euer hitherto thoroughly knowen, and returned with an +exact description thereof, to the reasonable contentment for the time, +of the aduenturers, and chiefly of the worshipfull M. William Sanderson, +whose contributions thereunto, although they haue beene verie great and +extraordinarie, yet for the certaine hope or rather assurance that he +conceiueth vpon the report of the Captaine himselfe and all the rest of +any skill employed in these voyages, remayneth still constant, and is +readie to disburse as yet to the freshe setting on foote of this +enterprise entermitted by occasion of our late troubles, euen this yeare +againe, for the finall perfection of so profitable and honorable a +discouerie, a farre greater portion then in reason would be required of +any other man of his abilitie. And albeit, sir, that you haue taken in +your late voyage, besides the knowledge of the way to China, the +intelligence of the gouernement of the countrie and of the commodities +of the territories and prouinces of the same, and that at the full, +according to the time of your short abode in those partes, yet +neuerthelesse for that of late more ample vnderstanding hath beene in +more length of time, by woonderfull great endeuour taken by certaine +learned Portingals and Spaniardes of great obseruation, and not long +agoe published in the Spanish tongue, I haue for the increase of the +knowledge of the subiectes of Englande, and specially for the +illuminating of the mindes of those that are to take the voyage next in +hande to Iapan, China, and the Philippinas, translated the same worke +into English, and committed it to print, passing ouer Paulus Venetus, +and sir John Mandeuill, because they wrote long agoe of those regions: +which labour, to say trueth, I haue vndertaken at the earnest request +and encouragement of my worshipfull friend Master Richard Hakluit late +of Oxforde, a gentleman, besides his other manifolde learning and +languages, of singular and deepe insight in all histories of discouerie +and partes of cosmographie: who also for the zeale he beareth to the +honour of his countrie and countrimen, brought the same first aboue two +yeares since ouer into this court, and at this present hath in hande a +most excellent and ample collection of the sundrie trauailes and +nauigations of our owne nation, a matter long intended by him, and +seruing to the like beneficiall and honorable purpose, which I hope will +shortly come to light to the great contentation of the wiser sort. + +In the meane season, hauing nowe at length finished according to my +poore skill and leasure this my translation, I thought best to dedicate +and commende the same to your worshipfull patronage, as the man that I +holde most worthie of the same, and most able of our nation to iudge +aright of the contentes thereof, and to correct the errors of the author +whensoeuer you shall meete with them: beseeching you to accept in good +part the trauaile and good meaning of the translator: and so wishing +vnto you health, increase of knowledge, with fortunate and glorious +successe in your further couragious attempts, I leaue you to the +protection of the Almightie. + + From London the first of Ianuarie 1589. + + Your worships alwaies to command, + + ROBERT PARKE. + + + + +THE PRINTER, + +TO THE CHRISTIAN READER. + + +Whereas (good courteous Reader) in this historie describing the kingdome +of China with the countries there adiacent, thou shalt finde many times +repeated, and that in some things too gloriously, the zeale of certaine +Spanish Friers that laboured in discouerie of the saide China, and the +declaration of certaine myracles (but falsely reported) by them to haue +beene wrought, togither with examples of diuerse their superstitious +practices: which happily may giue offence vnto some in reading: thou +must vnderstande that this is to be rather imputed vnto the first writer +of this historie in Spanish, than to any fault of mine: for the +Spaniardes (following their ambitious affections) doo vsually in all +their writinges extoll their owne actions, euen to the setting forth of +many vntruthes and incredible things: as in their descriptions of the +conquestes of the east and west Indies, etc., doth more at large +appeare. Notwithstanding all which, our translator (as it seemeth) hath +rather chosen to be esteemed _fidus interpres_, in truely translating +the historie as it was, though conteyning some errors, then to be +accounted a patcher or corrupter of other mens workes. + +But howsoeuer either our first authour, or the translator, haue shewed +themselues affectioned, sure I am that the knowledge of this kingdome +will not onely be pleasant, but also verie profitable to our English +nation: and by playing the good Bee, in onely accepting herein that +which is good, I doubt not, but the reading of this historie will bring +thee great contentment, and delight. + +VALE. + + + + + THE HISTORIE OF THE MIGHTIE KINGDOME OF CHINA, + + IN THE WHICH IS CONTAINED THE NOTABLE THINGS OF THAT KINGDOME, TOUCHING + THAT WHICH IS NATURALL. + + + + +CHAP. I. + + _The description of the kingdome and the confines that it hath + belonging._ + + +This great and mightie kingdome of China, which we do meane to treat of +in this Historie, hath beene discouered by cleere and true notice, +within this tenne yeares, by Spanyards that were dwellers in the Ilands +Philippinas, that are three hundreth leagues distant from the said +kingdome: Notwithstanding, that long time before, there was relation +giuen, by way of the Portingall Indias, by such as dwelt in Macao, and +did trafike to Canton, a citie of the same kingdome of China. But this +was by relation so, that the one nor the other could satisfie, for that +there was founde varietie in that which was true, till the yeere of +1577. Frier Martin de Gorrada,[7] prouincial of the Augustine friers, +who were the first discouerers of the said Ilands Philippinas, and +ministred first the holy baptisme amongst them, with his companions, +frier Hieronimo Martin, Pedro Sarmiento, and Myghell de Loarcha, cheefe +officers of the citie of Marrila[8] in the said Ilands, by the order and +commandement of Guido de Labassares, gouernour thereof, did enter into +the saide kingdome of China, led and gouerned by a captaine belonging to +the king of the said kingdome, called Omoncon. + +Of the comming of this Omoncon vnto the Ilands Philippinas, and of his +hardines to carrie the aforesaid vnto the firme land, he being commanded +to the contrarie vpon paine of death, and how he was receiued, and great +courtesie shewed, and of other things verie curious, you shall finde in +the second part of this historie, where as is the substance and whole +relation of all that was brought vnto the king of Spaine. + +You shall vnderstande that this mightie kingdome is the Orientalest part +of all Asia, and his next neighbour towards the Ponent is the kingdome +of Quachinchina,[9] whereas they doo obserue in whole all the customes +and rites of China. The greatest part of this kingdome is watred with +the great Orientall Ocean sea, beginning at the Iland Aynan,[10] which +is hard by Quachinchina, which is 19 degrees towards the North, and +compassing towards the South, whereas their course is northeast. And +beyond Quachinchina towards the North, the Bragmanes[11] do confine, +which are much people, and verie rich, of golde, siluer, and pretious +stones, but in especiall, rubies: for there are infinit. They are proude +and hawtie men, of great corage, wel made, but of browne colour: they +haue had (but few times) warre with them of China, in respect for that +betwixt both the kingdomes, there are great and mightie mountaines and +rockes that doth disturbe them. And harde vnto this nation ioyneth the +Patanes[12] and Mongores,[13] which is a great kingdome, and warlike +people, whose head[14] is the Gran Samarzan:[15] They are the true +Scythas or Massagetas, of whom it is affirmed that they were neuer +ouercome by any other nation: they are a people well proportioned and +white: by reason they dwel in a cold countrie. Betwixt the West and the +South is the Trapobana, or Samatra, a kingdome very rich of gold, +pretious stones, & pearles: and more towards the South, are the two +Iauas, the great and the lesse, and the kingdome of the Lechios:[16] and +in equall distance, are the Iapones: yet notwithstanding those that are +more indifferent to this kingdome are the Tartarians, which are on the +selfe firme land or continent, and are alonely diuided by a wal, as shal +be declared in the 9 chapter of this booke. These Tartarians haue had +many times wars with them of China: but at one time (as you shall +perceive) they got the whole kingdome of China, and did possesse the +same for the space of 93 yeares, till such time as they of China did +rebell and forced them out again. At this day they say that they are +friends one with another, and that is, for that they bee all Gentiles, +and do vse all one manner of ceremonies and rites. They doo differ in +their clenes[17] and lawes, in the which the Chinas doth exceede them +very much. The Tartarians are very yellow and not so white: and they go +naked from the girdlested vpwards, and they eate raw flesh, and do +annoint themselues with the blood of raw flesh, for to make them more +harder and currish, by reason whereof they doo so stinke, that if the +aire doth come from that part where they be, you shall smel them afar +off by the strong sauor. They haue for certainty, the truth of the +immortalitie of the soule (although it be with error), for they say that +the soule doth enter into other bodies, and that soule that liued well +in the first bodie, doth better it from poore to rich, or from age to +youth: and if it liued evill, to the contrarie in worse. The sons of the +Tartarians do very much obserue and keepe the commandement in obeying +their parents, for that they doo wholly accomplish the same without +failing any iot of their will, vnder paine to be seuerly and publikelie +punished. They confess one God, whom they worship, and haue him in their +houses carved or painted, and every day they doe offer vnto it incense, +or some other sweet smelles: they do call him the high God, and do craue +of him vnderstanding and health. They haue also another god, which they +say is son vnto the other; they do call him Natigay: this is their god +of terestriall things. They haue him likewise in their houses, and every +time they go to eate they doo annoint his face with the fattest thing +they haue to eate: that being doone they fall to eating, hauing first +giuen their gods their pitance. They are a kinde of people that verie +seldome doo fable a lie, although their liues should lie thereon, and +are verie obedient vnto their king: but in speciall in their warres, in +the which euerie one doth that he is appointed to doo: they are led by +the sound of a drome or trumpet, with the which their captaines do +gouerne them with great ease, by reason that they are trained vp in the +same from their youth. And many other things are amongst them, in the +which they do resemble them of China, (who) if they did receiue the +faith of our Lord Jesu Christ, it is to be belieued that the Tartarians +would do the same, for that they are taken for men very ducible, and do +imitate verie much them of China. + + + + +CHAP. II. + + _Of the temperature of the kingdome of China._ + + +The temperature of this mightie kingdome is diuersly, by reason that +almost the whole bignesse therof is from the south to the north, in so +great a length that the iland of Aynan being neere vnto this land, in 19 +degrees of altitude, have notice of some prouinces that are in more than +50 degrees, and yet they do vnderstand that beyond that there bee more +vpon the confines of Tartaria. It is a strange thing to be seene, the +strange and great difference betwixt the colours of the dwellers of this +kingdome. In Canton, a mightie citie, whereas the Portingales had +ordinarie trafficke with them of China, for that it was nigh vnto Macao, +where as they had inhabited long since, and from whence they do bring +all such merchandise as is brought into Europe. There is seene great +diuersities in the colours of such people as doe come thither to +trafficke, as the said Portingales do testifie. + +Those which are borne in the citie of Canton, and in al that cost, are +browne people, like vnto them in the citie of Fez or Barbarie, for that +all the whole countrie is in the said paralel that Barberie is in. And +they of the most prouinces inwards are white people, some more whiter +than others, as they draw into the cold countrie. Some are like vnto +Spanyards, and others more yealow, like vnto the Almans,[18] yelow and +red colour. + +Finally, in all this mightie kingdome, to speake generally, they cannot +say that there is much cold or much heat, for that the geographers do +conclude and say it is temperate, and is vnder a temperate clime, as is +Italy or other temperate countries, wherby may be vnderstood the +fertilitie of the same, which is (without doubt) the fertilest in all +the world, and may compare with the Peru and Nuoua Espannia, which are +two kingdomes celebrated to be most fertill: and for the verification, +you shall perceiue in this chapter next folowing, wherin is declared +such things as it doth yeeld and bring forth, and in what quantitie. And +yet aboue all things (according unto the sayings of fryer Herrada,[19] +prouinciall, and his companions, whose relation I will follow in the +most part of this hystorie, as witnesses of sight), vnto whom we may +giue certaine credite, without any exception. They say that the countrie +is so full of youth that it seemeth the women are deliuered euery +moneth, and their children, when they are little, are extreame faire; +and the country is so fertill and fat, that it yeldeth fruit three or +four times in the yeere, which is the occasion that all things is so +good cheape, that almost it seemeth they sell them for nothing. + + + + +CHAP. III. + + _Of the fertilitie of this kingdome, and of such fruits and + other things as it doth yeld._ + + +The inhabitants in this countrie are perswaded, of a truth, that those +which did first finde and inhabite in this lande, were the nevewes of +Noe (who, after they had traueiled from Armenia, wheras the arke stayed, +wherin God did preserue their grandfather from the waters of the flood), +went seeking a land to their contentment; and not finding a countrie of +so great fertilitie and temperature like vnto this, wherein was all +things necessarie for the life of man, without comparison: they were +compelled, with the aboundance thereof, to inhabite therein, +vnderstanding that if they should search throughout all the world, they +should not finde the like; and I thinke they were not deceiued, +according as now it is to be seene, and what may be considered in the +proces of this chapter, of such fruits as the earth doth yeeld. And +although there is declared here of such as shall suffice in this worke, +yet is there left behind a great number more; of whose properties, as +well of herbes and beasts, which of their particulars may be made a +great volume, and I doo beleeue that in time there will be one set +forth. + +The great trauell and continual laboure of the inhabitants of this +countrie, is a great helpe vnto the goodnes and fertilitie therof, and +is so much that they do neither spare nor leaue mountains nor vallies, +neither riuers, but they do sow and plant all such things as they +perceiue that the place wil yeeld, according unto the goodnesse thereof: +as orchards with fruite, great fields of wheat, barlie, rice, flaxe and +hempe, with many other things: all which traueile vnto them is verie +easie, remembering with what great libertie they do inioy their goods, +and the great and infinit number of people that there is, as well for +handie craftes as for to till and cultiuate the grounde. In all this +mightie countrie they do not suffer vacabunds nor idle people, but all +such (ouer and aboue that they are greeuouslie punished), they are +holden for infamous: neither doo they consent nor permit any of them +that are naturally borne there to go out of their countries into other +strange countries; neither haue they any wars at this present, which was +the thing that in times past did consume much of their people. The king +dooth content himselfe onely with his owne kingdome (as one that is +helde the wisest in all the world). Beside all this, they are naturally +inclined to eate and drinke wel, and to make much of themselves in +apparel, and to haue their houses well furnished with household stuffe; +and to the augmenting hereof, they do put themselues in great labor and +trauaile, and are great dealers and trafickers: al which, with the +fertilitie of the countrie aboue said, is the occasion that iustlie it +might haue the name to be the most fertilest in all the whole world. + + [Sidenote: Excellent plummes.] + +This country doth yeeld all kind of herbs, as doth Spaine, and of many +kindes mo: also all manner of fruites, like as in Spaine, with diuers +other sorts, the names whereof are not yet knowne, for that they do +differ very much from ours; but yet the one and the other are of a +marueilous excellent tast, as they doo say. They haue three sorts of +orenges, the one verie sweete, which doth exceede sugar in their +sweetnesse: the other sort not so sweet as the first: the third sort are +somewhat sower, but verie delightfull in the tast. Also they haue a +kinde of plummes, that they doo call _lechias_,[20] that are of an +exceeding gallant tast, and neuer hurteth any body, although they +shoulde eate a great number of them. It yeldeth great aboundance of +great melons, and of an excellent sauour and tast, and verie bigge. Also +a kinde of russet appels that be very great, of a good tast. I doo not +heere declare of other fruites, nor of their names, because I will not +seeme tedious vnto the reader, nor spende the time herein, but will +treat of other things of more importance. + + [Sidenote: Excellent white sugar good cheape.] + + [Sidenote: Honie and wax.] + + [Sidenote: Excellent good silke.] + +In all parts of this kingdome there is great store of sugar, which is +the occasion that it is so good cheape: for you shall have a quintal of +verie excellent white and good sugar, when it is most deerest, for the +value of sixe ryals of plate. There is great abundance of honie, for +that their delight is in hiues, by reason whereof not only honie, but +waxe is very good cheape; and there is so great quantity therof, that +you may lade ships, yea fleetes thereof. They do make great store of +silke, and excellent good, and give it verie perfite colours, which +dooth exceed very much the silke of Granada, and is one of the greatest +trades that is in all that kingdome. + + [Sidenote: Great store of flaxe and hempe.] + + [Sidenote: Cotton, wool, wheat, and barlie, rie, oates.] + + [Sidenote: Great abundance of rice.] + +The veluets, damaskes, sattens, and other sortes of webs, which is there +made, is of so small a price, that it is a wonder to speake it, in +especiall unto them that doo know how their prises be in Spaine and in +Italie. They do sell none of their silkes there by the yard, neither any +other kinde of websterie, though it be lynnen; but by the waight, +wherein there is least deceit. They haue great store of flaxe, wherwith +the common people doo apparell themselues: also hempe for the cawlking +of their ships, and to make ropes and hasers. And on their drie and +tough landes, although they be stonie, they gather great stoore of +cotton wooll. They doo sowe wheate, barlie, rye, and oates, and manie +other kindes of graine; and the one and the other doo yeelde great +increase. In the marrish groundes (of which there be many), by reason of +moyst and great aboundance of riuers that be in this countrie, they doo +sowe rice, which is a common victuall or maintiniment vnto all people of +the kingdome, and vnto them that dwell neere them; and they doo gather +so greate aboundance that when it is most dearest you shall haue a +haneg[21] for a ryall of plate: of the which, and of all other graines +aforesaid, the countrie was woont to yeeld them, and foure times in the +yeere there increase. + + [Sidenote: Chestnuts.] + +On their high grounds, that are not good to be sowne, there is great +store of pine trees, which yeelde fruite very sauorie: chestnuts +greater, and of better tast, then commonly you shall finde in Spaine: +and yet betwixt these trees they do sow maiz, which is the ordinarie +foode of the Indians of Mexico and Peru, and great store of panizo,[22] +so that they doe not leaue one foote of grounde vnsowen. And of trueth, +almost in all the whole countrie, you shall not finde any ground that is +barren or without profite, what by the naturall vertue of the country, +and also by the manuring and helping of it. + + + + +CHAP. IV. + + _Here I do proceed in the fertilitie of this kingdome, and of + such things as it doth yeeld._ + + + [Sidenote: All kind of beasts.] + + [Sidenote: Excellent furres, muske.] + + [Sidenote: Great store of beefes.] + + [Sidenote: Deere, hogs, and goates.] + + [Sidenote: Great store of wildfoule.] + + [Sidenote: Foule solde by waight.] + +Besides the fertilitie of this countrie beforesaide, all the fields be +verie faire to behold, and yeelde maruelous odoriferous smelles, by +reason of the great quantitie of sweete flowers of diuers sorts. It is +also garnished with the greene trees that be planted by the riuers sides +and brookes, whereof there is great quantitie. And there is planted +there orchards and gardens, with banketing houses of great pleasure, the +which they doo vse verie much for their recreation and auoiding the +troubles of minde. The Loytias, or gentlemen, doo vse to plant great +forrests and thicke woods, whereas doo breed many wilde boores, bucks, +hares, and conyes, and diuers other beasts: of whose skins they make +very excellent furres, but in especiall of _martas ceuellias_,[23] of +which there is a great number. There is great aboundance of muske, the +which they do make of a little beast that doth feede of nothing else but +of a roote which is of a maruellous smell, that is called camarus, as +big as a man's finger. They do take them and beat them with blowes till +they be brused all to peeces; then they do put them in a place whereas +they may soonest putrifie; but first they do bind very fast such parts +whereas the blood may run out of their brused bones, all to peces, +remaining within them. Then after, when they thinke they be putrified, +then they do cut out smal peeces, with skinne and all, and tie them vp +like bals or cods, which the Portugals (who doth by them) do call +_papos_: and this is the finest that is brought out of all Indies (if +there be no deceit vsed in it), for many times they will put amongst it +small peeces of lead, and other things of weight. There is also great +store of kyne, that are so little worth that you may buy a very good one +for eight rials of plate; and beefes, that are bought for halfe the +mony: one whole venison is bought for two rials; great store of hogs, +whose flesh is as holsome and good as our mutton in Spaine. There is +great aboundance of goates, and of other beasts that are to be eaten, +which is the occasion that they are of little value. The flying foules +that doo breed about the lakes and riuers are of so great quantitie that +there is spent daily, in small villages in that countrie, many +thousands, and the greatest sort of them are teales. The fashion how +they do breed and bring them vp shal be declared in a chapter +particularly; for that which is said shal not seeme impossible. They be +sold by waight, and likewise capons and hens, and for so smal value that +two pounds of their flesh being plucked, is worth ordinarily two Foys, +which is a kinde of mony like vnto the quartes[24] of Spaine; hogs +flesh, two pounds for a Foy and a halfe, which is six marauadiz. +Likewise all other victuals after the same rate, as it doth plainly +appeare by the relation made by the friers. + + [Sidenote: Reubarbe and other medicinall hearbs.] + + [Sidenote: Foure hundred of nutmegs for six-pence. Cloues, sixe pound +for 3 pence; the like of pepper.] + + [Sidenote: Mines of gold and siluer and other mettals. Iron and Steele 4 +shilling a quintal. Siluer is worth more than gold. Great store of +pearles.] + +There are also many herbs for medicines, as very fine reubarbe, and of +great quantitie, and wood called Palo de China; great store of nutmegs, +with the which they may lade fleetes, and of so lowe a price that you +may buy foure hundreth for a ryall of plate; and cloues, sixe pound for +halfe a ryall of plate; and the like in pepper. Synamon, one rowe, which +is 25 pound, for four ryals of plate, and better cheape. I do leave to +speake of many other hearbs medicinable and profitable for the vse of +man: for that if I should write the particular vertue of euerie of them, +it would require a great volume. Of fish, both swimming and shell fish +of all sorts, that they haue with them is to be wondred at: not onely +vpon the sea coasts, but also in the remote places of that kingdome, by +reason of the great riuers, which be nauigable vnto such places. Besides +all this it is verie rich of mines of golde and siluer, and other +mettals, the which (gold and siluer excepted) they do sell it so good +cheape that a quintal of copper, yron, or steele is to be bought for +eight rials of plate. Gold is better cheape there then it is in Europe, +but siluer is more woorth. There is founde great store of pearles in all +this kingdome: but the most part of them are not rounde, by the which +you may gather and vnderstande the goodnesse and fertilitie of the same. +And that the first that did discouer and inhabite that kingdome were not +deceiued, for that they founde all things necessarie vnto the preseruing +of the life of man, and that in aboundance: for the which, with iust +reason, the inhabitants may thinke themselues to possesse the best and +fertilest kingdome in all the whole world. + + + + +CHAP. V. + + _Of the antiquitie of this kingdome._ + + + [Sidenote: 243 kings.] + +As before is said, this kingdome is of so ancient antiquity, that there +is opinion that the first that did inhabite this countrie, were the +neuewes of Noe. But the light which is found in the histories of China, +is that from the time of Vitey, who was their first king, and did reduce +their kingdome vnto an empire, and hath and doth indure vnto the king +that now rayneth: as you shall vnderstand in the place where we shall +make mention of the kings of that countrie, whereas you shal vnderstand +by iust computations, that vnto this day, there hath rayned, naturall +and vsurped, to the number of 243 kings. The sonne doth succeede the +father in the kingdome, and for want of a sonne, the next kinsman doth +succeed: and for that they do take (after the vse of the emperors of +Turkie) so many wiues as pleaseth them: it seldome falleth out to lacke +heires, for that the first sonne that is borne of either of his wiues is +right heire vnto the kingdome: and the rest of his sonnes he doth +appoint them cities where as they do dwel priuately: and there they are +prouided of all things necessarie for them, conformable vnto their +degrees, with expresse commission vpon paine of death neuer to go out of +them, neither to returne vnto the court, except they be sent for by the +king. So after this conclusion, all those that are kinsfolke vnto the +king, are resident and kept in a mightie and populous citie, called +Causi,[25] whereas those whome the king and his counsel do thinke and +see to be men of great wisdome, or giuen to martiall affaires, they doo +commande that they neuer goe forth of their houses, to auoide occasions +of suspition whereby might grow alterations and treasons against the +king. The dwelling places of these prouinces, are mightie and of a huge +bignesse: for that within the compasse of them, they haue all manner of +contentment necessary for them: as gardens, orchards, fishing ponds of +diuers sorts, parkes and groues, in the which are all kinde flying +foules, fish and beasts, as are to be found in the mountaines and +riuers. And it is walled round about with a stone wall, so that euery +house of these seemeth to be a towne. They giue themselues much vnto +musike, wherewith they doo passe away the time. And for that they are +giuen to pleasure and ease, they are commonly corpulent and fatte, verie +faire conditioned and quiet, liberall vnto strangers. These princes, in +what place soeuer they are, the gouernours of the cities are bound to +visite them euery festiuall day. Likewise if they doo passe on +horsebacke by their doores, they must alight and walke on foote while +they haue passed it: and if they be borne in a litle chaire, likewise to +come out of the same, and to walk on foote with silence, till they be +past. And for that they shall not plead ignorance, the gates of these +princes houses are all painted red: so that they being brought vp from +their youth, in this straight, close, and idle life, it is not vnto them +tedious, but dooth rather reioyce in the same. + + + + +CHAP. VI. + + _The bignesse of this kingdome of China, and of such measures + as they do vse in trauaile._ + + + [Sidenote: The China is in compass 8000 leagues and 1800 leagues long.] + +This mightie kingdome, which we commonly call China, without knowing any +cause or foundation wherefore we should so cal it, those countries neere +ioyning vnto the same, do call it Sangley: and they in their naturall +toonge do cal it Taybiner,[26] the which is to be vnderstood, nothing +but a kingdome: and is the most biggest and populous that is mentioned +in all the world, as it shalbe apparant in the discourse of this +hystorie, and in the wonderfull things that shalbe treated of in the +next chapter following. All the which is taken out of the bookes and +hystories of the said Chinos, whereas they do make mention of the +mightinesse thereof, and of the 15 prouinces that are comprehended in +the same: the which bookes and hystories were brought vnto the citie of +Manilla, printed and set forth in China, and were translated into the +Spanish toong, by interpreters of the saide nations. And for that they +were baptised and became Christians, they remaine as dwellers amongst vs +in these ilandes, the better to obserue and keepe the lawes of baptisme, +and to flie the paine and punishment the which they should receiue for +dooing the same: for that they turned Christians and receiued the faith +without the license of the king and counsell, which is forbidden vppon +paine of death, and is executed with great violence, and without +remission. This mightie kingdome is in circuit or compasse about 69516 +die,[27] which is a kind of measure that they do vse: which being +reduced into the Spanish account, is almost 3000 legues, and in length +1800 leagues, this is to be vnderstood the whole 15 prouinces: the which +are garnished with many cities and townes, besides a great number of +villages, as you may plainely see in the chapter following. By the said +booke, it is found that the Chinos haue amongst them but only three kind +of measures: the which in their language are called _lii_, _pu_, and +_icham_, which is as much as to say, or in effect, as a forlong, league, +or iorney: the measure which is called _lii_, hath so much space as a +mans voice in a plaine grounde may bee hearde in a quiet day, halowing +or whoping with all the force and strength he may: and ten of these +_liis_ maketh a _pu_, which is a great Spanish league: and ten _pus_ +maketh a dayes iourney, which is called _icham_, which maketh 12 long +leagues. By the which account it is founde that this kingdome hath the +number of leagues as afore is saide: yet, by the account of other +bookes, they do finde it bigger and of more leagues. Yet frier Martin de +Herrada, prouinciall of the Austen friers in the Ilands Philippinas, who +is an excellent geometrician and cosmographer, did cast the account with +great diligence, by their owne descriptions, and doth finde it to amount +vnto the sum aforesaid, to be 1800 leagues long and 3000 leagues in +compasse, beginning at the prouince of Olam, which is that towards the +south, and nearest vnto Malacia,[28] and so alongst the countrie towards +the north east for the space of 600 leagues. + + + + +CHAP. VII. + + _Of the 15 prouinces that are in this kingdome._ + + +This mightie kingdome is diuided into fifteene prouinces, that euery one +of them is bigger then the greatest kingdome that we doo vnderstand to +be in all Europe. Some doo esteeme those cities to be metropolitans, +where as is resident, the gouernors, presidents, or viz rees, which in +their natural toong are called Cochin: of the prouinces, two of them, +which are called Tolanchia and Paguia, are gouerned by the king in +person with his royall counsel. The occasion why the king is alwayes +resident or abiding in one of these two prouinces which are two of the +mightiest and most popularst of people, is not for that in them he is +most at his content, or receiue more pleasure in them then in any of the +other: but onely for that they doo confine vpon the kingdome of +Tartaria, with whom in times past they had ordinary and continuall wars: +and for that the king might with more ease put remedie in such harmes +receiued, and defend with better oportunitie the rage of his enimie, he +did ordaine and situate his pallace and court in them two. And for that +it hath beene of antiquitie many yeeres past, it hath remained hitherto, +and appeareth to continue still the habitation of the kings of that +kingdome, as by desert for the excellencie of the clime, and aboundance +of all things necessarie. + +The names of the fifteene prouinces are as followeth:--Paguia,[29] +Foquiem,[30] Olam,[31] Sinsay,[32] Sisuam,[33] Tolanchia,[34] +Cansay,[35] Oquiam,[36] Aucheo,[37] Honan,[38] Xanton,[39] Quicheu,[40] +Chequeam,[41] Susuam,[42] and Saxij.[43] Almost all these prouinces, but +in particular tenne of them which are alongst the sea costs, are full of +deepe riuers of sweete water and navigable, vpon whose branches are +situated many cities and townes, whereof you may not onely haue the +number of them, but also their names: for that these Chinos are so +curious people, that in their books are named besides the cities and +townes, the banketing houses and houses of pleasure, which the gentlemen +haue for their recreation. And for that it will be more trouble than +profite to inlarge any further in this matter, I will refer it vnto the +next chapter, where I will intreate of the cities and townes that either +of these prouinces hath, and pass ouer all the rest, as not necessarie; +for our intent is to set forth the bignes of this kingdome. + + + + +CHAP. VIII. + + _Of the cities and townes that every one of these prouinces + hath in himselfe._ + + +These fifteene prouinces, which with better truth might be called +kingdomes, according vnto the greatnes of them, as you may perceiue by +the number of cities and townes that each of them hathe, besides +villages, the which if I should adde herevnto, would be an infinite +number. + +The number of cities and townes that euery prouince hath. First, the +prouince of Paguia, where as ordinarily the king and his counsel is +resident, hath 47 cities and 150 townes. + +Canton hath 37 cities and 190 townes. +Foquien hath 33 cities and 99 townes. +Olam hath 90 cities and 130 townes. +Synsay hath 38 cities and 124 townes. +Sisuan hath 44 cities and 150 townes. +Tolanchia hath 51 cities and 123 townes. +Cansay hath 24 cities and 112 townes. +Ochian hath 19 cities and 74 townes. +Ancheo hath 25 cities and 29 townes. +Honan hath 20 cities and 102 townes. +Xaton hath 37 cities and 78 townes. +Quicheu hath 45 cities and 113 townes. +Chequeam hath 39 cities and 95 townes. +Susuan hath 42 cities and 105 townes. + + [Sidenote: The mightie citie called Suntien, or Quinsay.[44]] + +By which account appeareth to be 591 cities and 1593 townes, beside +villages and houses of pleasure, which are an infinite number: by the +which you may consider that this kingdome doth deserve to be called +great, and compared with the best and principalst that is heard of in al +the whole world. The Chinos do vse in their pronunciation to terme their +cities with this sylable, Fu, that is as much as to say, citie, as +Taybin fu, Canton fu, and their townes with this sylable, Cheu. They +have some villages that are so great, that it lacketh but onely the name +of a towne. All their cities for the most part are situated by the +riuers sides: such as are nauigable, the cities are moted rounde about, +which make them to bee verie strong, not only the cities but townes are +walled round about with high and strong wals of stone, one faddome high, +and all the rest is of bricke, but of so hard a substance that it is not +to be broken almost with pickaxes. Some cities hath their wals so broad, +that 4 and 6 men may walke side by side on them: they are garnished with +many bulwarks and towers, a small distance the one from the other, with +their battlements and faire galleries, where as many times their +vizroyes doeth goe to recreate themselues with the gallant sight of the +mountains and riuers, with their fields so odoriferous. There is betwixt +the wals of their cities and the mote of the same a broade space, that +six horsemen may ride together; the like space is within, betwixt the +walles and the houses, whereas they may walke without impediment. Their +wals are kept in such good reparation, by reason of their great care and +diligence, that they seeme to be but new made, and yet in some cities +there is founde mention of two thousand yeeres since the first +foundation. In every city the king doth ordaine a justice, and giveth +him great rents onely to visit them, and make them to be renewed and +repaired where as is requisite, and is done vpon the kings cost: for out +of his rents in such cities and townes is given them all that is needful +to be asked. The high waies in all this kingdome are made and kept +plaine with great care and diligence, and the entering into the cities +and townes are very sumptuous and with great maiestie, they have three +or foure gates bound with yron very strong. Their streetes very well +paved, and so broad that 15 horsemen may ride together in them, and so +straight, that although they be very long, yet you may discouer the end. +On both the sides are portals, vnder which be their shops full of all +sorts of merchandises very curious, and of all occupations that you will +desire: In the streets, a good space the one from the other, are made +manie triumphall arkes of extreme bewtie: they are made of masons worke, +very curiously painted after the fashion of the old antiquitie of Rome. +All their houses ordinarily haue three doores, that in the middest is +great, the other be lesser, but of a maruellous gallant proportion. The +king is alwayes resident in the citie of Suntien,[45] which in their +language is as much to say, the citie of heauen. Of which citie the +Chinos do declare many things which seemeth to be true, for that if you +do talke with many of them, and at sundrie times and places, yet doo +they not varie the one from the other: and according to their report, it +should be the greatest in all the worlde, in these dayes. They who do +make it to be least, do affirme, that to goe from gate to gate, leauing +the suburbs, had need of a summers day and a good horse to do it: it is +also called Quinsay, as Marcus Paulus doth call it. + + + + +CHAP. IX. + + _Of the wonderfull buildings in this kingdome, and of mightie + wall or circuit in the same of 500 leagues long._ + + +In this kingdom in al places, there be men excellent in architecture: +and the necessaries that they haue to build with is the best that is in +the world. For as it is said in the chapter past, they haue a kinde of +white earth of the which they make brickes, of so great hardnesse and +strength, that for to breake them, you must haue pickaxes, and vse much +strength: and this is the cause that in all the kingdome there is +mightie buildings and verie curious. Putting apart the kings pallace +where hee is resident in Tabin[46] (for of that you shall haue a +particular chapter), in all such cities that bee the heads of the +prouinces, is resident a vizroy or gouernour, and dwelleth in the house +that (in euery such citie) the king hath ordained on his proper cost: +all the which, to conclude, are superbious and admirable, and wrought by +marueilous art, and are as bigge as a great village, by reason that they +haue within them great gardens, water ponds and woods compassed about: +in the which (as it is declared in the 4 chapter) is great quantitie of +hunt and flying foules. Their houses commonly be verie gallant and after +the manner of Rome, and generallie at the doores and gates of them are +planted trees in gallant order: the which maketh a gallant shadow and +seemeth well in the streets. All these houses are within as white as +milke, in such sort that it seemeth to be burnished paper. The floares +are paued with square stones, verie broad and smooth; their seelings are +of an excellent kind of timber, verie well wrought and painted, that it +seemeth like damaske and of the colour of gold, that sheweth verie well: +euerie one of them hath three courts and gardens full of flowers and +herbes for their recreation. And there is none of them but hath his fish +poole furnished, although it bee but small. The one side of their courts +is wrought verie gallant, like as it is in counting houses, vpon the +which they haue many idols carued, and wrought of diuers kinds of +mettals: the other three parts or angles of their courts are painted +with diuers things of verie great curiositie. But aboue all things they +are marueilous cleane, not only in their houses, but also in their +streets: in the which commonly they haue three or foure necessarie or +common places of ease, verie curiously ordained and placed; for that the +people, being troubled with their common necessitie, shall not foule the +streetes, and therefore they haue this prouision: the like is vsed in +all wayes throughout the kingdom. Some cities there be, whose streets be +nauigable, as in Bruxels in Flanders, Mexico in the Indians, and as in +Venice in Italie; which is the occasion that they are better serued and +prouided, for that their barkes and boates doo enter laden with all +kinde of victuals harde to their doores. + +The highways throughout all this kingdome, are the best and gallantest +paued that euer hath beene discouered: they are verie plaine, yea vnto +the mountaines, and they are cut by force of labour and pickaxes, and +maintained with brick and stone, the which by report of them which hath +seen it, is one of the worthiest things that is in all the realme. There +are many mightie bridges, and of a wonderfull making, and some wrought +vpon boats, as it is in Syvill: but in especiall vpon such riuers as are +broad and deepe. In the citie of Fucheo,[47] there is a towre right +against the house of the kings chiefe receiuer, and it is affirmed by +those that haue seene it, to surmount any building that hath beene +amoungst the Romans: the which is raised and founded vppon fortie +pillars, and everie pillar is of one stone, so bigge and so high that it +is strange to tell them, and doubtfull to the hearers to beleeue it: for +which cause I thinke it best not to declare it in particular, as I do in +all things where as I doo finde it difficult to be beleeued, and where I +haue no certaine author to verifie the truth. + + [Sidenote: A wal of 500 leagues long.] + +There is in this kingdome a defence or wall that is fiue hundred leagues +long, and beginneth at the citie Ochyoy,[48] which is vppon the high +mountaines, and runneth from the west vnto east. The king of that +countrie which made it was called Tzintzon, and it was for his defence +against the Tartaries, with whom he had warres; so that the wall doth +shut vp all the frontier of Tartaria. But you must vnderstande that +foure hundred leagues of the saide wall is naturall of it selfe, for +that they be high and mightie rockes, verie nigh together: but in the +other hundred leagues is comprehended the spaces or distance that is +betwixt the rockes, the which he caused to be made by mens handes of +verie strong worke of stone, and is of seuen fathom brode at the foote +of it, and seuen fathom high. It beginneth at the partes of the sea, in +the prouince of Canton,[49] and stretcheth foorth by that of Paguia and +Cansay, and doth finish in the prouince of Susuan.[50] This king, for to +finish this wonderful worke, did take of euerie three men one thorough +his kingdome, and of fiue, two; who for that they trauailed in their +labour so long a iourney, and into different clymes (although that out +of those provinces that were nearest there came great store of people), +yet did they almost all perish that followed that worke. + +The making of this superbious and mightie worke, was the occasion that +his whole kingdome did rise vp against the king, and did kill him, after +that he had raigned fortie yeares, and also a sonne of his that was +called Agnitzi. The report of this wall is helde to be of a verie truth, +for that it is affirmed by all the Chinos that doo traficke to the +Islands Philippinas and to Canton, and Machao, and be all confirmable in +their declaration as witnesses, because they haue seene it: and it is +the farthest parts of all the kingdome, whereas none of vs vnto this day +hath beene. + + + + +CHAP. X. + + _Of the dispositions, countenance, with apparell and other + exercises of the people of this countrie._ + + +Both men and women of this countrie are of a good disposition of their +bodies, well proportioned and gallant men, somewhat tall: they are all +for the most part brode faced, little eyes and flat noses, and without +bearde saue only upon the ball of the chinne: but yet there be some that +haue great eyes and goodly beardes, and their faces well proportioned, +yet of these sorts (in respect of the others) are verie few: and it is +to bee beleeued that these kinde of people doo proceede of some strange +nation, who in times past when it was lawfull to deale out of that +countrie, did ioyne one with another. + +Those of the prouince of Canton (which is a whot[51] country) be browne +of colour like to the Moores: but those that be farther within the +countrie be like unto Almaines,[52] Italians and Spanyardes, white and +redde, and somewhat swart. All of them do suffer their nailes of their +left hande to grow very long, but the right hand they do cut: they haue +long haire, and esteeme it very much and maintaine it with curiositie: +of both they make a superstition, for that they say thereby they shall +be carried into heauen. They do binde their haire up to the crowne of +their heade, in calles of golde verie curious, and with pinnes of the +same. + + [Sidenote: Great abundance of wool and good cheape.] + + [Sidenote: Shooes and buskines of veluet.] + + [Sidenote: Great abundance of Marters furres.] + +The garments which the nobles and principals do vse, bee of silke of +different colours, of the which they haue excellent good and verie +perfite: the common and poore people doo apparell themselues with +another kinde of silke more courser, and with linnen, serge, and cotton: +of all the which there is great abundance. And for that the countrie for +the most part is temperate, they may suffer this kinde of apparell, +which is the heauiest that they doo vse: for in all the whole kingdome +they have no cloth, neither doo they suffer it to be made, although they +have great aboundance of woolle, and very good cheape: they do vse their +coates according vnto our old vse of antiquitie, with long skirts and +full of plaites, and a flappe ouer the brest to be made fast under the +left side, the sleeues verie bigge and wide: upon their coates they doo +vse cassockes or long garments according vnto the possibilitie of either +of them, made according as wee doo vse, but only their sleeues are more +wider. They of royall bloode and such as are constituted vnto dignitie, +do differ in their apparell from the other ordinarie gentlemen: for that +the first haue their garments laide on with gold and siluer downe to the +waste, and the others alonely garnished on the edges, or hem: they do +vse hose verie well made and stitched, shoes and buskins of veluet, +verie curious. In the winter (although it be not very colde,) they haue +their garments furred with beasts skins, but in especiall with Martas +Ceuellinas, of the which they haue great aboundance (as aforesaid) and +generally they do vse them at all times about their necks. They that be +not married doo differ from them that be married, in that they do kirrle +their haire on their foreheade, and wear higher hattes. Their women do +apparell themselues verie curiouslie, much after the fashion of Spaine: +they vse many iewels of gold and precious stones: their gownes haue wide +sleeues; that wherewith they do apparel themselues is of cloath of gold +and siluer and diuers sortes of silkes, whereof they haue great plentie, +as aforesaid, and excellent good, and good cheape: and the poore folkes +doo apparell themselues with veluet, vnshorne veluet and serge. They +haue verie faire haire, and doo combe it with great care and diligence, +as do the women of Genouay, and do binde it about their heade with a +broad silke lace, set full of pearles and precious stones, and they say +it doth become them verie well: they doo vse to paint themselues, and in +some place in excesse. + + [Sidenote: An il vse and custome.] + + [Sidenote: Ingenious people.] + + [Sidenote: Wagons with sailes.] + +Amongst them they account it for gentilitie and a gallant thing to haue +little feete, and therefore from their youth they so swadell and binde +them verie straight, and do suffer it with patience: for that she who +hath the least feete is accounted the gallantest dame. They say that the +men hath induced them vnto this custome, for to binde their feete so +harde, that almost they doo loose the forme of them, and remaine halfe +lame, so that their going is verie ill, and with great trauell: which is +the occasion that they goe but little abroad, and fewe times doo rise vp +from their worke that they do; and was inuented onely for the same +intent. This custome hath indured manie yeares, and will indure many +more, for that it is stablished for a law: and that woman which doth +breake it, and not vse it with her children, shalbe counted as euill, +yea shalbe punished for the same. They are very secreat and honest, in +such sort that you shall not see at any time a woman at her window nor +at her doores: and if her husband doo inuite any person to dinner, she +is neuer seene nor eateth not at the table, except the gest be a kinsman +or a very friende: when they go abroade to visite their father, mother, +or any other kinsfolkes, they are carried in a little chaire by foure +men, the which is made close, and with lattises rounde about made of +golde wyre and with siluer, and curteines of silke; that although they +doo see them that be in the streete, yet they cannot be seene. They haue +many servants waiting on them. So that it is a great maruell when that +you shall meete a principall woman in the streete, yea you will thinke +that there are none in the citie, their keeping in is such: the lameness +of their feet is a great helpe therevnto. The women as well as the men +be ingenious; they doo vse drawne workes and carued works, excellent +painters of flowers, birds and beasts, as it is to be seene vpon beddes +and bords that is brought from thence. I did see my selfe, one that was +brought vnto Lysborne in the yeare 1582, by Captaine Ribera, chiefe +sergant of Manilla, that it was to be wondred at the excellencie +thereof: it caused the kings maiestie to haue admyration, and he is a +person that little wondreth at things. All the people did wonder at it: +yea the famous imbroiderers did maruaile at the curiousnesse thereof. +They are great inuenters of things, that although they haue amongst them +many coches and wagons that goe with sailes, and made with such +industrie and policie that they do gouerne them with great ease: this is +crediblie informed by many that haue seen it: besides that, there be +many in the Indies, and in Portugall, that haue seene them painted vpon +clothes, and on their earthen vessell that is brought from thence to be +solde: so that it is a signe that their painting hath some foundation. +In their buying and selling they are verie subtill, in such sort that +they will depart a haire. Such merchants as do keepe shoppes (of whom in +euery citie there is a great number) they haue a table or signe hanging +at their doore, whereon is written all such merchandise as is within to +be sold. + + [Sidenote: Cloth of gold tissue and silke.] + + [Sidenote: Porsilan.] + + [Sidenote: All occupations be in streets by themselves.] + + [Sidenote: The son inherits his fathers occupation.] + +That which is commonly sold in their shops is cloth of golde and siluer, +cloth of tissue, silkes of diuers sorts and excellent colours: others +there be of poorer sort that selleth serges, peeces of cotton, linnen +and fustian of all colours; yet both the one and the other is verie +goode cheape, for that there is great aboundance, and many workemen that +do make it. The apothecarie that selleth simples, hath the like table: +there be also shops full of earthen vessels of diuers making, redde, +greene, yellow, and gilt; it is so good cheape that for foure rials of +plate they giue fiftie peeces: very strong earth, the which they doo +breake all to peeces and grinde it, and put it into sesternes with +water, made of lime and stone; and after that they haue well tumbled and +tossed it in the water, of the creame that is vpon it they make the +finest sort of them, and the lower they go, spending that substance that +is the courser: they make them after the forme and fashion as they do +here, and afterward they do gild them, and make them of what colour they +please, the which will never be lost: then they put them into their +killes and burne them. This hath beene seene and is of a truth, as +appeareth in a booke set foorth in the Italian toonge, by Duardo +Banbosa,[53] that they do make them of periwinkle shelles of the sea: +the which they do grinde and put them under the ground to refine them, +whereas they lie 100 years: and many other things he doth treat of to +this effect. But if that were true, they should not make so great a +number of them as is made in that kingdome, and is brought into +Portugall, and carried into the Peru, and Noua Espania,[54] and into +other parts of the world: which is a sufficient proofe for that which is +said. And the Chinos do agree for this to be true. The finest sort of +this is neuer carried out of the countrie, for that it is spent in the +seruice of the king, and his gouernours, and is so fine and deere, that +it seemeth to be of fine and perfite cristal: that which is made in the +prouince of Saxii[55] is the best and finest. Artificers and mechanicall +officers doo dwell in streets appointed, whereas none do dwell amongst +them, but such as be of the same occupation or arte: in such sort that +if you doo come at the beginning of the street, looke what craft or art +they are there, it is to be vnderstood that all that streete are of that +occupation. It is ordayned by a law and statute, that the sonne shall +inherite his fathers occupation, and shall not vse any other without +licence of the justice: if one of them bee verie rich and will not +worke, yet he cannot let but haue in his shop men that must worke of his +occupation. Therefore they that do vse it, by reason that they are +brought vp in it from their youth, they are famous and verie curious in +that which they do worke, as it is plainelie seene in that which is +brought from thence to Manilla, and into the Indies, and vnto Portugall. +Their currant monie of that kingdome is made of golde and siluer, +without any signe or print, but goeth by waight: so that all men +carrieth a ballances with them, and little peeces of siluer and golde, +for to buy such things as they haue neede of. And for things of a +greater quantitie they haue bigger ballances in their houses, and +waights, that are sealed, for to giue to euery man that which is theirs: +for therein the iustices haue great care. In the gouernement of +Chincheo[56] they haue copper monie coyned, but it is nothing woorth out +of that prouince. + + + + + THE HISTORIE OF THE MIGHTIE KINGDOME OF CHINA, + + WHEREIN SHALBE DECLARED, OF THE RELIGION THAT IS AMONGST THE PEOPLE, AND + OF THEIR IDOLS THAT THEY DO WORSHIP, AND OF OTHER THINGS TOUCHING THAT + THEY DO VSE ABOUE NATURE. + + THE SECOND BOOKE. + + + + +CHAP. I. + + _Of the number of gods that they doo worship, and of some + tokens and paintings that is found amongst them that do + represent a mysterie of our Christian religion._ + + +In the two prouinces, Paguina an[d] Tolanchia, wheras we haue said, the +king of the countrie is ordinarily resident, for that they do bound vpon +Tartary, with whom they haue continuall warres: and againe the most +principall and politike people be in those places, ouer and aboue all +the other. + + [Sidenote: A strange image.] + + [Sidenote: A mysterie of the Trinitie.] + + [Sidenote: S. Thomas preached in this kingdome.] + + [Sidenote: The martyrdom of Saint Thomas.] + +Amongst the figures of all their idols that they do haue, the Chinos doo +say that there is one of a strange and maruellous making, vnto whom they +do great reuerence: they doo paint him a bodie with three heads, that +doth continually looke the one on the other: and they say that it dooth +signifie, that all three be of one good will and essence, and that which +pleaseth the one pleaseth the other: and to the contrarie, that which is +grieuous and displeaseth the one, is grieuous and displeaseth the other +two: the which being interpreted Christianly, may be vnderstoode to be +the mysterie of the holy Trinitie, that wee that are Christians doo +worship, and is part of our faith: the which, with other things, seemeth +somwhat to be respondent to our holy, sacred, and Christian religion: so +that of verie truth we may presume that Saint Thomas the Apostle[57] did +preach in this kingdome, who as it is declared in the lesson on his day, +after he had receiued the Holy Ghost and preached the holy Gospel vnto +the Parthes, Medes, Persas, Brachmanes, and other nations, he went into +the Indias, whereas he was martyred in the city of Calamina, for his +faith and holy Gospel that he preached. + +It is verified that when this glorious apostle did passe into the +Indies, hee trauelled through this kingdome of China, where as it +appeareth he did preach the holy Gospel and mysterie of the Holy +Trinitie: whose picture in the manner aforesaid doth indure vnto this +day, although those people, by the great and long blindnesse which they +are in with their errors and idolatrie, doo not perfectly knowe what +that figure with three heads doth represent or signifie. The better for +to beleeue that which is said, or at least to vnderstande that it is so, +is that it is found in the writings of the Armenians, that amongst them +are in reputation and of great authoritie: and there it saith, that this +glorious apostle did passe through this kingdome of China, when he went +into the Indies, where he was martyred, and that he did preach there the +holy Gospell, although it did profite verie little, for that the people +were out of order, and occupied in their warres: and therefore this +apostle did passe into the Indies, and left some of the countrie +(although but a few) baptised and instructed, that when it should please +God, they might haue occasion to perseuer in that which was taught them. + +They haue also amongst them (as it is said) certaine pictures, after the +fashion and with the ensignes of the twelue apostles, which is a helpe +to the verifying of that aforesaide: although if you doo aske of the +people who they are, they doo answere that they were men, and great +philosophers that did liue vertuouslie, and therfore they are made +angels in heauen. They doo also vse amongst them the picture of a woman +verie faire with a man childe in her armes, whereof they say shee was +deliuered and yet remained a virgine, and was daughter vnto a mightie +king: they do reuerence her verie much, and do make prayer vnto her: +more then this, they cannot say of this mysterie, but that she liued a +holy life and never sinned. + +Frier Gaspar de la Cruz, a Portugall of the order of Saint Dominicke, +was in the citie of Canton, where he did write many things of this +kingdome,[58] and with great attention, whom I do follow in many things +in the proces of this hystorie, and he saith, that he being vpon a small +island that was in the middest of a mightie riuer, there was a house in +manner of a monasterie of religious people of that country, and being in +it, he saw certaine curious things of great antiquitie: amongst them he +saw a chappel, like vnto an oratorie or place of prayer, verie well +made, and curiouslie dressed: it had certaine staires to mount into it, +and compassed about with gilt grates, and was made fast: and looking +vpon the altar, the which was couered with a cloth verie rich, hee sawe +in the midedst of the same an image of a woman of a meruailous +perfection, with a childe hauing her armes about hir necke, and there +was burning before her a lampe: he being amased at this sight he did +demande the signification: but there was none that could declare more +thereof then that which is said before. Of this which hath been said, it +is easily to be beleeued how that the Apostle S. Thomas did preach in +this kingdom, for that it is seene these people haue conserued these +traditions many yeares past, and doo conserue the same: which is a signe +and token that they had some notice of the true God, whose shadows they +do represent. There is amongst them many errors, and without any +foundation, and is not of them to be seene nor perceiued til such time +as by faith they shall knowe the right God: as may bee seene in the +chapters, where we shall speake of these matters. + + + + +CHAP. II. + + _I do prosecute the religion they haue, and of the idols they + do worship._ + + +Ouer and aboue that which is saide, these idolators and blind people +(being men so prudent and wise in the gouernment of their common wealth, +and so subtill and ingenious in all arts) yet they do vse many other +things of so great blindnes and so impertinent, that it doth make them +to wonder, which attentiuelie doo fall in the consideration: yet is it +not much to be meruailed at, considering that they are without the +cleere light of the true Christian religion, without the which the +subtilest and delicatest vnderstandings are lost and ouerthrowne. +Generally amongst them they doo vnderstand that the heauen is the +creator of all things visible and inuisible: and therefore they do make +a shew of it in the first caract or letter of the crosse row, and that +the heauen hath a gouernour to rule all such things as are comprehended +there aboue: whom they call Laocon Izautey,[59] which is to be +vnderstood in their language: the gouernour of the great and mightie +God, this they do worship as the principall, next vnto the sun. They say +that this gouernour was not begotten, but is eternal, and hath no body, +but is a spirit. Likewise they do say that with this there is another of +the same nature, whom they call Causay,[60] and is likewise a spirit, +and vnto this is giuen power of the lower heauen, in whose power +dependeth the life and death of man. This Causay hath three subiectes +whom he doth commande, and they say they bee likewise spirites, and they +doo aide and helpe him in things touching his gouernment. They are +called Tauquam, Teyquam, Tzuiquam, either of them hath distinct power +the one ouer the other: they say that Tauquam hath charge ouer the +raine, to prouoke water for the earth, and Teyquam ouer humane nature to +bring forth mankinde, ouer warres, sowing the ground, and fruites. And +Tzuiquam ouer the seas and all nauigators. They doo sacrifice vnto them, +and doo craue of them such things as they haue vnder their charge and +gouernment: for the which they do offer them victuals, sweate smels, +frontals and carpets for their altars: likewise they promise many vowes, +and represent plaies and comedies before their idols, the which they do +verie naturallie. + +Besides this, they haue for saints such men as haue surmounted other in +wisdome, in valour, in industrie, or in leading a solitarie or asper +life: or such as haue liued without doing euill to any. And in their +language they cal them Pausaos, which be such as we do call holy men. + +They likewise doo sacrifice vnto the diuell, not as though they were +ignorant that he is euill, or condemned, but that he shoulde doo them no +harme, neither on their bodies nor goods. They haue manie strange gods, +of so great a number, that alonely for to name them is requisite a large +hystorie, and not to be briefe as is pretended in this booke. And +therefore I will make mention but of their principals, whom (besides +those which I haue named) they haue in great reuerence. + +The first of these they doo call Sichia, who came from the kingdome of +Trautheyco,[61] which is towards the west: this was the first inuenter +of such religious people, as they haue in their countrie both men and +women, and generally doth liue without marrying, in perpetuall +closenesse; and all such as doo immitate this profession do weare no +haire, which number is great, as hereafter you shall vnderstand: and +they greatly obserue that order left vnto them. + +The next is called Quanina, and was daughter vnto the king Tzonton, who +had three daughters; two of them were married, and the third, which was +Quanina, hee woulde also haue married, but she would neuer consent +thereunto: saying that she had made a vow to heauen to liue chast, +whereat the king her father was verie wroth, and put her into a place +like vnto a monastrie, whereas she was made to carrie wood and water, +and to worke and make cleane an orcharde that was there. The Chinos do +tell many tales of this maide, for to be laughed at: saying, that the +apes came from the mountaines for to help her, and how that saints did +bring her water, and the birds of the aire with their bylles did make +cleane her orchard, and that the great beastes came out of the +mountaines and brought her woode. Her father perceiuing that, imagining +that she did it by witchcraft, or by some art of the diuell (as it might +well bee), commanded to set fire on that house whereas she was: then she +seeing that for her cause that house was set on fire, she would haue +destroyed her selfe with a siluer pinne, which she had to trim vp her +haire: but vpon a sodanne at that instant there fel a great shower of +raine and did put out the fire, and shee departed from thence and hid +her selfe in the mountaines, whereas she liued in great penance and led +a holy life. And her father, in recompense of the great sinne and evill +he committed against her, was turned to a lepar, and full of wormes, in +such sort that there was no phisition that could cure him: by reason +whereof hee was constrained to repaire vnto his daughter to seeke cure +(which being aduised of the same by reuelation of a deuine spirit); then +her father, being certified thereof, did craue pardon at her handes, and +did repent him verie much of that which he had done, and did worshippe +vnto her, the which she seeing, resisted her father therein, and put a +saint before him, that he should worship it and not her, and therewith +shee straight waies returned vnto the mountaines, whereas she died in +great religion. This they haue amongest them for a great saint, and doe +pray vnto her to get pardon for their sinnes of the heaven, for that +they do beleeve that she is there. + +Besides this, they haue another saint which they call Neoma, and was +borne in a towne called Cuchi, in the prouince of Ochiam. This they saye +was daughter vnto a principall man of that towne, and would neuer +marrie, but left her owne naturall soyle and went vnto a little iland, +which is right ouer against Ingoa, whereas she liued a verie straight +life, and shewed manie false miracles. The occasion why they haue her in +reputation of a saint is: There was a certaine captaine of the king of +China, whose name was Compo; he was sent vnto a kingdome not farre from +thence to make warre against the king. It so chaunced that he, with his +nauie, came to an anker at Buym, and being readie to departe, hee would +haue wayed his ankers, but by no meanes he could not mooue them: being +greatly amazed thereat, and looking foorth, he sawe this Neoma sitting +on them. Then the captaine came vnto her, and told her with great +humilitie, that he was going to warres by commandement of the king. And +that if so be she were holie, that she would giue him counsell what were +best for him to do: to whom she answered and sayd, that if he would haue +the victorie ouer them that hee went to conquer, that he should carrie +her with him. He did performe that which she said, and carried her with +him vnto that kingdome, whose inhabitantes were great magicians, and +threw oyle into the sea, and made it seeme that their shippes were all +on fire. This Neoma did worke by the same art, and did vndoe that which +the other did practise or imagine, in such sort, that their magicke did +profitte them nothing, neither could they doe anie harme vnto them of +China. The which being perceiued by them of ye kingdome, they did yeeld +themselues to be subjectes and vassales vnto the king of China. The +captaine beleeued this to be a myracle, yet notwithstanding he did +coniure her (as one of good discretion), for that thinges might fall out +to the contrarie; and the better to certifie his opinion, whereby hee +might the better giue relation thereof vnto the king, he said: Ladie, +turne me this rodde the which I haue in my hand drie, to become greene +and florishing, and if you can so do, I will worship you for a saint. +Then she at that instant did not onely make it greene, but also to haue +an odoriferous smell. The which rod he put vpon the poope of his ship +for a remembrance, and for that he had a verie prosperous and good +viage, he did attribute it vnto her. So that vnto this day, they haue +her in reputation of a saint, and carrie her picture vppon the poope of +their ships, and such as be trauellers to the sea doo offer vnto her +sacrifices. + +These aforesaide they doo esteeme for their principall saints, yet +besides all these they haue an infinite number of carued idols, which +they doo place vpon alters in their tempels: the quantity of them is +such that in my presence it was affirmed by frier Geronimo Martin, he +that entred into China, and is a man of great credite woorthy to giue +credite vnto, that amongst many other things, he was in one of their +temples in the cittie of Vcheo, where as hee did count one hundred and +twelue idols: and besides this they haue manie in the high wayes and +streetes, and vppon their principall gates of the citie, the which they +haue in small veneration, as you shall perceiue in this chapter +following: whereby it is plainlie to be seene, in what subiection they +are vnto errours and idolatrie, such as doo lacke the trueth of true +Christian religion. + + + + +CHAP. III. + + _How little they doo esteeme their idols whome they worshippe._ + + +These miserable idolaters doo so little esteeme their idols, that it is +a great hope and confidence, that at what time soeuer the gospel shal +haue any entry into that country, straightwayes they will leaue off all +their superstitions: in particular in casting of lots, which is a thing +much vsed throughout all that kingdome: also this will be a great helpe +thereunto, for that they are generally men of good vnderstanding, and +ducible and subiect vnto reason, in so ample sort (as is declared by +that religious Dominicke aforesaid), he being in Canton in a temple +whereas they were sacrificing vnto their idols, being mooued with great +zeale to the honour of God, did throw certaine of them downe to the +grounde. When these idolaters did see his boldnesse, which seemed vnto +them to be without reason, they laide hands on him with an infernall +furie, with determination for to kill him: then he did request of them +that before they did execute it, that they would heare what he would +say: the which his petition seemed vnto the principals that were there +to bee iust, and commanded all the people to withdrawe themselues, and +to heare what he woulde say. Then he, with the spirit that God did put +in him, said, that they should aduertise themselues, for that God our +Lorde and creator of heauen and earth, had giuen vnto them so good +vnderstandings, and did equall them vnto the politikest nations in all +the world: that they should not imploy it vnto euil, neither subiect +themselues to worship vnto stones and blocks of wood, which haue no +discourse of reason, more then is giuen them by the workmen that did +make them, and it were more reason the idols should reuerence and +worship men, because they haue their similitude and likenesse: with +these words, and other such like in effect, they were all quieted, and +did not only approoue his saying to be true, but did giue him great +thankes, excusing themselues: saying, that vntill that time there was +none that euer did giue them to vnderstand so much, neither how they did +euill in doing their sacrifices, and in token of gratefulnes (leauing +their idols on the ground, and some broken all to pieces) they did beare +him company vnto his lodging. Hereby you may vnderstand with what +facilitie, by the helpe of almightie God, they may be reduced vnto our +Catholicke faith: opening (by the light of the gospel) the doore which +the diuell hath kept shut by false delusions so long time, although the +king, with all his gouernors and ministers, hath great care that in all +that kingdome there be none to induce nouelties, neither to admit +strangers or any new doctrin without license of the said king, and of +his roial counsel, vpon pain of death, the which is executed with great +rigor. They are people very ducible and apt to bee taught, and easie to +bee turned from their idolatrie, superstition, and false gods: the which +they haue in smal venerati[=o] as aforesaid. With great humility they do +receiue and approue corrections of their weaknes, and do know the +vauntage that is betwixt the gospell and their rights and vanities, and +do receiue the same with a verie good will, as it hath beene and is +seene in manie Chinos that haue receiued baptisme in the citie of +Manila, vpon one of the Ilands Philippinas, whereas they do dwell, and +leaue their owne naturall countrie for to enioy that which they +vnderstande to bee for the saluation of their soules. So that those who +haue receiued baptisme are become verie good Christians. + + + + +CHAP. IV. + + _Of lots which they doo vse when they will doe anie thing of + importance, and howe they doe inuocate or call the diuell._ + + + [Sidenote: They cast lottes.] + + [Sidenote: They throw their gods under their feet.] + + [Sidenote: A hogs head for a sacrifice.] + +The people of this countrie do not alonely vse superstitions, but they +are also great augurisers or tellers of fortunes, and do beleeue in +auguries, as a thing most certaine and infallible, but in especiall by +certaine lots which they do vse at all times, when they beginne any +jorney, or for to doe anything of importance, as to marie a sonne, a +daughter, or lend anie money, or buy any lands, or deale wt +merchandise, or any other thing whose end is incertaine or doubtfull. In +all these matters they do vse lottes, the which they do make of two +sticks, flat on the one side, and round on the other, and being tyed +togither with a small threede, throwe them before their idols. But +before they do throwe them, they do vse great ceremonies in talke, and +vse amorous and gentle wordes, desiring them to giue them good fortune. +For by them they doe vnderstand the successe to be good or euill in +their iourney, or any other thing that they do take in hande. Likewise +they do promise them, if they do giue them good fortune, to offer vnto +them victuales, frontalles, or some other thing of price. This being +done, they throwe downe their lots, and if it so fall out that the flat +side be vpper, or one flat side and the other round, they haue it for an +euill signe or token. Then they returne vnto their idols, and say vnto +them manie iniurious words, calling them dogs, infamous, villaines, and +other names like in effect. After they haue vttered vnto them all +iniuries at their pleasure, then they beginne againe to fawne vpon them, +and intreat them with milde and sweet words, crauing pardon of that +which is past, and promising to giue them more gifts then before they +did, if their lot do fal out wel. Then, in the like manner as before, +they do proceed, and throw the lots before the idols: but if it fal not +out according vnto their expectation, then they returne againe with +vituperous and vile words: but if to their desire, then with great +praises and promises. But when that in matters of great importance, it +is long before their lots do fall well, then they take them and throwe +them to the grounde, and treade vppon them, or else throwe them into the +sea, or into the fire, whereas they let them burne a while: and +sometimes they doo whippe them vntill such time as the lottes doo fall +as they would haue them, which is the rounde side vpwards, and is a +token of good successe vnto that for which they do cast their lottes. +Then if the lottes doo fall out vnto their content, they doo make vnto +them great feastes with musicke and songes of great praise, and doo +offer vnto them geese, duckes, and boyled rise. But if the thing whereon +they doo cast their lottes bee of importance, then they doo offer vnto +them a hogges heade boyled, dressed with hearbes and flowers, the which +is esteemed aboue all other thinges, and therewith a great pot with +wine. Of all that they doo offer, they doo cut off their billes, and the +clawes of the fowles, and the hogges snowte, and do throw vpon it +graines of rise, and sprinkling it with wine, they set it in dishes vpon +the altar, and there they do eate and drinke, making great feast and +cheere before their idols. + + [Sidenote: Another kind of lots.] + +Another kinde of lots they doo vse, in putting a great number of little +stickes into a pot, and vpon everie one of them is written a letter: and +after that they haue tumbled and tossed them together in the pot, they +cause a child to put in his hand and take out one, and when they haue +seene the letter, they seeke in a booke which they haue for that purpose +the leafe that beginneth with that letter, and looke what they doo finde +written therein, they do interpret of it conformable vnto the thing that +they cast their lots for.[62] + + [Sidenote: Inuocation to the diuell.] + + [Sidenote: The diuell telleth lies.] + +Generally in all this country when they finde themselues in any trouble, +they do inuocate and call vpon the diuell, with whom they do ordinarily +talke (euen as we do cal vpon God in our neede): of him they doo demande +what way and order they might take to cleere themselues thereof, as they +did in the presence of frier Pedro de Alfaro, of the order of Saint +Francis, in the yeare of our Lorde 1580, at such time as he came from +China, as may be seene in his relation. The order that they haue in +inuocating or calling on the diuell, is as followeth. They cause a man +to lie vpon the ground, his face downwards, then another beginneth to +reade vpon a booke singing, and part of them that are present do answere +vnto him, the rest do make a sound with little bels and tabers; then +within a little while after, the man that lieth on the ground beginneth +to make visages and iestures, which is a certaine token that the diuell +is entered within him: then do they aske of him what they doo desire to +know; then he that is possessed doth answere, yet for the most part they +bee lies that hee doth speake; although hee doo keepe it close, yet doth +hee giue diuers reasons vnto that which hee dooth answere, for that +alwayes they doo answere either by worde or by letters, which is the +remedie they have when that the diuell will not answere by worde. And +when that he doth answere by letters, then do they spread a redde mantle +or couerlet vpon the ground, and throw thereon a certaine quantitie of +rice dispersed equally in euery place vpon the couerlet; then do they +cause a man that cannot write to stand there with a sticke in his hand; +then those that are present do begin to sing and to make a sounde as at +the first inuocation, and within a little while the diuell doth enter +into him that hath the sticke, and causeth him to write vpon the rice, +then do they translate the letters that are there formed with the +sticke, and being ioyned altogether, they finde answere of that they do +demaunde; although for the most part it falleth out as aforesaide, as +vnto people that do communicate with the father of all lying, and so do +their answeares fall out false and full of leasings. If that at any time +he do tell them the truth, it is not for that he dooth it by nature or +with his will, but to induce them vnder the colour of a truth to +perseuir in their errors, and they do giue credite vnto a thousand lies: +in this sort doo they inuocate the diuell, and it is so ordinarie a +thing throughout al the kingdome, that there is nothing more vsed nor +knowne. + + + + +CHAP. V. + + _Of the opinion they haue of the beginning of the worlde, and + of the creation of man._ + + +Although the Chinos be generally verie ingenious, and of a cleere +vnderstanding, yet in their owne respect they say that all other nations +in the worlde be blinde, except the Spaniards, whom they have knowne but +of late time; they haue amongst them both naturall and morall +philosophie, the which is read publikely amongst them, and also +astrologie. + +But nowe touching the beginning of the worlde, and the creation of man: +they have many errors, wherof some of them shalbe declared in this +chapter, taken out of their owne books, and specially out of one that is +intituled the beginning of the world. + + [Sidenote: Strange opinions.] + + [Sidenote: Marvellous varieties.] + + [Sidenote: The first invention of fire.] + + [Sidenote: Strange opinions.] + + [Sidenote: The invention of plough and spade.] + + [Sidenote: Sic. orig.] + + [Sidenote: The first king of China.] + +They say that at the beginning, the heaven, the earth, and the water +were a masse or lumpe ioyned in one. And that there is one resident in +heaven, whom they call by name Tayn, hee by his great science did +separate heaven and earth the one from the other, so that the heaven +remained hie in the state that it is, and the earth following his +naturall inclination, as grave and heauie, did remaine whereas it is. +They say that this Tayn did create a man of nothing, who they call +Panzon,[63] and likewise a woman, who they call Pansona. This Panzon, by +the power that was given him by Tayn, did create of nothing another man, +who they call Tanhom,[64] with thirteen other brothers. This Tanhom was +a man of great science, in so ample sort, that hee did give name vnto +all created things, and did know by the assignement and doctrine of +Tayne the vertue of them all, and to apply them to heale all manner of +diseases and sicknesses: this Tanhom and his brethren, but especially +the eldest, who was called Teyencom,[65] he had twelve; his first +begotten, called Tuhuncom, had nine, so had al the rest very many. They +do believe that the linage and generation of these did indure for more +than ninty thousand yeeres, and in the end and conclusion of them did +end all humaine nature; for that it was the will of Tayn, who did first +create the man and woman of nothing, for to be reuenged on certaine +iniuries that they did vnto him, and for euery one that he had shewed +vnto them, they did almost knowe so much as himselfe, and would not +acknowledge any superioritie, as they did promise him, at such time as +hee did give vnto him the secreat of all his science. At that time did +the heauen fall downe, then did Tayn raise it vp againe, and created +another man vpon the earth named Lotzitzam;[66] hee had two hornes, out +of the which proceeded a verie sweete sauour, the which sweet smell did +bring forth both men and women. This Lotzitzam vanished away, and left +behind him in the world manie men and women, of whom did proceede all +nations that now are in it. The first that this Lotzitzam brought foorth +was called Alazan, and lived nine hundred yeares; then did the heauen +create another man called Atzion, whose mother, called Lutin, was with +childe with him, onely in seeing a lyons head in the aire: he was borne +in Truchin in the province of Santon, and liued eight hundred yeares. At +this time was the worlde replenished with much people, and did feede on +nothing but on wilde hearbs and raw things: then was there borne into +the worlde one called Vsao, who gave them industrie to make and do many +things, as to vse the trees to make defence to save them from wilde +beasts, which did them much harme, and to kill them, and make garments +of their skinnes. After him came one called Huntzui, who did inuent the +vse of fire, and instructed them what they should doo, and how to rost +and boyle their victuals, and how to barter and sell one thing for +another. They did understande one another in their contradictions by +knots made vpon cords, for that they had not the vse of letters nor any +mention thereof. After that, they say that a certain woman, called +Hautzibon, was deliuered of a son named Ocheutey,[67] who was the +inuentor of many things and ordained mariage, and to play on many and +diuers instruments. They do affirme that he came from heauen by myracle +for to doo good vpon the earth: for that his mother going by the way did +see the print of a mans foote, and putting her foote on it, she was +straight wayes invironed with a lightning, with whom she was conceiued, +and with child with this son. This Ocheutey had a son called +Ezoulom,[68] who was the inuentor of phisicke and astrology, but, in +especiall, matters touching lawe and iudgement. Hee showed them how to +till the lande, and inuented the plough and spade; of this man they do +tell manie wonderfull and maruellous things, but amongst them all, they +say that he did eate of seuen seuerall kindes of hearbes that were +poyson, and did him no harme; he liued 400 hundred yeares; his son was +called Vitey, the first they had amongst them; hee reduced all things to +be vnder gouernement, and to haue it by succession, as shalbe declared +in the chapter whereas I will treate of the king of this mightie +kingdome that now liueth. These and many other varieties and toyes they +saie of the beginning of the world, whereby may be vnderstood how little +men may do without the fauour of God, and the light of the catholike +faith, yea, though they be of the most subtilest and finest wit that may +be imagined. + + + + +CHAP. VI. + + _How they hold for a certaintie that the soule is immortall, + and that he shal haue another life, in the which it shalbe + punished or rewarded according vnto the workes which he doth + in this world; and how they pray for the dead._ + + +By that aforesaid it appeareth to be of a truth that the apostle S. +Thomas did preach in China, and we may presume that all which wee haue +seene dooth remaine printed in their hearts from his doctrine, and +beareth a similitude of the truth and a conformity with the things of +our catholike religion. Now touching this that wee will treate of in +this chapter, of the immortalitie that they believe of the soule, and of +the rewarde or punishment which they shall have in the other life, +according vnto the workes doone in company with the bodie, which +appeareth to be the occasion that they do not live so euill as they +might, not hauing the knowledge of this truth. + + [Sidenote: The soul is immortal.] + + [Sidenote: Strange obsequies.] + + [Sidenote: They make their sacrifices in the night.] + + [Sidenote: Great superstition.] + +I do hope by the power of his diuine maiestie that they wil easily be +brought vnto the true knowledge of the gospel. They say and do affirme +it of a truth, that the soule had his first beginning from the heauen, +and shall neuer haue ende, for that the heauen hath given it an eternall +essence. And for the time that it is within the body that God hath +ordained, if it do liue according to such lawes as they have, without +doing euill or deceit vnto his neighbor, then it shalbe caried vnto +heaven, wheras it shal liue eternally with great ioy, and shalbe made an +angel: and to the contrarie, if it liue ill, shall go with the diuels +into darke dungeons and prisons, whereas they shall suffer with them +torments which neuer shall haue end. They doo confesse that there is a +place whither such soules as shalbe made angels doo go to make +themselues cleane of al such euil as did cleaue unto them, being in the +bodie: and for that it should be speedelier doone, the good deeds which +are done by their parents and friends doo helpe them verie much. So that +it is very much vsed throughout al the kingdome to make orations and +praiers for the dead,[69] for the which they have a day appointed in the +moneth of August. They do not make their offrings in their temples, but +in their houses, the which they doo in this manner following. The day +appointed, all such as do beare them companie vntill their sacrifices +are concluded for the dead, which are such as we do cal here religious +men, euery one hath his companion and walketh the streets, and dooth +report the daies and houses where they will be, for that it cannot be +doone altogether. So when they come vnto the house whereas they must doo +their offices, they enter in, and do prepare that euery one do make +oration and sacrifice according to their fashion for the dead of that +house, vnderstanding that by their helpe they shalbe made cleane from +their euils, which is an impediment that they cannot be angels nor inioy +the benefite which is ordained for them in heauen. One of these that is +like vnto a priest, dooth bring with him a taber, and other two little +bords, and another a little bell. Then they do make an altar, wheron +they do set such idols as the dead had for their saints liuing; then do +they perfume them with frankensence and storax and other sweet smels: +then do they put fiue or six tables ful of victuals for the dead and for +the saints: then straightwayes, at the sound of the taber, little bords, +and bels (which is a thing more apt for to dance by, as by report of +them that have heard it), they begin to sing certaine songs which they +haue for that purpose: then do the nouices goe vp vnto the altar, and do +offer in written paper those orations which they did sing to the sound +of those instruments. This being done, they sit down and begin anew to +sing as before. In the end of their prayers and songs, he who doth this +office, doth sing a prayer, and in the end thereof (with a litle borde +that he hath in his hand for the purpose) he striketh a blow vpon the +table, then the other do answere in the same tune, declining their +heades, and doe take certaine painted papers, and guilt papers, and doe +burne them before the altar. In this sort they are all the night, which +is the time that ordinarily they do make their sacrifices, the which +being done, the priests and those that be in the house, do eat the +victuals that was set vpon the tables, wherein they doo spend the +residue of the night till it be day. They say that in doing this they do +purifie and make cleane the soules, that they may goe and become angels. +The common people do beleeue of truth that the soule that liueth not +well, before they go into hell (which shall not be before the end of the +world, according as they do thinke in their error), in recompence of +their euill life, the heauens doo put them into the bodies of buffes and +other beasts; and those which liue well, into the bodies of kings and +lords, whereas they are very much made of and well serued. These and a +thousande toies in like sort, making that the soul dooth mooue out of +one into another, as certaine old philosophers did affirme it to bee, +who were as blind and as far from the truth as they. + + + + +CHAP. VII. + + _Of their temples, and of certaine manner of religious people, + both men and women, and of their superiors._ + + + [Sidenote: Gallant colours for religious men.] + + [Sidenote: Gallant bels.] + +There are found in this kingdome many moral things, the which do touch +verie much our religion, which giueth vs to vnderstand that they are +people of great vnderstanding, in especiall in naturall things, and that +it should be of a certainty, that the holy apostle of whom we have +spoken, did leaue amongst them by his preachings occasion for to learne +manie things that do shew vnto vertue; one of the which is, that there +is found amongst them many monasteries in their cities and townes, and +also in the fieldes, wherein are manie men and women that do liue in +great closenes and obedience, after the fashion of other religious +monasteries. They haue amongst them (that is knowne) onely foure orders, +euery one of them hath their generall, who dwelleth ordinarily in the +citie of Suntien, or Taybin, whereas is the king and his counsell. These +their generals they doo call in their language _tricon_, who doo prouide +for euery prouince a prouinciall, to assist and visite all the conuents, +correcting and amending such faults as is found, according vnto the +institution and manner of liuing. This prouinciall doth ordaine in euery +conuent one, which is like vnto the prior or guardian, whom al the rest +do reuerence and obey. This generall is for euer till he doo die, except +they doo finde in him such faults that he doth deserue to be depriued; +yet they do not elect their prouincials as we do vse, but it is doone by +the king and his counsell, alwayes choosing him that is knowne to be of +a good life and fame, so that fauour carrieth nothing away. This +generall is apparelled all in silke, in that colour that his profession +dooth vse, either black, yeallow, white, or russet, which are the fower +colours that the foure orders doo vse: hee neuer goeth foorth of his +house, but is carried in a little chaire of iuorie or golde, by foure or +sixe men of his habite. When any of the conuent doth talke vnto him, it +is on their knees; they haue also amongst them a seale of their +monasterie, for the dispatching of such businesse as toucheth their +religion. These haue great rentes giuen them by the king for the +sustayning of themselues and their suruants. All their conuents hath +great rentes in general; part giuen them by the king, and part of +charitie, giuen them in those cities or townes whereas they haue their +houses, the which are many and verie huge. They doo aske their charitie +in the streets, singing with the sounde of two little bords, and other +instruments. Every one of them when they do begge, doth carrie in their +hands a thing, wherein are written certaine praiers, that they say is +for the sins of the people; and all that is giuen them in charitie they +lay it vpon the said thing, wherewith they do vnderstand (in their blind +opinion) that their spirit is cleare of all sinne. In general their +beards and heads are shauen, and they weare one sole vesture, without +making any difference, according vnto the colour of their religion. They +do eate altogether, and haue their sels according to the vse of our +friers, their vestures or apparel is ordinary of serge of the said foure +colours. They haue beads to pray on, as the papists vse, although in +another order; they doe assist al burials for to haue charity; they do +arise two houres before day to pray, as our papists[70] do their +mattins, and do continue in the same vntill the day doo breake: they doo +praie all in one voice, singing in verie good order and attention, and +all the time of their praying they do ring belles, whereof they haue in +that kingdome the best and of the gallantest sounde that is in all the +world, by reason that they are made almost all of steele; they pray vnto +the heauen, whom they take for their god, and vnto Sinquian, who they +say was the inuenter of that their manner of life, and became a saint. +They may leaue their order at all times at their pleasure, giuing their +generall to vnderstand thereof. + + [Sidenote: The eldest sonne is prohibited to take orders.] + +But in the time that they are in that order they cannot marrye, neither +deale with anye woman, vpon paine to bee punished asperly.[71] At such +time as one doth put himselfe in religion, the father or next kinsman of +him that taketh the order, doth inuite all them of the conuent, and doth +make them a great and solemne banket; yet you must vnderstand that the +oldest sonne of any man cannot put himself in any monasterie, but is +prohibited by the lawes of the countrie, for that the eldest sonne is +bound to sustaine his father in his old age. When that any of these +religious men do die, they doo wash him, and shaue him, before they do +burie him, and do all weare mourning apparell for him. The religious man +or woman that is once punished for any fault, cannot afterward turne and +receiue the habite at any time. They haue a certaine marke giuen vnto +them in token of their fault, and that is a borde put about their necke, +so that it is seene of all people. Euerie morning and euening they do +offer vnto their idolles frankensence, benjamin, wood of aguila,[72] and +cayolaque,[73] the which is maruelous sweete, and other gummes of sweet +and odoriferous smels. When that they will lanch any ship into the water +after that it is made, then these religious men, all apparelled with +rich roabes of silke, do go to make sacrifices vpon the poopes of them, +wheras they haue their oratories, and there they doo offer painted +papers of diuers figures, the which they doo cut in peeces before their +idols, with certaine ceremonies and songes well consorted, and ringing +of little belles, they do reuerence vnto the diuell. And they do paint +him in the fore castle, for that he shall do no harme vnto the shipps: +that being done, they do eate and drinke till they can no more. And with +this they thinke it is sufficient for the shippe, that all such viages +as shee shall make shall succeede well, the which they haue amongst them +for a thing most certaine: and if they did not blesse them in this +order, all things would fall out to the contrarie. + + + + +CHAP. VIII. + + _The order that they haue in burying of the dead, and the mourning + apparell they haue._ + + + [Sidenote: A strange kind of buriall.] + +It seemeth vnto me not farre from our purpose, to declare in this place, +how they vse in this kingdome to burie the dead, and it is surely a +thing to be noted: the manner is as foloweth. When that any one doth +die, at the very instant yt he yeeldeth vp ye gost, they do wash his +bodie all ouer from top to toe, then do they apparell him with the best +apparell that he had, all perfumed with sweet smels. Then after he is +apparelled, they do set him in ye best chaier that he hath; then +commeth vnto him his father and mother, brethren and sisters and +children, who kneeling before him, they do take their leaue of him, +shedding of many teares, and making of great moane, euery one of them by +themselues. Then after them in order commeth all his kinsfolkes and +friends; and last of all his servants (if he had any), who in like case +do as the other before. This being done, they do put him into a coffin +or chest, made of verie sweete wood (in that countrie you haue verie +much); they do make it very close, to avoid the euil smel. Then do they +put him on a table with two bankes, in a chamber verie gallantly dressed +and hanged with the best clothes that can be gotten, couering him with a +white sheete hanging downe to the ground, whereon is painted the dead +man or woman, as naturall as possible may be. But first in the chamber +whereas the dead bodie is, or at the entrie, they set a table with +candles on it, and full of bread and fruits of diuers sorts. And in this +order they keepe him aboue ground 15 dayes, in ye which time euery +night commeth thether their priests and religious men, whereas they sing +praiers and offer sacrifices, with other ceremonies: they bring with +them many painted papers, and do burne them in the presence of the dead +bodie, with a thousand superstitions and witch-craftes: and they do hang +vpon cordes (which they haue for the same purpose) of the same papers +before him, and many times do shake them and make a great noyse, with +the which they say it doth send the soule straight vnto heauen. + +In the end of the 15 daies, all which time the tables are continually +furnished with victuals and wine, which the priests, their kinsfolkes +and friends, that do come to visite them, do eat. These ceremonies being +ended, they take the coffin with the dead bodie, and carrie him into the +fields, accompanied with all his kinsfolks and friends, and with their +priests and religious men, carrying candles in their hands, wheras +ordinarily they do burie them on a mountaine, in sepulchres, that for +the same purpose in their life time they caused to be made of stone and +masons worke: that being doone, straight waies hard by ye sepulture, +they do plant a pine tree, in ye which place there be many of them, and +they be neuer cut downe except they be ouerthrowne with the weather, and +after they be fallen they let them lie till they consume of themselues, +for that they be sanctified. The people yt do beare him company to the +graue, do go in uery good order like a procession, and haue with them +many instruments, which neuer leaue playing till such time as the dead +is put into the sepulcher. And that burial which hath most priests and +musicke is most sumptuous, wherin they were woont to spend great riches. +They sing to the sound of the instruments many orations vnto their +idols, and in the end they do burne vpon the sepulcher many papers, +whereon is painted slaues, horse, gold, siluer, silkes, and many other +things, the which they say, that the dead body doth possesse in the +other world whether he goeth to dwell. At such time as they do put him +into the grave, they doo make great bankets and sports with great +pastime, saying of a truth, that looke what soeuer they doo at that +time, the angels and saints that are in heauen doe the like vnto the +souls of the dead that is there buried. Their parents, familiars, and +servants, in all this time doo weare mourning apparell, the which is +verie asper,[74] for that their apparell is made of a verie course +wolle, and weare it next vnto their skins, and girt vnto them with +cords, and on their heads bunnets of the same cloth, with verges brode +like vnto a hat hanging downe to their eyes; for father or mother they +do weare it a hole yeare, and some two yeares, and if his son be a +gouernor (with licence of the king), he doth withdraw himself many +times, leauing the office he hath, the which they esteeme a great point +of honor, and have it in great account, and such as are not so much in +aliance do apparell them in died linnen certaine monethes. Likewise +their parents and friendes, although these doo weare it but for the time +of the buriall. + + + + +CHAP. IX. + + _Of their ceremonies that they vse in the celebrating the + Marriages._ + + + [Sidenote: They that haue most daughters are most richest.] + + [Sidenote: They may marrie with many wiues.] + + [Sidenote: Honest women.] + +The people of this kingdome haue a particular care to giue state vnto +their children in time, before that they be ouercome or drowned in vices +or lasciuious liuing. The which care is the occasion, that in this +countrie, being so great, there is lesse vice vsed than in any other +smaller countries: whose ouer much care doth cause them many times to +procure to marrie their children being verie yoong: yea, and to make +consort before they bee borne, with signes and tokens, making their +writings and bandes for the performance of the same in publike order. In +all this kingdome--yea, and in the Ilands Philippinas--it is a +customable vse, that the husband doth giue dowrie vnto the wife with +whom he doth marrie; and at such time as they doe ioyne in matrimonie, +the father of the bride doth make a great feast in his owne house, and +doth inuite to the same the father and mother, kinsfolkes and friends, +of his sonne in lawe. And the next day following, the father of the +bridegroome, or his next parent, doth the like vnto the kinsfolkes of +the bride. These bankets being finished, the husbande doth giue vnto his +wife her dowrie in the presence of them all, and she doth giue it vnto +her father or mother (if she haue them) for the paines they tooke in the +bringing her vp. Whereby it is to be vnderstoode, that in this kingdome, +and in those that doe confine on it, those that haue most daughters are +most richest; so that with the dowries their daughters do giue them, +they may well sustaine themselues in their necessitie; and when they +die, they doo giue it that daughter that did giue it them, that it may +remaine for their children, or otherwise vse it at their willes. A man +may marrie with so manie wiues as he can sustaine, so it be not with his +sister or brothers daughter; and if any doo marrie in these two degrees, +they are punished very rigorously. Of all their wiues, the first is +their legitimate wife, and all the rest are accompted but as lemanes or +concubines. These married men doo liue and keepe house with his first +wife, and the rest he doth put in other houses; or if he be a merchant, +then he doth repart them in such villages or townes whereas hee doth +deale in, who are vnto him as seruantes in respect of the first. When +the father doth die, the eldest sonne, by his first wife, doth inherite +the most part of all his goods, and the rest is reparted in equall +partes amongest the other children, both of his first wife and of all +the other wiues. For lacke of a sonne by his first wife, the first borne +of the other wiues doth inherite the most part: so that few times, or +neuer, there is none that dieth without heyres, eyther by his first +wife, or by the others. And if it so fall out that any of these his +wiues do commit adulterie (the which seeldome chaunceth, by reason of +their keeping in, and great honestie, as also it is great infamie unto +the man that doth offer any such thing), then may the husband, finding +them togither, kill them: but after that first furie being past, he +cannot but complaine of the adulterers vnto the Justic, and although it +be proued verie apparent, yet can they giue them no more punishment but +beate them cruelly vpon their thyghes, as is the custome and lawe of the +countrie, as shalbe declared vnto you in his place. Then may the husband +afterwardes sell his wife for a slave, and make money of her for the +dowrie he gaue her. Notwithstanding, there be amongst them that for +interest will dissemble the matter--yea, and will seeke opportunities +and occasion. Yet if such be spied or knowen, they are righteously +punished. They say in the prouinces that bee neere vnto Tartaria, and in +the selfe same Tartaria they doo vse a custome and manner of marriage +very strange, that is: the vizroys or gouernors doo limit and appoint a +time when that all men and women shall meete together, such as will +marrie, or receive the order of religion. + + [Sidenote: A strange kind of marriage.] + +The time being accomplished, all such as would be married, do meete +together in a citie of that prouince appointed for that purpose; and +when they come thither, they doo present themselues before 12 auncient +and principall men, appointed there by the king for the same purpose, +who doo take a note of their names, both of men and women, and of what +state and degree they are, and of their substance for to dowrie their +wiues with whom they shalbe married. Then do they number all the men and +women that be there, and if they do find more men than women, or, to the +contrarie, more women than men, then they cast lots, and do leaue the +number that doth so beare in register til the next yeare; yt they may +be the first that shalbe married. Then sixe of those ancient men do put +the men in three parts; the rich they put in one part, without any +consideration of gentilitie or beautie, and those that are rich in a +meane in an other parte, and the poor in the thirde part. In the meane +time that these sixe men be occupied in the reparting of the men, the +other sixe doe repart the women in three parts--to say in this manner, +the most fairest in one part, and them not so faire in an other, and the +fowlest in an other. This diuision being made, then do they marrie them +in this order: vnto the riche men they doo giue the fairest, and they +doo giue for them the prise that is appointed by the judges, and vnto +them that are not so rich they do giue them that are not so faire, +without paying for them anye thing at all; and vnto the poore men they +giue the fowlest, with all that which the rich men do pay for the faire +women, diuiding it into equall partes. Sure it is a notable thing if it +bee true. This being done, they are all married in one daie, and holpen +(although peraduenture not all content), the marriages being doone, +there is greate feastes made, in such houses as the king hath ordeyned +in euerye citie for the same purpose, the which are furnished with beds, +and all other necessaries belonging thereunto, for that the new married +people may be serued of all that is needful for the time that the feast +do indure. This solemnitie beeing finished, which they saye doth indure +fiftie dayes, these newe married people doo goe vnto their owne houses. +You must vnderstande that this custome of marriage is ordeyned for the +common and poore people, and not for lords nor gentlemen, who are not +bound to obey this ordinaunce, but to marrie whereas they like best, +euerie one to seeke and marrie with his equall, or else by an order +which the king hath set downe vnto the viceroys and gouernors, what to +be done therein. + +When that the King of China is married, then dooth he choose thirtie +concubines, the principallest persons in all his kingdome, the which hee +dooth keepe and maintayne within his pallace so long as hee doth liue. +But after that hee is dead, and his funerall ended, as is accustomed, +then doth the heire or successor of the kingdome apparell these thirtie +women maruelous gorgeously, with many iewelles; then doth hee cause them +to set in an estrado, or rich pallet, gallantly dressed and furnished, +in one of the three halles (as shall be declared in the second chapter +of the third booke), with their faces couered, in such sort as they may +not be seene nor knowen; and being set in this order, then doth there +enter in thirtie gentlemen of the principallest of the kingdome, (those +whom the king left named in his testament), the which goeth by +antiquitie, or according vnto order set by the king; and eyther of them +doth take one of these ladies by the hand, and looke howe they found +them, so they doo carrie them with their faces covered till they bring +them home to their houses, whereas they haue them for their wiues, and +do maintaine and keepe them all the dayes of their liues. Towards the +mainteyning of them, the king doth leaue in his testament great +reueneues, and the successor in the kingdome doth accomplish and +performe the same with great diligence and care. + +In old time, when that the kinges of China would marrie one of his +children or kingsfolkes, he did make in his pallace a great and solemne +banket, to the which he did inuite all the principallest lordes and +gentlemen of his court, commaunding to bring with them their sonnes and +daughters, who did accomplish the same, striuing who should apparell +their children most richest and most gallantest. The banket being done, +the young princes do go whereas are these young ladies, euerie one +placed in order according to their age, and there he doth chuse his wife +according to his owne will or desire, and where he liketh best. But at +this time, this custome is left off, for that the princes and gentlemen +do marry with their kinsfolkes, so that it be not in the first or +seconde degree: yet many times they do not keepe the second. + + + + +CHAP. X. + + _How that in all this mightie kingdome there is no poore folks + walking in the streets nor in the temples a begging, and the order + that the king hath giuen for the maintayning of them that cannot + worke._ + + + [Sidenote: A good order to avoid idle people.] + + [Sidenote: I would the like were with vs.] + + [Sidenote: A very good order.] + + [Sidenote: A mirror for vs to look vpon.] + +Manie things of great gouernment hath beene and shall be declared in +this historie worthy to be considered: and in my opinion, this is not +the least that is contained in this chapter, which is such order as the +king and his counsell hath giuen, that the poore may not go a begging in +the streetes, nor in the temples whereas they make orations vnto their +idols: for the auoiding therof the king hath set downe an order, vpon +great and greeuous penaltie to be executed vpon the saide poore, if they +do begge or craue in the streetes, and a greater penaltie vpon the +citizens or townes men, if they do giue vnto any such that beggeth; but +must incontinent go and complaine on them to the justice, who is one +that is called the justice of the poore, ordayned to punish such as doo +breake the lawe, and is one of the principallest of the citie or towne, +and hath no other charge but only this. And for that the townes be great +and many, and so full of people, and an infinite nomber of villages, +whereas it cannot be chosen but there is many borne lame, and other +misfortunes, so that he is not idle, but alwaies occupied in giuing +order to remedie the necessities of the poore without breaking of the +lawe. This iudge, the first day that hee doth enter into his office, hee +commandeth that whatsoeuer children be borne a creeple in any part of +his members, or by sicknes be taken lame, or by any other misfortune, +that incontinent their fathers or mothers doo giue the iudge to +vnderstande thereof, that he may prouide for all things necessarie, +according vnto the ordinance and will of the king and his counsell; the +which is, the man child or woman child, being brought before him, and +seene the default or lacke that it hath, if it be so that with the same +it may exercise any occupation, they giue and limit a time vnto the +parents, for to teach the child that occupation ordayned by the iudge, +and it is such as with their lamenes they may vse without any +impediment, the which is accomplished without faile; but if it so be, +that his lameness is such that it is impossible to learne or exercise +any occupation, this iudge of the poore doth command the father to +sustaine and maintaine him in his owne house all the dayes of his life, +if that hee hath wherewithall; if not, or that hee is fatherlesse, then +the next rich kinsman must maintaine it; if he hath none such, then doth +all his parents and kinsfolkes contribute and pay their partes, or giue +of such thinges as they haue in their houses. But if it hath no +parentes, or they be so poore that they cannot contribute nor supply any +part therof; then doth the king maintaine them in verie ample manner of +his owne costes in hospitalles, verie sumptuous, that he hath in euerie +citie throughout his kingdome for the same effect and purpose: in the +same hospitalles are likewise maintayned all such needie and olde men as +haue spent all their youth in the wars, and are not able to maintaine +themselues: so that to the one and the other is ministered all that is +needefull and necessarie, and that with great diligence and care: and +for the better accomplishing of the same, the iudge doth put verie good +order, and dooth appoint one of the principallest of the citie or towne, +to be the administrator, without whose licence, there is not one within +that hospitall that can goe foorth of the limittes: for that license is +not granted vnto anie, neyther doo they demand it, for that there they +are prouided of all thinges necessarie so long as they doo liue, as well +for apparell as for victualles. Besides all this, the olde folkes and +poore men within the hospitall, doo bring vpp hennes, chickens, and +hogges for their owne recreation and profit, wherein they doo delight +themselves. The iudge doth visite often times the administrator by him +appointed. Likewise the iudge is visited by an other that commeth from +the court, by the appointment of the king and the counsell to the same +effect: and to visite all such hospitalles as bee in the prouinces +limited in his commission, and if they doo finde any that hath not +executed his office in right and iustice, then they doo displace them, +and punish them verie rigorouslie: by reason whereof all such officers +haue great care of their charges and liue vprightly, hauing before their +eyes the straight account which they must giue, and the cruell rewarde +if to the contrarie. + +The blinde folkes in this countrie are not accounted in the number of +those that of necessitie are to bee maintayned by their kinsfolkes, or +by the king; for they are constrayned to worke; as to grind with a +querne[75] wheate or rice, or to blowe smythes bellowes, or such like +occupations, that they haue no neede of their sight. And if it be a +blind woman, when she commeth vnto age, she doth vse the office of women +of loue, of which sorte there are a great number in publike places, as +shall be declared in the chapter for that purpose. These haue women that +doo tende vpon them, and doo paint and trim them vp, and they are such +that with pure age did leaue that office. So by this order in all this +kingdome, although it be great, and the people infinite, yet there is no +poore that doo perish nor begge in the streetes, as was apparent vnto +the Austen and Barefoote fryers, and the rest that went with them into +that countrie. + + + + + THE THIRD BOOKE + AND + HISTORIE + OF THE + GREAT AND MIGHTIE KINGDOME OF CHINA, + + IN THE WHICH IS CONTAYNED MANY NOTABLE THINGS WOORTHIE + TO BE CONSIDERED OF, TOUCHING MORALL + AND POLLITIKE MATTERS. + + + + +CHAP. I. + + _How manie kinges hath beene in this kingdome, and their names._ + + + [Sidenote: Vitey, the first king of China.] + +In the fourth chapter of the first booke, I did promise particularly to +declare howe many kinges haue beene in this kingdome, and their names. +Nowe to accomplish the same, I will beginne and declare the succession +of them from Vitey (who was the first that did reduce the kingdome to +one empire gouernment) vnto him that dooth reigne at this daye, +remitting that which shall lacke vnto the chapter aforesaide: whereas +shall be found the number of the kinges, and how many yeares since the +first beginning of this kingdome, and the manner of the succession.[76] + + [Sidenote: Which is foure yeardes quarter and halfe.] + + [Sidenote: The first inuention of garments and dying of colours.] + +This Vitey was the first king of China (as it appeareth by their +histories, where as they doo make particular mention). But amongest +other thinges that they do declare of the kinges person, they do say +that he was in height so much as seuen measures, which is accustomed in +China; and euerie measure is two thirdes of a Spanish vare, which is by +good account foure vares[77] and two terses[78] in length: he was sixe +palmes broade in the shoulders, and was as valiant in his deedes as in +bignesse of his bodie: he had a captaine called Lincheon, who was not +onely valiant, but politike and of great wisedome, by reason whereof +with his valour and strength he did subiect vnto Vitey all the whole +countrie that he doth now possesse, and caused all people to feare him. +They do attribute that this Vitey did first inuent the vse of garmentes +for to weare, and by the dying of all manner of colours, of making of +shippes: hee likewise inuented the sawe to sawe tymber; but aboue all +thinges he was a great architector, and an inuenter of buildinges, +whereof hee made verie manie and verie sumptuous, which doo indure vnto +this day in the remembraunce of his name: he did also inuent the wheele +to turne silke, the which is vsed to this day in all the kingdome: hee +was the first that did use to weare golde, pearles, and precious stones +for iewelles, and to weare cloth of golde, siluer, and silke in +apparell: he did repart all the people of the countrie into cities, +townes, and villages, and did ordaine occupations, and commaunded that +no man should vse any other but that which his father did vse, without +his particular licence, or the gouerners of his kingdome. And that +should not be granted without great occasion for the same. + + [Sidenote: No woman to be idle.] + +All of one occupation were put in streetes by themselues, the which +order is vsed vnto this day throughout al the kingdome; so that if you +doo desire to know what occupation is in anye street, it is sufficient +to see the first house thereof, although it be very long: for it is +verie certaine that they be all of one occupation and not mingled with +any other. Amongst all other things he ordeyned one thing of great +consideration, that was, no woman to be idle, but to worke, either in +her husbands occupation, or in sowing or spinning. This was a law so +generall amongst them, that the queene her selfe did obserue and keepe +it. + + [Sidenote: A strange kind of hearb.] + +They saye that he was a great astrologician, and had growing in the +court of his pallace a certaine hearbe, the which did make a manner of +demonstration when that any did passe by it, whereby it did shewe if any +were euill intentioned against the king. Many other things they do +declare which I let passe, because I would not be tedious vnto the +reader, referring the dreames and fondnesse of these idolaters vnto the +iudgement of your discretion: for vnto the discreete is sufficient to +touch of euerie thing a little. He had foure wiues, and by them fiue and +twentie sonnes; he reyned a hundreth yeares: there was betwixt this king +and he which did build the great wall (that was spoken of in the ninth +chapter of the first booke) one hundred and sixteene kinges, all of the +lynage of this Vitey. All the which did raigne, as appeareth by their +histories, two thousand two hundreth and fiftie seuen yeares. I do not +here declare their names, because I would not be tedious, although they +be particularly named in their histories; but here I will set downe them +that I finde necessarie to be spoken of for the succession vnto him that +now reygneth. + +The last king of the lynage of this woorthie Vitey, was called Tzintzon: +this did make the mightie and great wall aforesaide. Finding himselfe to +be greatly troubled with the king of Tartarie, who did make warre vppon +him in many places of his kingdom, he did ordaine the making thereof, +and for the furnishing of the same, he did take the third man of the +countrie to the worke; and for that manie people did die in this tedious +worke, by reason they went so farre from their owne houses, and in +diuers climes cleane contrarie vnto that where as they were bred and +borne: it grew that the king was hated and abhorred of all people, in +such sort that they did conspire his death, which in effect they did +accomplish and slew him, after he had reigned fortie yeares: and also +his sonne and heyre, who was called Aguizi. After the death of this +Tzintzon and his sonne, they did ordaine for their king one that was +called Anchosan, a man of great valour and wisedome; hee reigned twelue +yeeres: a sonne of his did succeede him in the kingdom, called Futey, +and he reigned seuen yeares. After the death of this king, who died very +young, his wife did reigne and gouerne, and was of his owne lineage: she +did maruellously gouerne that kingdome for the space of 18 yeares, and +for that shee had no issue naturall of her bodie, a sonne of her +husbands yt he had by an other wife did succeede in the kingdome, and +reigned three and twentie yeares: a son of his did succeede him, called +Cuntey, and reigned 16 yeares and eight monthes: a son of his called +Guntey, did reigne 54 yeares: a sonne of his did succeede him called +Guntey, and reigned thirteene yeares: his sonne, called Ochantey, did +succeede him, and reigned 25 yeares and three monthes: his son, called +Coanty, succeeded him, and reigned 13 yeares and two monthes. After him +reigned his sonne Tzentzey 26 yeares and 4 monthes: then succeeded his +son called Anthrey, and reigned no more but 6 yeares; his sonne, +Pintatey, did inherite and reigned 5 yeares. This Pintatey when he died +was not married, and therefore a brother of his did succeede him, called +Tzintzuny, and reigned but 3 yeares and 7 monethes: after him succeeded +a younger brother called Huy Hannon, and reigned sixe yeares: his sonne, +called Cubun, did succeed him, and reigned 32 yeares: his sonne, +Bemthey, did inherite and reigned 18 yeares: after him his son, Vnthey, +and reigned 13 yeares: Othey succeeds him, and reigned 17 yeares; his +sonne, called Yanthey, reigned but 8 monethes, and left a sonne, called +Anthey, who reigned 19 yeares, whose eldest sonne, called Tantey, died +incontinent after his father, and reigned only 3 monthes, and his +brother, called Chyley, reigned one yeare; his son, called Linthey, +reigned 22 yeares; his sonne, called Yanthey, did succeede him, and +reigned 31 years. This Yanthey (the historie saieth) was a man of small +wisedome, which was the occasion that he was abhorred and hated of those +of his kingdome. A nephew of his, called Laupy, did rebell against him; +he had two sociates for to helpe him, gentlemen of the court; they were +two brethren and verie valiant, the one was called Quathy, the other +Tzunthey; these two did procure to make Laupy king. His vncle the king +vnderstoode thereof, and was of so litle valor and discretion, that he +could not, neither durst he put remedie in the same, which caused +commotions and common rumors amongst the people. But in especiall there +was foure tyrantes ioyned in one, and all at one time, they wer called, +Cincoan, Sosoc, Guansian, and Guanser. Against these Laupy did make +warre vnder colour to helpe his vncle, but after a while, that the warre +indured, he concluded and made peace with Cincoan, and he married with +one of his daughters, who straight wayes made warre against the other +three tyrants with the helpe of his father in lawe. + +At this time this mightie kingdome was diuided in three partes, and +beganne the tyrannie as you shall vnderstande: the one and principall +part fell vpon Laupy by the death of his vncle, the other to Sosoc, and +the other vnto Cincoan his father in law. In this sort remained the +kingdome in diuision a while, til such time as Cuthey, sonne vnto Laupy, +did reigne in his fathers steede. Then did there a tyrant rise vp +against him, called Chimbutey, and slew him: he by his great valour did +bring the kingdome all in one as before, after that it had bin in +diuision 41 yeares, and reigned after that alone 25 yeares: his sonne, +named Fontey, did succeede him, and reigned 17 yeares. And to make short +of this linage, there was 15 kinges, and reigned 176 yeares; against the +last of them, who was called Quioutey, there did arise against him +tyrannously Tzobu. Of this linage there was eyght kinges, who reigned 62 +yeares: against the last of them, called Sutey, there arose one called +Cotey, of whose lynage there was fine kings, and reigned twentie foure +yeres; the last of them, called Otey, was slaine by Dian. There was of +this lynage foure kings that reigned 56 yeres: against the last of them +rose vp Tym, and there was of this race fiue kinges, and reigned one and +thirty yeares: against the last of this house rose vp Tzuyn. And there +was of this linage three kings, and reigned seuen and thirtie yeares, +against the last of these rose vp Tonco. This and all the rest of his +lynage did gouerne maruelous well; which was the occasion that they +endured the longer time. There was of them one and twentie kinges, and +reigned 294 yeares; the last of them, called Troncon, did marrie with +one that had beene his fathers wife, called Bausa, a verie faire woman: +hee tooke her out of a monasterie, where she was a nunne, onely to +marrie with her: she vsed such policie that he was slaine, and did +gouerne the kingdome after, alone, one and fortie yeares. The historie +sayth that she was dishonest, and that with extremitie, and vsed the +companie of the best and principallest of the realme; and not content +with that, she married with one of base lynage, one fit for her purpose, +because she was so vicious. They say that before she did marrie, she +caused to be slaine the sonnes she had by her first husbande, for that +she had a desire that a nephew of hers should succeede her in the +kingdome. Then those of the kingdome perceiuing her intent, and wearie +of her by reason of her ill liuing, sent out to seeke a bastard sonne of +her husbandes, who was fledde away, and with a common consent they +raysed him for king. He was called Tautzon: he caused cruell and +rigorous iustice to be done vpon his stepmother, as was reason for her +euilles, and an example to all those of the kingdome, who by a president +of her ill liuing beganne to straggle: there was of his lynage seuen +kinges, that reigned 130 yeares: against the last, called Concham, arose +Dian; of this linage there were but two kinges, and reigned eighteene +yeares. Against the second and last arose Outon, and was of his linage +three kinges, and reigned but fifteene yeares: against the last there +arose Outzim; of this there was but two kinges, and reigned nine yeares +and three monethes; there arose against the last Tozo: he and his sonne +reigned foure yeares: with the sonne of this one Auchin did fight and +slewe him in the combat, and succeeded him in the kingdome: hee with +other two of his lynage reigned tenne yeares; against the last of these +arose vp one of the lynage of Vitey, the first king, and slewe him; hee +was called Zaytzon; there was of this lynage seuenteene kinges, and +reigned with all peace and quietnesse three hundred and twentie yeares: +the last of this lynage was called Tepyna, with whom did fight the gran +Tartaro called Vzon, who entred into China with a mightie armie, and got +all the kingdome; and it was possessed with nine Tartare kings, the +which reigned 93 yeares, and intreated the inhabitantes with great +tyrannie and seruitude: the last of these was called Tzintzoum; this was +more cruel vnto the Chinos then any of the rest, which was the occasion +that all the kingdome did ioyne together in one, and did elect a king, +called Gombu, a man of great valour and of the lynage of ancient kinges +past, who by his great woorthinesse and ioyning much people together, +did so much that hee did driue all the Tartaros out of the kingdome, +with the death of many thousands of them, who obstinately and without +iustice did with all tyrannie keepe that kingdome in possession: there +was of this lynage twelue kinges with this that now reigneth: the eleuen +kinges past reigned two hundreth yeares: he that now possesseth the +kingdome is called Boneg, who by the death of his elder brother that +died by a fall hee had from his horse, did inherite the kingdome: he is +of 21 yeares of age (as they saye) and hath his mother aliue, of whom, +as yet, there is nothing written: so that I can write nothing in +particular, but that they say he is a gallant gentleman, and welbeloued +of his subiects, and a great friende vnto iustice. He is married with a +cosen of his, and hath one sonne. + +Those of his linage hath got of the Tartares many countries since they +were driven out of China, the which are on the other side of the mightie +wall. God for His mercie's sake bring them to the knowledge of His holy +lawe, and accomplish a prophesie that they have amongst them, by the +which they are given to vnderstand that they shall be ruled and brought +in subiection by men with great eyes and long beards--a nation that +shall come from countries farre off, by whom they shalbe commanded, +which signifieth to be Christians. The king of this countrie is had in +so great reputation amongest his subiects, that in all the prouinces +where he is not resident, in the chiefe cities whereas are the vizroyes +or gouernors, they haue a table of gold, in the which is portred the +king that nowe reigneth, and couered with a curtin of cloth of gold, +verie riche, and thether goeth euery day the loytias, which are the +gentlemen, men of lawe, and ministers of justice, and do by dutie +reuerence vnto it, as though the kinge were personally present. This +table and picture is discouered the first day of their feasts which they +doo celebrate, and is at the newe moone of euery month, on the which day +all people do repaire and do reuerence vnto the picture with the same +respect as they would doo if he were present: they do call the king Lord +of the Worlde, and Sonne of Heaven. + + + + +CHAP. II. + + _Of the court and pallace of the king, and of the citie where as he + is resident; and how that in all the kingdome there is not one that + is lord over subiects by propertie._ + + + [Sidenote: A citie of a daies iourney long.] + + [Sidenote: Foure curious halles.] + +The habitation of this king, and almost of al his predecessors, hath bin +and is commonlie in the citie of Taybin or Suntien: the occasion is (as +they saye) for that it is neerest vnto the Tartarians, with whom +continually they have had wars, that they might the better put remedie +in any necessitie that shoulde happen, or, peraduenture, for that the +temperature or clime of that place is more healthfull than the other +prouinces, or the dwelling to be of more pleasure, as it is giuen to +vnderstand by that worde Suntien, which in their language is as much to +say the celestiall citie; it is of such bignesse that, for to crosse it +ouer from gate to gate, a man must traueile one whole day, and have a +good horse, and put good diligence, or else he shal come short: this is, +besides, the subburbes, which is as much more ground. Amongst the Chinos +is found no varietie in the declaration of this mightie city, and of the +great riches that is in it, which is a signe to be of a truth for that +they agree all in one. There is so much people in it, what of citizens +and courtiers, that it is affirmed that, vpon any vrgent occasion, there +may be ioyned together two hundreth thousand men, and the half of them +to bee horsemen. At the entring into this citie toward the orient, is +situated the mightie and sumptuous pallace of the king, where he +remaineth ordinarily, although hee hath other two: the one in the midst +of the citie, and the other at the end towards the west. This first +pallace they do testifie is of such huge bignesse, and so much +curiositie, that it is requisite to haue foure days at the least to view +and see it all. First it is compassed about with seuen walles, very +huge; and the space that is betwixt one wall and other doth contain ten +thousand souldiers, which doo watch and gard the king's house dayly: +there is within this pallace three score and nineteen halls, of a +marueilous rich and curious making, wherein there are many women that do +serve the king in the place of pages and squires; but the principallest +to be seen in this pallace is foure halles very rich, whereas the king +giveth audience vnto such ambassadours as come vnto him from other +kingdomes or prouinces, or vnto his owne people when they call any court +of parliament (which is very seldome), for that he is not seene by his +commons out of his owne house but by great chance, and yet when they doo +see him, for the most part it is by a glasse window. The first of these +hals is made al of mettal, very curiously wrought with manie figures: +and the seconde hath the seeling and the floore wrought in the order of +masons' worke, all of siluer of great value: the third is of fine golde, +wrought and inamiled verie curiously. The fourth is of so great riches, +that it much exceedeth all the other three: for that in it is +represented the power and riches of that mightie kingdome: and therefore +in their language they do cal it the hall of the king's treasure; and +they do affirme that it deserueth to haue that name--for that there is +in it the greatest treasure that any king hath in all the world, besides +many iewels of an inestimable price, and a chaire (wherein he dooth sit) +of great maiesty, made of iuory, set full of precious stones and +carbuncles, of a great price, that in the darkest time of the night the +hall is of so great clearenesse as though there were in it many torches +or lights: the wals are set full of stones of diuers sorts, verie rich +and of great vertue, wrought verie curiously: and to declare it in fewe +words, it is the richest and principalst thing to be seene in all the +kingdome, for therein is the principallest thereof. + + [Sidenote: Punished for taking bribes.] + +In these foure halles are heard such ambassadours as are sent from other +countries, according vnto the estate and qualitie of the king and +prouinces from whence they come: so that according as they are esteemed, +so are they entertained into one of these foure hals. If that from +whence they come is from a king of small power, he hath audience in the +first hall: if he be of a reasonable power, in the second hal, and in +this order in the rest. Within this mightie pallace, the king hath all +that any humane vnderstanding can desire or aske (touching this life), +in pleasure for to recreate his person, and for their queene: for that +neuer (or by great chance) they go foorth of the same: and it hath beene +a customable vse amongst the kings of that countrie, that it is as a +thing inherited by succession never to go forth. They say, their reason +why they doo keepe themselues so close and not to go abroade, is to +conserue the mightie estate of their estade,[79] and also to auoide for +being slaine by treason (as many times it falleth so out); for which +occasion you haue had kings, that in all the time of their reigne haue +not gone out of their pallace but onely the day of their oath and +crownation: and besides this their close keeping, yet haue they tenne +thousande men continually (as aforesaide) in garde of the pallace both +day and night, besides others that are in the courtes, staires and +halles, and other places. Within the gates and wals of this mightie +pallace they haue gardines, orchards, woodes, and groues, whereas is all +manner of hunt, and foule, and great pondes full of fish. And, to +conclude, they haue all manner of pleasures and delites, that may be +inuented or had in any banketting house in the fielde. In all this +kingdome there is not one that is lorde ouer any subiect or vassales (as +they of Turkie), neither haue they any iurisdiction proper, but that +which is his patrimonie and moueables, or that which the king doth giue +them in recompence of good seruice or gouernment, or for any other +particular respect: all the which dooth end with the person, and is +returned againe vnto the king, except he will giue it vnto the sonne of +him that is dead, in curtesie more then by obligation or duetie: giuing +to vnderstande that it is to auoyd inconueniences and occasions of +treasons, which might grow if that there were any lords that were rich +or of power, and not for couetousnes or any other intent. Those whom he +dooth put in authoritie, whether they are vizroyes, gouernours, or +captaine generals, or whatsoeuer they be, hee giueth vnto them large +wages, sufficient to sustaine them in their office, in so ample sort, +that it is rather ouerplus vnto them then lacke; for that he will not +that their necessitie compell them to take presents or bribes, which +thing doth blinde them, that they cannot do iustice vprightly: and vnto +him that doth receiue or take any such (although it be but of smal +prise) he is cruelly punished. + + + + +CHAP. III. + + _The number of such subiects as doo pay vnto the king tribute in + all these fifteene prouinces._ + + +Vnderstanding the greatnesse of this kingdome of China, and the infinite +number of people that is therein, it is an easie thing to bee beleeued, +the number that euery prouince hath of such as do pay tribute, as is +taken out of the booke that the officers haue, whereby they do recouer +that tribute: and it is affirmed, that there are as many more, such as +are free and do pay no tribute. The loytians and ministers of iustice, +all sorts of soldiers, both by sea and land (which is an infinite +number), are free and do pay nothing; the number as followeth. + +The prouince of Paguia[80] hath two millions seuen hundred and foure +thousand that doth pay tribute to the king. + +The prouince of Santon, 3 millions and 700 thousand tributers. + +The prouince of Foquien, two millions foure hundred and seuen thousand +tributers. + +The prouince of Olam, two millions two hundred and foure thousand +tributers. + +The prouince of Sinsay, three millions three hundred and foure score +thousand. + +The prouince of Susuan, two millions and fiftie thousand. + +The prouince of Tolanchia, there where as the king is resident, and is +the biggest of them al, sixe millions fourescore and ten thousand. + +The prouince of Cansay, two millions three hundred and fiue thousand. + +The prouince of Oquiam, three millions and eight hundred thousand. + +The prouince of Ancheo, two millions eight hundred and foure thousand. + +The prouince of Gonan, one million and two hundred thousand. + +The prouince of Xanton, one million nine hundred fortie and foure +thousand. + +The prouince of Quicheu, two millions thirtie and foure thousand. + +The prouince of Chequeam, two millions two hundred and fortie foure +thousand. + +The prouince of Sancii, which is the least of all the prouinces, hath +one million sixe hundred threescore and twelue thousand tributers. + +By this account it is found, that the tribute payers are verie many: and +it is approoued in manie places of this historie whereas they do treate +of the greatnes of this kingdome, that it is the mightiest and biggest +that is to bee read of in all the world. God, for His mercies sake, +bring them to the knowledge of His lawe, and take them out from the +tyrannie of the diuell, wherein they are wrapped. + + + + +CHAP. IV. + + _The tribute that the king hath in these fifteene prouinces, + according vnto the truest relation._ + + +Although this kingdome is great and very rich, yet there is none that +doth pay so little tribute ordinarily vnto their king as they do, +neither amongst Christians, Moores, nor Gentiles, that we know. The +extraordinary and personall seruice is very much, that in some respect +wee may say that they are more slaues than free men, for that they do +not possesse one foote of land; but they pay tribute in respect whereof, +as also for the great misusing of them by their gouernours, will bee a +great part and occasion to inuite them to receiue the lawe of the +gospell, and that with great facilitie to inioy the libertie of the +same. + +The ordinarie tribute that euery one dooth pay that dooth keepe house, +is two Mases[81] euery yeare, which is as much as two Spanish rials of +plate. This tribute is verie little, yet the Loytians (which is a great +part of the kingdome) do pay none, neither their gouernours nor +ministers, captaines nor souldiours: the multitude of the people is so +great, and the kingdome so bigge, that alonely that which they giue for +expences of the king and his court is woonderfull, with customes, +dueties, portages, and other rents: not accounting that which is paide +vnto garisons and souldiers of that kingdome, neither in that which is +spent in repairing of walles of particular cities, and in men of warre +at sea, and campes by land, to gouernoures and iustices, which doth not +enter into this account. + + [Sidenote: The rent of the king.] + +The rent which remaineth vnto the king ordinarily is this that +followeth, and is taken with great regard out of the booke of his +excheker. Yet the Chinos do say that it is much lesse then that they do +pay at this time; for that this is of old antiquitie, when as the +tributes were lesse: the tributes as followeth. + + [Sidenote: Pure gold.] + +Of pure golde, from seuenteene to two and twentie killates,[82] they +giue him foure millions, and two hundred fiftie sixe thousand and nine +hundred Taes:[83] euerie one is worth ten rials and foure and twentie +marauadies Spanish mony. + + [Sidenote: Fine siluer.] + +Of fine siluer, three millions one hundred fiftie three thousand two +hundred and nineteene Taes. + + [Sidenote: Pearles.] + +The mines of pearles, whereof you haue many in this kingdome (although +they are not verie round), is woorth vnto him commonly two millions sixe +hundred and thirtie thousand Taes. + + [Sidenote: Precious stones.] + +Of precious stones of all sorts, as they come from the mines, one +million foure hundred three score and ten thousand Taes. + + [Sidenote: Muske and amber.] + +Of muske and amber, one million and thirtie fiue thousande Taes. + +Of earthen dishes and vessell, fourscore thousand Taes. Besides all +this, the king doth put forth verie much ground to his subiects, and +they do pay him with part of the croppe that they gather, or with the +cattle that they bring vp on ye same grounde. + + [Sidenote: Rice.] + +The quantitie that they pay him is as followeth. Of cleane rice (which +is a common victuall throughout all the kingdome, and of the countries +adioyning to them) they pay him three score millions, one hundred three +score and eleuen thousand, eight hundred thirtie and two hanegges. + + [Sidenote: Barley] + +Of barley, twentie nine millions, three hundred foure score and eleuen +thousand, nine hundred fourescore and two hanegges. + + [Sidenote: Wheate.] + +Of wheat like vnto that in Spaine, thirtie three millions, one hundred +twentie thousand and two hundred hanegges. + + [Sidenote: Salt.] + +Of salt, twentie fiue millions three hundred and fortie thousand foure +hundred hanegges, which is made in his owne salt pits, and is of a great +rent. + + [Sidenote: Mayz.] + +Of wheat called Mayz, twentie millions two hundred and fiftie thousand +hanegs. + + [Sidenote: Millo.] + +Of millio,[84] twentie foure millions of hanegges. + + [Sidenote: Panizo.] + +Of Panizo,[85] fourteene millions and two hundred thousande hanegges. + + [Sidenote: Other graine.] + +Of other different graine and seeds, fortie millions and two thousand +hanegges. + + [Sidenote: Peeces of silk.] + +They doo pay him in peeces of silke, of fourteene vares long the peece, +two hundred fiue thousand and fiue hundred ninetie peeces. + + [Sidenote: Raw silke.] + + [Sidenote: Cotton wool.] + +Of raw silke in bundles, fiue hundred and fortie thousande pounds. Of +cotton wool, three hundred thousand pounds. + + [Sidenote: Mantels.] + +Of mantles wrought of all colours, eight hundred thousand and foure +hundred mantles. Of Chimantas[86] made of rawe silke, that waieth twelue +pound a peece, three hundred thousand sixe hundred and eightie of them. +Of mantles made of cotton of fourty vares, sixe hundred seuenty eight +thousand, eight hundred and seuentie. Of Chimantas of cotton, three +hundred foure thousand sixe hundred forty and eight. All this aforesaide +is for expenses of the court, which is great. The Chinos yt come vnto +the Philippinas do affirme the same, and do not differ in the report, +which is a signe to be true: likewise they do receiue of it in his +tresurie, whereas is many millions, and cannot be otherwise, considering +his great rentes. + + + + +CHAP. V. + + _Of the men of war that are in the fifteene prouinces, as wel + footmen as horsemen, and of the great care they haue in the gard of + the kingdome._ + + + [Sidenote: Great care for to defend their countrie.] + +Looke what care and diligence this mightie king hath, that iustice +should be ministred with right and equitie: so likewise (yea and much +more) he hath touching matters that may preuent wars, which be offered +by princes adiacent vnto him, or any other whatsoeuer. But in especiall +with the Tartarians, with whom they haue had continuall wars many years. +(Although at this day) that the Tartarians doo feare him very much: in +such sort as he thinketh it best to keepe him for his friende, and doth +acknowledge vnto him a certain manner of vassalage. And although at this +present and long time since, he hath bin and is without any occasion of +wars, that should come vpon a sodain; yet hath he had manie and grieuous +enimies to defend himselfe from, or to offend them, as you shall +perceiue in this that followeth. For besides that he hath in euery +prouince his president and counsell of war, captaine generall, and +others ordinarie to take vp people, and ordaine their campes and +squadrons as well by sea as by land, to serue at all assaies when that +occasion shall serue; so likewise he hath in euery city captaines and +souldiers for their particular garde and defence, and doo range and +watch to set their garde in order both day and night, as though their +enimies were at the gates. This military order they do vse and +maintaine, in such sort that no nation knowne may be compared vnto them. +Although, speaking generally, (according vnto the relation of certaine +Spanish souldiers that were there, and did manie times see them) there +be other nations that do exceed them both in valiantnesse, courage, and +worthinesse of mind. + +They haue at the gates of all their cities their squadrons, who let[87] +the entrie and going out of any whatsoeuer, except he haue licence of +the iustice of that citie or towne, brought them in writing: the which +gates they do shut and open by order and licence of their captaines, +which is sent vnto them euery day, written in whited tables, and their +sine vnto it. These gates are the force of all the cittie, and thereon +is planted all the artilerie they haue; nigh vnto the which gate, is +ordinarily the house whereas they are founded or made. At night, when +they do shut their gates, they do glew papers vpon the ioinings of them: +then they doo seale the papers, with the seale that the gouernour or +iudge of that cittie doth weare on his finger, the which is done by +himselfe, or by some other in whom he hath great confidence and trust: +and they cannot open them againe in the morning vntill such time as it +bee seene and acknowledged that it hath not been touched since the night +that it was put on. So that if any haue any iourney to ride very early +in the morning, he must go forth of the citie ouer night, before the +gates be shut, and remaine in the suburbs: for out of the cittie it is +not possible to goe vntill the gates be open, which is not till the +sunne be vp ordinarily. + +They do not vse any castles nor forts, but great bulwarkes and gun +bankes, whereas they haue continuall watch, and doo change by quarters +according as wee do vse: and the officers with a great number of +souldiers do range throughout the city, and bulworkes: and commonly the +captaines be naturall of those prouinces, whereas they haue their charge +giuen them in consideration that the loue they haue to their countrie, +doo binde them to fight to the death for the defence thereof. And for +that there should be more quietnesse and rest in the cities, it is not +permitted that any do weare weapons, defensiues, nor offensiues, but +onely such souldiers as haue the kings pay: neither do they consent they +should haue them in their houses, neither vse any in trauaile by sea nor +lande. Besides all this, the king hath in the citie of Taybin and +Suntiem (whereas hee is resident), and in such cities lying there about, +a great number both of horsemen and footemen, alwaies in a readinesse +for to go with him into any place, for the safegarde of his person in +time of necessitie. + + [Sidenote: Uerie ill horsemen.] + +The souldiers of his kingdome are in two sortes and manners, the one +sort are such as bee and are naturals of the citie whereas they haue +their charge, and these be called in their language Cum: in this place +the sonne doth succeed the father, and for lacke of an heire, the king +doth prouide one in the dead man's place. Euery one of them hath his +name written vpon the post of his doore, and the place appointed whither +he shal go when occasion shall serue (enemies being against that cittie +or towne). The other sort of souldiers are strangers, and are consorted +for yeares or monethes to serue. These be they that ordinarily make +their watches, musters, and ioyne companies for the receit of the +captaines: these be called in their language Pon.[88] These goe from one +place vnto another, whereas they are commanded to go. One captaine and +ancient hath charge of a thousand, and a meaner captaine with his +ancient a hundreth, that doo depend vpon the other. So that for to knowe +the number of people that is in a great campe, it is done with great +ease in accounting the ensignes of a thousand men, which are easily +knowne. Euery chiefe or petie captaine of these, hath his house vpon the +cittie wal, and his name put on it, and there he dwelleth so long as the +warres indureth. These captaines euery moneth do exercise their +souldiers in marching and putting them in order: sometime with quick +speed, and other times more slower, and to giue assalt and retyre as +they are taught by the sound of the drum: this they do vse continually +in the time of peace, as well as in the time of warre: also how to vse +their weapons, which are ordinarie, hargabuses, pikes, targets, +faunchers,[89] brushebilles,[90] holbards, dagars, and armour. The +horsemen do vse in the warres to carrie foure swords hanging at their +saddell bowes, and doo fight with two at once, with great dexteritie and +gallant to behold. These do accustome to go into the wars accompanied +with many seruants, and familiar friends on foote, all wel armed after +the gallantest manner that possibly they may. These footemen be +marueillous full of policie, and ingenious in warlike or martiall +affaires: and although they haue some valor for to assalt and abide the +enemie, yet doo they profite themselues of policies, deuises and +instruments of fire, and of fire workes. Thus do they vse as wel by land +in their wars as by sea, many bomes[91] of fire, full of old iron, and +arrowes made with powder and fire worke, with the which they doo much +harm and destroy their enimies. The horsemen do fight with bowes and +arrowes, and lances, and with two swordes (as I haue saide before), and +some with hargabuses. They cannot gouerne their horses very wel, for +that they haue but one peece of iron that is crosse in their mouthes +that serueth for a bridle; and for to make them stay, they pull but one +raine, and with clapping their hands together and making of a noise +before them. They haue very ill saddels, so that they be al verie ill +horsemen. The like prouision hath the king for the sea: hee hath great +fleetes of ships, furnished with captaines and men, that doo scoure and +defend the costs of the countrie with great diligence and watchings. The +souldiers, as well by land as by sea, are paid with great liberalitie, +and those that do aduantage themselues in valor, are very much esteemed, +and haue great preferment and rewards. When these Chinos doo take anie +prisoner in the wars, they doo not kill him, nor giue him more +punishment, but to serue as a souldier in that countrie in the farthest +parts from their naturall, the king paying him his wages as other +souldiers are paid. These for that they may be knowne doo weare redde +bonnets, but in their other apparell they do differ nothing from the +Chinos. Likewise such as be condemned by iustice for criminall offences, +to serue in any frontier (as is vsed much amongst them), they also weare +redde caps or bonnets: and so it is declared in their sentence, that +they do condemme them to the red bonnet. + + + + +CHAP. VI. + + _More of the men of war which are in al these fifteene prouinces, + and how many there be in euery one of them, as well horsemen as + footemen._ + + +In the chapter past you do vnderstande what care these Chinos haue in +the time of peace as well as in warre for to defend their citties, and +what preparations they haue generrally throughout al the countrie. Now +lacketh to let you know particularly the number that euery prouince hath +in it selfe, the better to vnderstand the mightinesse therof. They haue +in euerie prouince in their chiefe or metropolitan citie, a counsell of +warre, with a president and foure counsailers; all the which are such as +haue bin brought vp from their youth in the wars, with experience of the +vse of armour and weapon: so that vnto them is giuen the charge for the +defence of their prouince. + +These counsellors doo ordaine captaines, and prouide other officers and +all necessaries for the warres, and send them vnto such cities and +townes whereas they see it is needfull. And for that in the +accomplishing thereof there shalbe no lacke, the treasurer is commanded +to deliuer vnto them whatsoeuer they do aske without any delay. + + [Sidenote: The number of souldiers in all China.] + +The number of the souldiers that euery prouince had in the yeare 1577, +at such time as frier Martin de Herrada and his companie entered into +China (hauing no wars, but great peace and quietnesse), is as followeth. + +The prouince of Paguia, whereas ordinarily the king is resident, hath +two millions and one hundred and fiftie thousand footemen, and foure +hundred thousand horsemen. + +The prouince of Santon hath one hundred and twenty thousand footemen, +and fortie thousand horsemen. + +The prouince of Foquien hath eight and fiftie thousande and nine hundred +footemen, and twentie two thousand foure hundred horsemen. + +The prouince of Olam hath three score and sixteene thousand footemen, +and twentie fiue thousande fiue hundred horsemen. + +The prouince of Cinsay hath eightie thousand three hundred footemen, but +of horsemen verie few or none; for that this prouince and the other that +followe, are all mountaines, and ful of rockes and stones. + +The prouince of Oquiam hath twentie thousand and sixe hundred footemen, +and no horsemen, for the reason aforesaide. + +The prouince of Susuan foure score and sixe thousande footemen, and +foure and thirtie thousande and fiue hundred horsemen. + +The prouince of Tolanchia, which is that which doth border vpon the +Tartarians, with whom the kings of China haue had wars (as aforesaid), +hath two millions and eight hundred thousand footemen, and two hundred +and ninety thousand horsemen, and are the most famous and best in all +the whole kingdome: for that they are brought vp in the use of armour +from their youth, and many times exercised the same in times past, when +they had their ordinary war with their borderers the Tartarians. + +The prouince of Cansey hath fiftie thousand footemen, and twentie +thousand two hundred and fiftie horsemen. + +The prouince of Ancheo (there whereas the friers were) hath foure score +and sixe thousand footemen, and fortie eight thousand horsemen. + +The prouince of Gonan, fortie foure thousand footemen, and fourteene +thousand fiue hundred horsemen. + +The prouince of Xanton hath fiftie two thousand footemen, and eighteene +thousand nine hundred horsemen. + +The prouince of Quincheu, hath fortie eight thousand and seuen hundred +footemen, and fifteene thousande three hundred horsemen. + +The prouince of Chequeam, thirty foure thousand footmen, and thirteene +thousand horsemen. + +The prouince of Sancii, which is least of them all, hath forty thousand +footemen, and sixe thousand horsemen. + + [Sidenote: The souldier is royall paid.] + + [Sidenote: The number of footemen and horsemen.] + +All these people aforesaid, euery prouince is bound (by an order set +downe in parlement) to haue in a redinesse, the which is an easie thing +to be done; the one is for that the king doth pay them roiallie, the +other for that they do dwel in their owne natural countries and houses, +wheras they do injoy their patrimonies and goods: leauing it vnto their +sonnes. In the time of wars, they are bound to assist the place that +hath most necessitie. By this account it plainely appeareth that all +these prouinces (which may better be called kingdomes, considering their +greatnes) haue fiue millions and eight hundred fourtie sixe thousand and +fiue hundred footemen, and nine hundred fortie eight thousand three +hundred and fiftie horsemen. All the which, if in valor and valientnes +might be equalled vnto our nations in Europe, they were sufficient to +conquer ye whole world. And although they are more in number and equal +in policies, yet in their valientnesse and courage they are far behind. +Their horse for the most part are little, but great traueilers: yet they +say, within the countrie there are verie great and excellent good horse. +I do not here declare the industrie that might (with the fauour of God) +be vsed to win and ouercome this people, for that the place serueth not +for it; and I haue giuen large notice thereof, vnto whom I am bound. And +againe, my profession is more to bee a meanes vnto peace, then to +procure any warres; and if that which is my desire might be doone, it +is, that with the word of God, which is the sworde that cutteth the +hearts of men, wherewith I hope in the Lorde to see it. + + + + +CHAP. VII. + + _Of a law amongst the Chinos, that they cannot make anie wars out + of their owne countrie, neither go forth of the same, neither can + any stranger come in without licence of the king._ + + + [Sidenote: They haue no neede of other nations.] + + [Sidenote: Straight lawes.] + +Although in many things that haue bin seene in this kingdome is shewed +and declared the sharpe and ripe witts of these men, and with what +wisedome and prudence they doo most manifest the same (in my iudgment) +is in that which shalbe declared in this chapter. They without all doubt +seeme to exceede the Greekes, Carthagenians, and Romanes, of whom the +old ancient histories haue signified to vs, and also of those later +times; who for to conquere strange countries did separate themselues so +farre from their natural, that they lost their owne countries at home. +But these of this kingdome being forewarned (as ye prouerbe saith:) +Felix quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum. By the hurt of another, etc., +they haue found by experience yt to go forth of their owne kingdome to +conquer others, is the spoile and losse of much people, and expences of +great treasures, besides the trauaile and care which continually they +haue to sustaine that which is got, with feare to be lost againe: so +that in the meane time whilest they were occupied in strange conquests, +their enimies, the Tartarians and other kings borderers vnto them, did +trouble and inuade them, doing great damage and harme. And more, +considering that they do possesse one of the greatest and best kingdomes +of the world, as well for riches as for fertility, by reason whereof, +and by the great aboundance of things that the country doth yeeld, many +strange nations do profite themselues from them, and they haue need of +none other nation, for that they haue sufficient of all things +necessarie to the mainteining of humane life. In consideration whereof +they called a generall court of Parliament, whether came all vizroyes +and gouernours and other principall men of all the fifteene prouinces: +and there they did communicate, to put remedy in this great +inconuenience in the best manner possible. Then after they had wel +considered of the same with great care and diligence, taking the +iudgment particular of euery one, and in generall by common consent, +they found it requisit for their quietnes and profite, and a thing most +conuenient for the common wealth to leaue al yt they had got and gained +out of their owne kingdome, but specially such countries as were farre +off. And from that day forwards not to make any wars in any place: for +that from thence did proceed a known damage and a doubtfull profite: and +being altogether conformable, they did request the king that was at that +present that he would cal home al such people as he had in other +kingdomes bordering there about vnder his obedience, perswading him that +in so doing, he should remaine a mightie prince, more richer, more in +quiet and in more securitie. Then the king perceiuing the request and +petition of his kingdome and subiects, and being fully satisfied that +this perswasion was requisite to be put in execution: he straight wayes +set it a worke, and commanded vpon great penalties, that al his subiects +and vassals naturall that were in any strange countries, that in a time +limited, they should returne home to their owne country and houses: and +likewise to the gouernours of the same countries, that they should in +his name abandon and leaue the dominion and possession that he had of +them: excepting such as would of their owne good will acknowledge +vassalage, and giue him tribute, and remaine friends, as vnto this day +the Lechios[92] and other nations do. This law was then established and +is inuiolablie kept to this day: in the which it is first commanded that +none whatsoeuer, vpon paine of death, shall make or begin warre in any +part without his licence. Also on the said penaltie, that no subiect of +his shall nauigate by sea out of the kingdome without the said licence. +Also that whatsoeuer will go from one prouince to another within the +said kingdome, to traficke in buying and selling, shall giue sureties to +returne againe in a certaine time limited, vpon paine to bee +disnaturalled of the countrie. Likewise that no stranger whatsoeuer +shall come in by sea nor by land, without his express licence, or of the +gouernours of such ports or places whereas they shall come or ariue. And +this licence must be giuen with great consideration, aduising the king +therof. All which lawes haue beene the occasion that this mightie +kingdome hath not come to notice and knowledge but of late yeares. All +the which that is said, seemeth to be true, for that it is cleerely +found in their histories and books of nauigations of old antiquitie: +whereas it is plainely seene that they did come with the shipping vnto +the Indies, hauing conquered al that is from China, vnto the farthest +part thereof. Of all the which they indured possessors in great +quietnes, till such time as they ordeined the law of abandoning of their +owne good will, as aforesaid. So that at this day there is great memory +of them in the Ilands Philippinas and on the cost of Coromande, which is +the cost against the kingdome of Norsinga[93] towards the Sea of +Cengala;[94] whereas is a towne called vnto this day the soile of the +Chinos, for that they did reedifie and make the same. The like notice +and memory is there in the kingdom of Calicut, wheras be many trees and +fruits, that the naturals of that countrie do say, were brought thither +by the Chinos, when that they were lords and gouernours of that +countrie. Likewise in those dayes they were of Malaca, Siam, and +Chapaa,[95] and other of their borderers. Also it is to be beleeued of +ye Ilands of Iapon, for that there are many token unto the Chinos unto +this day, and the naturals of the country are much after the fashion of +the Chinos, and many particular things that do giue vs to vnderstand: +and some lawes that are obserued and kept in China. But now in these +dayes the gouernors of the sea ports do dispence with the law that +forbiddeth ye going out of the kingdome, by certaine gifts which is +giuen them by merchants to giue them secret licence, that they may go +and trafficke in ilands bordering there about, as vnto the Philippinas, +whither come euery yeare many ships laden with merchandise of great +riches, of the which is brought many times into Spaine. Likewise they do +trauaile vnto other parts and places, wheras they vnderstand they may +profite themselues. Yet they do not giue any such licence vntill they +haue giuen sureties to returne within one whole yeare. + +The desire of gain hath caused them to traueile to Mexico, whither came +the yeare past in anno 1585 three merchants of China, with verie curious +things, and neuer staied till they came into Spaine and into other +kingdomes further off. Likewise the said iudge and gouernours doo giue +licence vnto strangers (in the order aforesaid) for to enter into their +ports to buy and sel, but first vpon examination and charge, that they +should haue a great care not to demand any licence but to the same +intent. Then haue they their licence with a time limited, and with +condition that they shall not procure to goe about their cities, neither +to see the secrets thereof. And this is giuen in writing vpon a whited +table, which is set vpon the fore partes of their ships, that when they +come to an anker in any port it may be seene of the keepers and guards +that they sinke them not, but let them peaceably to enter and to +trafficke in buying and selling, paying their ordinarie customes due +vnto the king. + +In euery port there is a scriuener or notarie, put there by the +gouerners, that dooth set downe in memorie the day and houre that any +shippe doth enter in, in order that, whether hee be a stranger or +natural, to take in his lading and dispatch, according vnto the old +custome of those ports, the which is inuiolably kept; which is the +occasion that they do lade and dispatch in so short a time, and with so +great quietnesse, as though there were but one shippe, although many +times you shall see in one port two thousande ships small and great. In +this sort, with a bought licence, did the Portugals traficke from the +Indies in Canton, a prouince of this kingdome, and in other parts of +that kingdome, as they themselues haue declared, and likewise the +Chinos. + + + + +CHAP. VIII. + + _Of the kings royall counsell, and the order they haue to know + euerie moneth what dooth passe in all the kingdome._ + + +The king hath in the citie of Tabin,[96] whereas he is resident, a +royall counsell of twelue counsellers, and a president, chosen men +throughout al the kingdome, and such as haue had experience in +gouernement many yeares. + +For to be one of the counsell, it is the highest and supremest dignitie +that a man can come vnto; for that (as aforesaid) in all this kingdome +there is neither prince, duke, marquesse, earle, nor lord, that hath any +subiectes, but the king only, and the prince his sonne. These +counsellers, and the gouernors of these prouinces by them appointed, bee +such personages, that they are respected and esteemed for the time of +their continuance in the same estimation, as is the other, where as they +haue these titles. + + [Sidenote: Councillors must be expert in sciences.] + +For to be one of this counsell, it is not sufficient that they be expert +and learned in the lawes of the countrie, and in morall and naturall +philosophie, and commenced in the same, but they must be also expert in +astrologie and iudgements. For they say, he that must be of this supreme +counsell, by whome is gouerned all these fifteene prouinces: it is +requisite that they know all this that is saide, for to prognosticate +what shall succeede and happen, the better to prouide for all +necessities that shall come. These twelue doo sit in counsell ordinarily +in the kinges pallace, for the which there is a hall appointed, +maruellous richly trimmed: and in the same thirteene chayres, sixe of +them of golde, and sixe of siluer: both the one and the other of great +price, wrought with great curiositie: yet the thirteenth is more richer, +for that it is of golde and set full of precious stones of great value, +and that is placed in the middest of them vnder a canopie or cloth of +estate, of cloth of gold: in the which is imbrodered the kinges armes, +and is as it is saide, certaine serpentes, wrought with golde wyer: in +this chayre the president doth sitte when the king is not in presence: +but if hee be there (as seeldome he is) then doth the president sit in +the first and highest of the chaires on the right hand, which be of +gold: in the which, and in the other of siluer, they bee placed +according vnto their antiquitie: in this sort, that if the president do +die, then do the most auncient proceede and inherite his roome, and in +his chaire doth the fift person rise on the side of the golden chaires: +and so from the fourth vnto the fift: and in this order all the rest +arise in the chaires of siluer, passing into the other chaires of golde. +This may the president doo, preferring euerie one in order (if any doo +die) without the consent of the king. And if any of these chaires be +voyd, then doth the counsell choose an other by voices: the which is +done by vprightnes, and he which hath the most is preferred; but the +chiefest in this preferment is merit and sufficiencie. If he that is +chosen be absent in any gouernment, then doo they send for him; but if +hee be present in the citie, then doo they carrie him before the king, +giuing him to vnderstand of their election, in whose power it is to +accept or to make it voyde, which neuer doth happen. Then the king +himselfe on his owne handes, according vnto their custome, doth make him +sweare a solemne oth that he shall doo vpright iustice according vnto +the lawes of the countrie, and that he shall likewise doo vprightly in +the choosing of viceroyes and gouernours or any other iustices, and not +be led with affections nor passions, neyther receiue anie bribes himself +nor any other for him: with many other things in this order and effect: +and aboue all thinges hee shall not bee partaker, neyther consent to +anye treason at anie time against the king: but rather if that hee doo +vnderstande of anie such, directly or indirectly, he shall straight +wayes giue the kinge to vnderstande thereof, or his counsell, of all +that he dooth knowe or vnderstande, alwaye favouring with his industrie +and force the preseruation of peace and life of the king. + +This oth of homage being doone, they doo carrie him vnto the chaire +which is on the left hande in the hall, and doo giue him the possession +with great solemnitie; for the which, certaine dayes after there is +great feastes in the citie, as well by them of the counsell as by the +citizens and courtiers: during the which time, the marchants do leaue +their contractions and trafickes, and handicraft men their occupations. + +If any occasion bee requisite to talke with the king, there is none that +speaketh with him but the president, and if it so fall out that hee be +sicke, then the most auncient and vppermost in the golden chayres dooth +talke with him at all times when neede requireth; but when hee talketh +with him hee is on his knees, and his eyes inclyned to the grounde, and +neuer mooueth although the talke endureth two houres. He is paide with +the same money that all viceroyes, gouernours, iustices, and captaines +of the kingdome are: when they will talke with the president, it is in +the self same order. + +In this royall counsell euerie moneth they doo knowe all thinges that +doo happen in all the kingdome woorthie to bee aduised of, and this is +without falt; for that those which doo gouerne the prouinces haue +expresse commandement to sende notice vnto the court of all thinges that +doo happen in anye of their prouinces touching warres, the estate of the +countrie, the kinges rents, or any other thing: the which is +accomplished with so great care, that although it bee a prouince distant +fiue hundred leagues from the court, yet the post doth not misse his day +appointed. And those which do first come, do tarrie till the last or +furthest off doo come, and then vpon the day appointed they do all +together giue their relations. Those which are farre off for to be at +the court so soone and at the instant as those which are nigh at hand, +doo send postes daily, that the one may ouertake the other. They do run +post after the vse of Italy and Spain with a horne, but they were woont +to haue a coller of belles, the better to be heard: so yt the +postmasters when they do heare the horne or bels, do straight waies +bridle their horse to be in a readines. Likewise, if their iourney be to +passe by water (as many times it hapneth), then ye boat-men do make +their barks readie. + +Then when the counsell hath taken relation of all the posts in effect, +the president incontinent doth giue a straight account thereof vnto the +king: then hee, or the counsell by his order (if anie such neede +requireth), do put remedie for that that is needfull for the time. And +if it be requisite to send any iustice about the same, he is straight +wayes appointed, and dispatched and sent in all haste and with great +secrecie: and this iustice doth make inquiries in such sort that it is +not knowen, no not in the citie where the fault is committed. + +And for that, touching this matter, it shall bee spoken of more at large +in chapters following, I will conclude with this: that this king will +haue such dominion ouer his kingdome and subiectes, that although it be +great with so manie prouinces, cities, and townes, yet not one uiceroy, +gouernor, nor iustice can put any man vnto death, without his sentence +be first confirmed by the kinge and his royall counsell, except it be in +the warres actually, for that there in the delaying thereof may growe +some perill; therefore they doo permit the captaine generall or his +lieftenant, to behead or hang what so euer souldier that shall offende +or doo anie ill thing; this may they do without consentment of the king +or his counsell, onely with the consentment of the kinges treasorer, or +of the generall of the fielde: the which bee both of them graue +personages, and they must be both conformable in their iudgementes or +else they cannot execute death. + + + + +CHAP. IX. + + _Of such presidents and ministers as the king doth put in euerie + prouince, and the order that they haue in their gouernment._ + + + [Sidenote: Euery prouince hath his viceroy.] + +You do vnderstande howe the two prouinces, Paguia and Tolanchia are +gouerned by the supreme counsell of the king, and such ministers as they +doo send to gouerne. The other thirteene prouinces that do remaine, haue +eyther of them a vizroy or gouernor, whom the common people do call +Insuanto;[97] who is continually resident, and doth dwell in the +metropolitane citie, whereof the prouince doth commonly beare the name. +And although all the kinges officers and iustices of what sort of +administration they are, be generally called by the name of Loytia;[98] +yet euerie one hath a speciall and a particular name besides, according +vnto his office that he doth execute: of the which and of their proper +names I will giue you to vnderstand, for that it doth differ from our +purpose. The vizroy, that is in euery prouince principall and supreme +magistrate in place of the king, they do call him Comon.[99] The second +in dignitie is the gouernour of all the prouince, and he is called +Insuanto, who hath verie little less maiestie than the viceroy: then the +corregidor or gouernor that is resident in any citie, where as is +neither viceroy nor gouernor, is called Tutuan,[100] all of this degree. +Of any thing that is of importance, of what citie soeuer they be, they +do giue relation thereof vnto the higher gouernor, called Insuanto, and +likewise this Insuanto vnto the viceroy or comon, whose charge is to +giue the king to vnderstand thereof or his royall counsell, by the +postes that we haue spoken of before. The third in dignitie is called +Ponchasi;[101] this is the president or counsell, of the kinges +reuenewes, who hath vnder him a counsell and many ministers and +officers, as sargents and others, which do recouer the rents in euery +province. This state dooth giue account of all his office vnto the +tutuan, after that he hath paide all kind of wages and charges ordinarie +and extraordinarie due to any officer of the kinges in all that +prouince. + + [Sidenote: Captaine generall.] + +The fourth degree or dignitie is called Totoc,[102] and this is captaine +generall of all souldiers, as well footmen as horsemen. The fift is +called Anchasi;[103] he is president and gouernour ouer iustices both +criminall and ciuill: and doth determine with his counsell of matters in +difference, whatsoeuer that do appeale vnto him from other meaner +iustices. The sixt is called Aytao:[104] this is generall puruier and +president of the counsell of warre, whose office is to prouide souldiers +when that it is requisite or necessitie demaundeth, and to prouide +ships, munitions, and victuals for any fleete that shall passe by sea, +as that shall be requisite by land, and for the suppliment of garisons +in cities and coastes. To this is giuen the charge to examine such +strangers that do come to any prouince, to knowe of whence they are, and +wherefore they do come, and of all other thinges, and after beeing +knowen, to giue the viceroy to vnderstand thereof, and of all thinges +needful. + +These sixe offices or charge are of great authoritie, and they that haue +the execution thereof are had in great reuerence: euerie one of them +hath in societie or counsell tenne, which are men chosen of great +experience and diligence, and they do help him in the exhibition and +dispatch of matters touching that office. When they are in place of +counsell, which is in the pallace of the viceroy (whereas euerie office +hath his place appointed, garnished in very good order), their sociates +are diuided in two partes, fiue of them do sit on the right hand of the +president, and fiue on the left hand; those which do sit on the right +hande are the most auncientes and haue the more preheminence, and doo +differ from the other that be on the left hande in this only, for that +they do weare wastes or girdels imbossed with gold, and yealow hattes: +and they on the left hand haue their girdels imbossed with siluer, and +weare blewe hats; the which girdels, with gold and siluer, and hats +yealow and blewe, there is none that is permitted to weare but onelye +the counsellers. Likewise these and the presidents do weare the kinges +armes on their breastes and backes imbrodered with golde, without the +which they can not goe foorth to anie place where they must be seen, +neyther sitte in iustice to determine anie thing whatsoeuer. If they +doo, they are not onely disobedient, but are seuerely punished at the +time of their visitation. + + [Sidenote: A very good propertie of iustices.] + +If the president of any of these counsels doo die, then one of the +auncientest of the counsellers dooth succeede him in the office, +obseruing in all thinges the order, as I haue saide in the chapter past, +of the royall counsell. All these iustices generally haue a maruellous +morall vertue, and that is, they be all very patient in hearing any +complaynt, although it be declared with choller and proude speech. It is +the first thing that is taught them in their schooles: they are verye +well nourtered, and courteous in their speeches, although it bee with +them that they haue condemned by lawe. If that vppon any necessitie they +must goe into any part of the prouince to make any information of +importance, then is appointed one of the counsell, and hee goeth alone, +but he hath with him the authoritie of them all. + +Besides these sixe counsellers or iudges aforesaide, there bee others of +lesse dignitie (although greatly respected, as all ministers of iustice +bee in this kingdome), and they are called as followeth: Cautoc, this is +the chiefe auncient-bearer;[105] Pochim,[106] the seconde treasourer; +Pochinsi, he that keepeth the seale royall; Antzatzi,[107] he is as the +maior or bailife of any citie or towne. There be also other three +officers, which are called Guytay,[108] Tzia,[109] Toutay,[110] these +doo keepe court and haue audience in their houses once a weeke; and when +they do open their doores, there is shott off foure peeces of artilerie, +to giue all men to vnderstande that they are in place, readie to heare, +and to doo iustice. If they do finde any that is culpable or faultie, +they doo straight wayes sende them with a sargent vnto the ordinarie +iustice of the citie, which is called zompau, with a bill or note, in +the which is signified the punishment that he must haue. + + [Sidenote: A very good order.] + +Euerie ordinarie iustice hath committed to his charge a thousand +souldiers. He can not exceed his limit nor iurisdiction, neyther can +anie other haue to doo in his charge. Euerie night they doo range their +circuit, and doo cause that euery one may be quiet in his house, and to +put out their candelles and lightes in time to auoyde fires, which hath +happened amongest them verie great, by reason that their houses are so +neere one to an other, and all the vpper partes of their houses wrought +with tymber, according vnto the vse of Byskaye: and all suche as they +doo finde with light after the houre limited, they are punished verie +asperly. From these there is no appellation but vnto suche iustices as +are sent from the court, and besides them vnto none but vnto the +visiters that doo come ordinarily, who doo vndoo and make satisfaction +of all griefes or wronges doone by the other, and these are called in +their language Gomdim, which is as much to say, a righter of all griefe: +this man is respected more than all the rest. + +Besides all these there be other particular officers, which be called +Tompo:[111] these haue the charge to see the prouision of victualles, +and to put a price on them; an other is called Tibuco,[112] he that +dooth arest and punish vagabundes and idle persons. Quinche[113] is the +cheefe sargent, Chomcan[114] is the keeper of the prison: this is one +that they haue in great reuerence, for that he hath a priuilege aboue +all the rest: that after hee hath done his dutie vpon his knees at his +first entrie, hee may tell his tale on foote, and so can not the rest +doo, but kneeling. + +When that these gouernours or iustices doo newly come into these +prouinces or cities, ordeyned and sent by the supreme counsell, they doo +sende two or three dayes before they come themselues their letters +patentes and prouisions: the which being seene and obeyed, there goeth +foorth to receiue him all the loytias and men of warre with their +souldiers and ensignes military, and other officers, making great +feastes and pastimes. + +Likewise the citizens at this time doo hange their streetes with clothes +of silke and other thinges very richly, and trimmed with flowers, +bearing him companie vnto his lodging with much musicke and sound of +instrumentes. + +Aboue all these dignities and offices there is one which is called +Quinchay, which is to be vnderstood in their language "the golden +seale"; this goeth not from the court, but vpon waightie matters and of +great importance touching the quietnesse of all the kingdome. The order +they haue in the choyse of these iustices and officers, and of other +matters touching good gouernment, shall be declared vnto you in the +chapter following. + + + + +CHAP. X. + + _Here is prosecuted the manner how they do choose their gouernors + and iustices, and howe they doo execute the same._ + + + [Sidenote: A very good consideration.] + +All such officers as I haue declared vnto you in the chapter past, the +king dooth ordaine them by consent of his counsell, who doo informe +themselues with a particular diligence of the qualitie and behauiour of +the person that shall be elected. The principall matter that they doo +aduertise themselues is, that the viceroy, gouernour, or counsellor be +not a naturall of that countrey that he is prouided for; and that for to +preuent the inconuenience that might happen in the executing of good +iustice, which many times chaunceth, eyther for the loue of his friendes +and kinsfolkes, or else for the hate hee hath to his enimies. All such +as are prouided in these offices, after that they do depart from the +court whereas the charge is giuen them, til they come to the prouince, +citie, or towne, whereas they shall remaine in iustice, they doo spende +nothing on their owne horses; for that in all places whereas they doo +trauaile or come, the king hath houses appointed, whereas they are +receiued and lodged, and serued of all thinges necessarie, as well for +horses for themselues as horses for them that come with him; likewise of +barkes and boates, if that his iourney be by water, all is of free cost: +it is all appointed what they shall haue to eate, which is conformable +vnto the qualitie of his person, and the office he hath in charge. And +when they do come vnto such houses as are appointed by the king to +receiue and cherish them, they of the house do aske him if he will haue +his pittance or ordinarie in money or in victualles; who, if he haue any +kinsfolkes or friendes in that place that will inuite him, then dooth +hee demand it in money, and keepe it to himselfe. These houses are +maruelously well prouided of beds, and all other things necessarie; for +that the Ponchas, who is president of the kinges reuenewes, hath a +particular care to see all these things well furnished, by a +commandement from the king and the supreme counsell. When they doo come +vnto the citie or towne whereas they take the charge of gouernment, +after they haue giuen the intertainment vnto them with feasts and +pastime, as is declared in the chapter past, then do they bring him and +lodge him in the kings house, and do prouide him of seruants and all +thinges necessarie that belongeth vnto him, and ministers needefull for +the execution of iustice, who likewise haue their abiding in the same +house, as sergeants and notaries, and other ministers of lesse +authoritie. The king doth pay them all sufficient wages, for that it is +forbidden vpon great penalties to take bribes or any other thing of any +clyent. Likewise ye iudges be straightly charged and commanded, and +that is one of the chiefest articles that is giuen them from the +counsel, not to consent to be visited of any clyents in their houses, +neither can they pronounce any sentence but in the place of publike +audience, and in the presence of all the officers, and it must be done +in such sort that all men that are in the place of audience may heare +it, and is doone in this sort following. The iudge doth set himselfe in +the seate of iustice, then do the porters put themselues at the entring +or doores of the hall, who do name with a lowde and high voice the +person that doth enter in to demand iustice, and the effect of that he +doth aske. Then the plaintife doth kneele downe somewhat a far off from +the iudge, and doth with a loud voice declare his griefe or demand, or +else in writing. If it be in writing, then one of the scriueners or +notaries doth take the petition and doth read it, the which being +vnderstood by ye iudge, he doth straightwaies prouide vpon the same +that which is agreeable vnto iustice, and doth firme the petition with +his own firme with red inke, and commandeth what is needful to be done. +These iudges are straitly charged and commanded by the kinges +authoritie, that they must go fasting into ye hal of audience or +iudgement hall without drinking of any wine, and they must giue no +sentence with wine; and that is such a custome amongst them, that +whosoeuer dooth breake it is seuerely punished. By way of phisicke they +do permit, before they doo go to giue any sentence, to comfort +themselues with some conserues or such like. But wine in no manner of +wise, although they bee sicke of any infirmitie, and the lacke thereof +to be hurtfull unto them: for they esteeme it a lesse euill to leaue of +the hearing of any matter, then to giue any sentence after that they +haue eaten or dronke. These matters being executed in publike (which is +maruelously obserued and kept), it is not possible yt any of the +officers should take any bribes, but it must be discouered by one of +them; and for that they are vsed with great rigour in their residence, +euerie one is afraid of his companion, and are one to an other (in this +case) great enemies. The sergeants and notaries and the other officers +are maruelous precise in the executing of their office: if that any doo +not his duetie in his office, they take him and put a little banner in +his hand, and he remaineth with the same, kneeling on his knees till the +court of audience be ended. Then do the iudge command the bedelles to +giue him so many whippes as hee doth deserue for the neglecting of his +office. This same is little esteemed amongest them, for that it is a +common thing vsed amongest them. When that anie of these iudges will go +abroade into the citie (as seeldome times they doo for the reseruing of +their authoritie), they are accompanied with the officers and ministers +of iustice, and that in so good order, that the first two doo carrie +siluer mases, after the manner as they doo in Rome carrie the mases +before the cardinalles. They doo carrie them vpon long roddes, which +doth signifie that in the name of the king they are in those offices: +then after them followeth other two, and they do carrie ech of them in +his hand a long cane and very straight, which doth signifie the vpright +iustice that ought to be done and is doone by that iudge that there +goeth: then followeth them other two, and they doo trayle ech of them a +cane vpon the ground with long red laces, and at the endes tassels, +which doth signifie the instrumentes wherewith they do whippe the +faultie or malefactors; then followeth them other two with tables, like +vnto white targets, in the which is written the name of the iudge, with +his title and office. The rest, which be many in number, do accompanie +him to do him worship and honor. Those two that we spake of before, that +do carrie the mases, do crie out and make a noyse vnto the people apart +themselues, and to make roome that the iudge may passe: the which is +straightwayes accomplished, for that by experience they know that he +that doth neglect the same, is incontinent punished in the streete +without remission: and the respect they haue vnto him is such that not +one, of what state or degree soeuer he be, that dare mooue himself at +such time as he doth passe by, neither crosse the streetes (except it be +some superior iudge, vnto whom the inferiors doth the like reuerence). +If any man do offend therein, he is then straightwaies punished. In all +matters of lawe, as ciuill as criminall, the iudges do nothing but by +writing, and do pronounce the sentences, and examine witnesses in +publike, before all the rest of the officers, because no subtilty nor +falshood shalbe vsed in their demaundes, neither in their writings, to +set downe other then the truth. Euerie witnesse is examined by himselfe, +and if he do double in his declaration, then do they ioyne together and +make their demaunde from one to an other, til by their striuing they may +come to a better knowledge of the truth. But when by these meanes they +cannot bring it to light, then doo they giue them torments to make them +confesse, beleeuing that without it such persons as haue experience and +knowledge will tell the truth. + +In matters of great importance, and such as doo touche graue personages, +the iudge will not trust the scriuener or notarie to write any +information; but they with their owne handes will write the declaration +of any witnesse, and will consider verie much of that which is declared. +This great diligence is the occason that fewe times there is any that +doth complaine of any ill iustice doone, the which is a great and +notable vertue, and ought to be imitated of all good iustices, for to +auoyd many inconueniences which doo happen for the not vsing the same +the which these Gentiles haue great care to performe; who, beside the +prosecution of right iustice, without respect or exception of any +person, do vse certaine preuentions worthie to be suffered. + + [Sidenote: An occasion of amitie betwixt neighbours.] + +First these iudges, in al cities and townes of their iurisdiction, do +number the households, and do repart them in ten and tenne housholds, +and vpon the tenth house they do hang a table or signe whereon is writen +the names of those ten housholders, with a commandement, in the which +generally they are commanded, and euery one by himselfe particular, yt +hauing any knowledge or notice that any of those ten housholders haue +committed any trespasse or fault against any of the rest, or against +himselfe, that is hurtfull vnto his neighbours or to the commonaltie, to +go straight way and giue the iustice to vnderstand thereof, that the +fault may be punished, with a mendment vnto the offender, and an example +to al other. And vnto him that doth know any such offence and wil not +declare it, is allotted the same punishment yt the offender should +haue, which is the occasion that one neighbour hath a care of an other, +and liueth vnder feare, least they should giue occasion to be complained +of. And againe, that their enimies may not this way take any aduantage. +When that any of these ten neighbours doth remooue into an other +streete, or into any other citie or towne to dwell, or will make any +long iorney, hee is bound to ring a bell, or play on a coper kettle +amongest all the neighbours for the space of ten dayes before he doth +remooue or depart, and to aduise them all of his departure, and whether +for that if he do owe any thing, or any thing be lent, that they may +come and demaund it before their departure, because that none shall +loose yt which is theirs. And if it so fall out that any shall depart +without vsing this diligence, the iustice doth compell the rest of his +neighbours yt are written on the signe to pay his debt, because they +did not aduise the iustice or his creditors before his departure. Such +as do owe money or debts and will not paye (proouing the debt they doo +execute their goods), if they haue none, they put them in prison, and +limit a time for him to pay the same. But if it passe, and the debt not +paide nor his creditor contented: for the first time they doo whippe +them moderately, and do appoint him the second time limited for to pay +ye same: if he do then misse, they do whip him more cruelly, and doo +appoint him an other time, and so doo prosecute the same till he die +with punishments, which is ye occasion yt euery one doth pay that he +oweth, or procure amongst his friends to pay, or else giue himselfe for +a slaue vnto his creditor, to shun the trouble of the prison and the +paine of whippings, which is a thing not to be suffered. + + [Sidenote: Cruell tormentes.] + + [Sidenote: A more cruell torment.] + +These iudges do vse two maner of torments to make them to confesse the +truth, when by fayre meanes they can not, or by pollicie, the which +first is procured with great care and diligence: the one is on their +feete, and the other on their hands, and is so terrible that it cannot +be suffered, but of force they do confesse that which the iudge doth +pretende to know; yet doo they execute none of them except first they +haue good information, or at the least, semiplena, or else so many +indicions that it is a sufficient information for the same. The +tormentes on the hands is giuen with two stickes as bigge as two +fingers, and a span long, turned round and full of hooles in all places, +wherein are put cordes to pull in and out: their fingers of both their +hands are put into the cordes, and little and little they do pinch them, +till in the end they do breake them at the jointes, with an incredible +paine vnto them that doo suffer it, and yt causeth them to giue great +shrikes and groanes that will mooue any man to compassion. And if it so +come to passe that by this cruell torment they will not confesse, and +that the iudge do vnderstand by witnesse and by indicions that hee is +faultie and culpable, then dooth he commaund to giue him the torment of +the feete, which is a great deale more cruell than that of the handes, +and is in this sort: they take two peeces of woode, foure square of +foure spannes long and one spanne broade, and are ioyned together with a +gume, and hooles boored thorough, and put thorough them cordes, and in +the middest of these bordes they doo put the whole foote, and straine +the cordes, and with a mallet they do stryke vpon the cordes, wherewith +they do breake all the bones, and cause them to suffer more paine and +griefe than with the torment of the handes. At the executing of these +torments the supreme iudges are alwaies present, the which seeldome +times doth happen: for that such as be culpable will sooner confesse +than suffer those torments, desiring rather to die some other death that +is not so cruell, than to suffer the paines of this torment. + +The prisons that they haue are no lesse cruell and rigorous, as you +shall vnderstand in a chapter by it selfe hereafter. + + + + +CHAP. XI. + + _Of the visitors that the king doth send euery yeare to visite the + inferior iudges of his prouinces, and of the punishing of such as + they do find culpable._ + + + [Sidenote: A great care to do true iustice.] + +It is to be woondred at the great and vigilant care that this heathen +prince hath, in that his ministers and iudges, as wel viceroyes, +gouernors, presidents, as anie other officers, should execute their +offices well and vprightly, as they ought to doo: for in the end of +three yeares that their gouernment doth indure, they do take of them in +residence straight account by the iudges thereof, who bee called +Chaenes. Likewise they doo dispatch euerie yeere in great secrecie into +euerie prouince, other iudges and visitors, that be called Leachis,[115] +the which are persons of great confidence, and prooued by experience of +long time to be of good life, good customes, and haue done good seruice +in the administring of iustice vprightly. These as they trauaile do +inquire in euerie citie and towne that they come in (not being knowen, +and in verie secret manner), all griefes and iniustice that is done in +that prouince, which is the occasion that euerie one dooth liue (as the +prouerbe sayth) with their face discouered. These do carrie from the +king so great authoritie in their commissions giuen them, that without +returning to the court, if they finde any delict culpable, they may +apprehend the iudges and punish them, suspend, and reprieue, and do any +thing touching their commission at their owne pleasure, so that it be +not to take away the life of any man. This (as it is said) none can do +without the consent of the king. + + [Sidenote: Ceremonies in performing of their oth.] + +And because they should execute their office the better in this +visitation, and with iustice and equitie, they do make them to sweare to +be loyall, true, and secret. The which oth is executed in this order: +they doo giue him to drinke three times of a certaine beuerage which +they doo vse, and that is the confirming of their oth. And for that +their departure should be with more secrecie, the counsell doth command +their secretaries to make their prouisions, leauing in blank a space for +his name that shal haue the prouision, and for the name of the prouince +whether he shall goe, declaring nothing but that which is their +ordinarie, that wheresoeuer the Loytia or iudge (being so dispatched) +shall come, that they shall obey him as the king himselfe. But when +soeuer it is in secret determined who shall goe, then doth the president +of the counsel command the prouision to be sealed, then he himselfe doth +write his name in, and the prouince whether he doth goe. And +tharewithall hee dooth depart from the court in great secrecie, and +vnknowen of any who it is, nor whether he doth go, nor wherefore. + +Then when he doth come to the prouince, citie, or town, whether he is +sent, he dooth with like secrecie make his inquirie how the viceroy or +gouernour doth vse himselfe in his gouernment, and how all other +officers do execute their offices, without knowing from whence he came, +nor whether he will, neither what he doth pretend. So after that hee +hath passed throughout all the prouince, and is fullie certified of all +his desire, then doth hee goe vnto the chiefe or metropolitane citie, +whereas are resident all those iudges against whom hee hath made his +visitation, and there he dooth remaine and abide till such time as the +Tutam or viceroy doth make a generall counsell, which is once a month at +the least: and at such time as they are in their counsell hall (and +peraduenture without thought of any such iudge that should come), then +this uisitor doth goe vnto the doore, and sayth vnto the porter, goe and +tell them of the councell, that there is a uisitor that must and will +come in, to notifie vnto them a commandement from the king: then the +viceroy (vnderstanding by these words what he might be) doth commaund +the doores to be open, and doth himselfe and the rest that are with him, +rise vp from their seates, and doth goe and receiue him as their +superior iudge; who doth enter with his prouision open in his handes +(which dooth not cause a small feare amongest them all, but in especiall +vnto such as their owne conscience doth accuse them): he doth read his +prouision in the presence of them all, and at the instant of the +conclusion, the viceroy doth arise from his place and dooth vnto him +great reuerence and complementes, and so doo all the rest, +acknowledgeing their duties. + +Then dooth this uisitor place himselfe in the principallest seate of +counsell, and maketh his oration as the common vse is amongst them, +wherein he doth giue them to vnderstande the cause of his comming, and +with what care and diligence he did vse in his visitation to search out +the trueth of matters: after which, with well pondred wordes, he doth +laude and prayse all such as haue well executed their offices, and +according thereunto he doth straight waies place them in their counsels +in the higher seates, and promising them to giue the king and his +counsell large account of their good seruice, that they might be +rewarded according as they do deserue. Likewise he doth sharply +reprehende all such as haue neglected their bounden dueties. Then doth +he read there before them all the sentence pronounced against them, +declaring in summe all such thinges wherein he hath found them culpable, +which hath caused him to pronounce that sentence against them, the +which, although it be never so rigorous, it is foorthwith executed +without any replication or appellation: for from these visitors there is +no appellation. + +All such as shalbe punished or reprehended, they do first take away from +them the ensignes of iustice, which be, as I haue told you, the girdle, +bonnet, or narrowe brimd hat: with the which they can neither punish nor +hurt him: and if that any wil absolutely do it, he shall for the same be +deprived of his office, and loose his head. So being cleare of these +things, then do they execute the rigour of the sentence pronounced +against the malefactor. But if there be any doubt in the sentence giuen, +doth he straight waies (vppon the same doubt) ordaine nine iudges to sit +vpon it, admonishing them (with the present before their eyes) to vse +well their offices, wherewith hee doth charge them in the name of the +king. Manie times these visitors do carrie power for to reward all such +as doo well execute their offices, in giuing them roomes and offices of +greater honor: so that the present and knowen reward which is done vnto +the good, and the rigorous punishment for the malefactors, is the +occasion that this mighty kingdome is one of the best ruled and gouerned +of any that is at this time knowen in all the world: waying the +gouernement of the one (as in many places of this historie it is +expressed) and ioyne it vnto the long and great experience which we haue +had in the other, and then you will say as I say. Many times these +visitors do visite the colleges and schooles, such as the king hath +ordained of his owne cost in euerie prouince (as in the processe of this +booke you shall vnderstand), and do examine the schoollers of the same, +animating them to promotion all such as doo profite themselues in their +studies, and doo whip and put in prison, yea and thrust them out of the +schooles all such as are to the contrarie. Of all the which and of their +commencing and rewardes, which is given vnto such as they do find +sufficient, shall be at large declared vnto you in a particular chapter +for the same. + + + + +CHAP. XII. + + _Of their prisons they doo vse, and the order they haue in the + executing of iustice vpon the culpable._ + + + [Sidenote: Thirteene prisons in euery great cittie.] + + [Sidenote: Victualing houses in the prisons and shops.] + +Euen as the iudges and ministers are seuere and cruell in punishing, +euen so are they in putting them in prisons, the which are as terrible +and as cruell, with the which they doo keepe in peace and iustice this +mightie kingdome: and as there is much people, so haue they manie +prisons and verie great. There are in euery principal citie throughout +al these prouinces thirteene prisons, inclosed and compassed about with +high wals, and of so great largenesse within, that besides the lodgings +of the keeper and his officers, and for a garison of souldiours that are +there continually, there are fish ponds, gardeines, and courts, whereas +the prisoners do walke and recreate themselues all the day, such as are +in for small matters. Likewise there are victualling houses and shops, +whereas is solde all manner of such things as the prisoners doo make for +to sustaine themselues: which if they did not vse, their whole substance +were not sufficient for their maintenance, the time is so long that they +be there, although it be for a small matter: the occasion is for that +the iudges take deliberation in their sentences: and againe, their +cities are great and ful of other matters. Likewise they are slowe in +the execution of any sentence. So that many times it doth fall out, that +men being condemned to die, doo remaine so long in prison after their +condemnation, that they die with pure age, or some other sicknesse or +infirmitie, or by the crueltie of the straight and asper prison. Of +these thirteene prisons aforesaide, alwayes foure of them are occupied +with prisoners condemned vnto death, and in euerie one of them there is +a captaine ouer one hundred souldiers which are reparted, and dooth +keepe watch and warde day and night: euery one of these condemned +prisoners hath a bord tied about his necke that hangeth downe vnto his +knees, a third of a yarde brode; it is made white with a certain +whiting, and written vpon it the occasion wherefore he was condemned to +die. The keeper of the prison hath a booke, wherein is written all the +names of them that are condemned, and the occasion wherfore: for to be +accountable of them at all times when they shalbe demaunded of him by +the iudges or vizroies. They are shakled and manakled, and put in wards +that do answere into the court, whereas the officers of the prison do +make them to lie with their face downewarde vpon a floore made of bords +for the same purpose, and do drawe ouer them iron chaines, drawne +through great iron rings that are placed betwixt prisoner and prisoner, +wherewith they are so strait crushed that they cannot mooue nor turne +them from one side to another: also they doo lay on them a certaine +couering of timber, wherein remaineth no more space of hollownesse then +their bodies doth make: thus are they vsed that are condemned to death. +This prison is so painefull and grievous, that many doo dispaire and +kill themselues because they cannot suffer it. In the day time they do +take them forth and take off their manacles, that they may worke for to +sustaine themselues; all such as haue nothing to maintaine themselues, +nor any other that will help them, them the king doth giue a pittance of +rice to sustaine them. Likewise they do worke what they may to better +the same. + +There is neuer no execution done vpon such as are condemned to die, but +at the comming of the visiters or iudges of residence, whom they do call +Chenes and Leuchis,[116] the which doe make their visitation in secret +(as you doo vnderstande in the chapter where I spake of them). These doo +visite the prisoners and demaund a note of the names of all them that +are condemned, and the cause wherefore: and although that some of their +sentences are confirmed by the king and his counsell, yet they will see +them againe in the presence of these iudges that did condemne them, or +such as did gouerne in their absence, for to be informed of them the +faults of euerie one: whereby he may see and vnderstand whether his +sentence of condemnation bee done with iustice or not. This diligence +being done, they doo choose out among them fiftie condemned men, such +whose faults are most odious, and commande the iayler to put all things +in order for to doo execution on them: the which being done, they do +examine them a new, and looke vpon the causes and faults, to see if by +any meanes they can saue them. And if they do finde in any of them any +iot of discharge, they do apart them from the rest, and straightwayes +command three pieces of ordinance to be shot off, which is to giue +warning to bring forth them that shalbe executed. Then againe, when they +doo bring them forth, they doo a new enter into counsell, to see if they +can saue any of them: and when not, they command other three peeces of +ordinance to be shot off, to cause them to be brought out into the +fielde, and yet before they do breake vp their counsell, they doo turne +and see once againe all their faults, to see if that by any meanes +possible there might bee some remedie to saue them. If they do finde +any, or any suspect of indicion, they do returne out of the fielde that +person, and sende him againe to the prison. Some doo returne with an +euill will, for that they had rather die at once, then for to suffer the +straightnes and crueltie of the prison. In the meane time while they are +perusing their causes, and concluding the same, they do cause these +condemned prisoners to sit vpon heaps of ashes, and do giue them to +eate. So when all yt these diligences are concluded, and they can find +no remedy to saue any of them according vnto iustice, they doo commande +three peeces of artilery more bee shot off, then do they execute iustice +according vnto their sentence giuen them. + + [Sidenote: Adulterie is death.] + +The deathes that they do execute is hanging, setting vppon stakes, +quartering, and burning: but there is none that is burned, but such as +are traitors to the king. When the last three of artilerie is shot off, +then the belles do ring, and a great rumor is in the cittie, for that +this execution is done but seldome. The day of execution all their shops +are shut in, and there is none that doth worke vntill sun be set, which +is after that the executed men are buried, the which is done with the +companie of much people. The next day after this is done, the visitors +do make the second visitation, which is of the theeues (a thing verie +much abhorred amongst them): and such as they doo finde culpable, hee is +whipped throughout the common streetes with great shame, with a borde +hanging about his necke (as aforesaide), whereon is written his fault: +and therewith they are carried throughout the streetes three or foure +dayes. They do beate them on the calues of their legges, with a broade +and thicke cane of foure fingers broad, and as thicke as a mans finger, +the which they do lay in water before, the more for to torment them: +they are bound with their hands behind them, and their faces downewards +to the earth: two hangmen do execute this whipping of them, the one at +one legge and the other at the other, and it is done with so great +crueltie, that after they haue giuen sixe blowes, they cannot stande +vppon their feete, and many times it chanceth that with fiftie blowes +they die. The most part of these theeues do die in the punishments, and +many times there is whipped togither of theeues two hundred. So that +with these and others that are punished in the prisons (is of a verie +truth) that there do die euerie yeare in one of these principall cities +of the prouince more than sixe thousande persons. At these punishments +the iudges are alwaies in presence, and for that they should not be +mooued to compassion, in the meanetime that execution is done, they do +occupie themselues in banquettings or other pastimes. Adulteries are +death, and such as do consent to be coockoldes (which is neuer founde +but amongst them of the basest sort), are punished with exemplar +punishments ordained for the same. + + + + +CHAP. XIII. + + _Of the characters and letters that the Chinos do vse, and of the + colleges and scholes that are in this kingdome, and of other + curious things._ + + + [Sidenote: Sixe thousand characters in writing.] + +It is not from our purpose (now after that we haue told you of the +gouernement of this mightie kingdome) to giue you to vnderstand how that +there be great and famous philosophers, as well naturall as morall, and +other things of great pollicie and curiosity: to tel you now of their +characters, and the manner they haue in writing, and then of the +colledges and schooles. Now vnto the first. You shall finde verie fewe +in this kingdome but can both write and reade, yet haue they not the +alphabet of letters as we haue, but all that they doe write is by +figures, and they are long in learning of it, and with great +difficultie, for that almost every word hath his character. They do +signifie the heauen, which they do call Guant, by one character alone, +which is this [Chinese character]:[117] the king, whom they doo call +Bontay,[118] by this [Chinese character], and by consequent the earth, the +sea, and the rest of the elements. They do vse more than sixe thousand +characters different the one from the other, and they doo write them +verie swiftly (as it hath beene seene many times at the Philippinas, by +manie Chinos that are there, and come thither daily); it is a kinde of +language that is better vnderstood in writing then in speaking (as the +Hebrue toonge), by reason of the certaine distinction of points that is +in euery character differing one from the other, which in speaking +cannot be distinguished so easilie. Their order of writing is cleane +contrarie vnto ours, for that they doo beginne their lines from aboue +downewards, but in verie good order: likewise they begin their lines at +the right hande and write towards the left, contrarie vnto vs. They +keepe the verie same order in their printing, as you shall vnderstande, +and as may be seene this day at Rome in the librarie of the sacred +pallace. And likewise in that which King Philip hath caused to be +erected in the monasterie of Saint Laurence the royall, and also in +other places; in this order as I haue saide, and of their characters to +the which I referre me, it is an admirable thing to consider how that in +that kingdome they doo speake manie languages, the one differing from +the other: yet generallie in writing they doo vnderstand one the other, +and in speaking not. The occasion is, for yt one figure or character +vnto them all doth signifie one thing, although in the pronouncing there +is difference in the vowels. The character that doth signifie a citie is +this [Chinese character],[119] and in their language some doo call it +Leombi, and others Fu, yet both the one and the other doo vnderstande it +to bee citie; the like is in all other names. And in this order doo +communicate with them the Japones, Lechios, those of Samatra, and those +of the kingdome of Quachinchina and other borderers vnto them: whereas +in their speech or language, there is no more vnderstanding then is +betwixt Greekes and Tuskanes. + +The king hath in euerie citie colleges or schooles at his owne cost, in +the which they doo learne to write, read, and count, as well as to +studie naturall or morall philosophie, astrologie, lawes of the +countrie, or any other curious science. They that doo teach in these +schooles be such persons as excell in euerie facultie, such as may be +found none better, but speciallie in writing and reading: for that there +is none, although he be neuer so poore, but dooth learne to write and +read, because amongst them he is accounted infamous that cannot doo +both. Unto higher studies come a great number of students, and doo +trauaile all they may possiblie to profite, for that it is the best +course and surest way to obtaine the name of a Loytia, or gentleman, or +other dignitie: as more plainelie shall bee showed you in the chapter +following, where the order howe they doo giue them the title Loytia +shall bee spoken off, and is amongst vs after the fashion of proceeding +or commencing doctor. + + [Sidenote: Paper made of the filme of canes.] + + [Sidenote: Pens made of canes.] + +Unto the colleges, as well maiors as minors, the king dooth sende euerie +yeere uisiters, for to see and vnderstande howe the studentes doo +profite, and what the masters bee, with other matters touching their +good governement. In their visitation they doo honour in wordes those +whome they finde of abilitie, animating them to perseuer in the same: +and doo put in prison and punish such as they knowe to haue abilitie, +and doo not profite themselues thereof; and such as haue none, nor will +not learne, they put out of the colleges, that others may occupie their +places that better will imploy themselues. They haue great abundance of +paper, the which is made of the filme of canes, and with great +facilitie: it is verie good cheape: their printed bookes are made +thereof: the most part of it can be written but on the one side, for +that it is so thinne: they doo not write with pennes as wee doo, made of +quilles, but with pennes made of canes, and at the end like a fine +brush, like vnto a painters pensill: and although this bee their order, +yet haue they amongst them excellent scriueners, that grow thereby to +bee verie rich. When they write letters vnto anie principall person, +they gilde the margent of the paper, and limbe it, and they put the +letter written into a purse made of the same paper all guilt and +painted, the which they shut and seale, so that the letter is onely +contained therein. + +This they doo vse verie much, that although one go to visite another in +person, yet they doo carrie a letter written in their sleeues, and +possible there shall not bee written in the same tenne letters, and that +signifieth that they doo come to kisse their handes; these things are to +bee solde at the bookebinders of all sortes, as well for principall +persons and men of authoritie, as for others of meaner estate for to +desire, reprehend, or discommende: and to conclude, for all thinges that +they will desire or haue neede of, yea if it bee to defie anie bodie, so +that the buyer hath no more to doo but to close it vp and seale it to +sende it whither his pleasure is. These and manie other curiosities they +do vse, as you haue heard and shall heare in the discourse of this small +hystorie, or at the least somewhat touched, for that the breuitie that I +doo pretend and will vse, will not permit that I shoulde enter so farre +for to declare at large, but to be briefe in that I shall declare. + + + + +CHAP. XIV. + + _Of the examination of such whome they preferre to the degree of + Loytia, which is with vs the degree of a doctor: and howe they doo + commence them, and howe they doo beare him companie._ + + +These uisitours of whome wee haue spoken, the king and his counsaill doo +sende them to visite his prouinces; and amongest the greatest things +that are giuen them in charge, is the visitation of the colledges and +schooles which the king hath in all the principall citties, as is saide; +the which visitour hath a particular authoritie for to commence or +graduate such students as haue finished their course, and are of +abilitie and sufficiencie to perfourme the same. They doo make them +gentlemen, if they bee capable of anie charge of iustice or gouernment. +And for that the vse of their ceremonies is a thing woorthie to bee +knowne, I will here declare the same order which Frier Martin de +Herrada, and his companions, did see in the citie of Aucheo,[120] at the +time of their commencement. + +At such time as the visitor hath concluded the visitation of his +prouince, and hath punished the malifactors, and rewarded the good: in +the metropolitane cities, hee doth straight wayes cause proclamation to +bee made that all students and scholers that doo finde themselues +sufficient, and haue a corage to be examined to take the degree of +Loytia, the which, although amongst them is vnderstoode to bee made a +gentleman, yet amongst vs is a doctour. + +The day appointed being come, they are all presented before the +visitour, who taketh all their names in a scrowle, and appointeth +another day for their examination. This day, for honour of the feast, +the visitor dooth inuite all the learned Loytias that are in the citie, +who ioyntly with him do make the examination with great rigour, alwayes +putting forwardes and preferring those that are skilfull in the lawes of +the countrey, by which they do gouerne all other faculties whatsoeuer, +and that they be therewithall good, and vertuous. And all those that +they doo finde with these properties, they do write their names in an +other scrowle, and doo appoint the day of commencement, the which is +done with great ceremonies and much people, in whose presence the +visitor, in the name of the king, doth giue vnto them the ensignes of +degree and dignitie to be a Loytia; that is, a waste or girdle bossed +with gold or siluer, and a hat with certaine thinges on it, as shall be +shewed you in the chapter following; which is a signe and token that +doth make the difference from the vulgar people, without the which none +can shewe himselfe in publike. + +And although al be called Loytias, I meane those that come to it by +letters or learning, and others by the warres, and others by a gift of +the king, yet they differ the one from the other in estimation. For that +those of the royall counsell, viceroyes, gouernors, and visitors, are +made Loytias by disputation in learning; and the generall captaines, +maiors, bailifes, and testators, are a gift of the kinges in recompence +of some good seruice that they haue done. These haue no more +preheminence, but onely that they haue the benefite of their priuileges, +and haue the dignitie of that vocation, but these are neuer preferred to +greater honours, as the other Loytias are, of these you have in euery +citie very many. + + [Sidenote: Any good thing gratified.] + +There be others likewise of great estimation, and are put in the second +degree, and are those that are made by desert in the warres, and are +elect and chosen by the generals by authoritie of the king, for some act +or worthie deede done in the wars, by force of armes or such like, +approued by witnesse of great credite; vnto whom, besides the title and +honour giuen vnto them, they doo giue them great liuings, for that no +valiant or worthie deede but is had in estimation, and gratified with +great liberalitie, which is the occasion that those which are meane +souldiers, are animated to imitate those that be most principall and +valiant. According vnto my promise I will here, with as much breuitie as +may bee, declare vnto you the order of their commencements, and how they +do accompanie them after that they are made Loytias, for that it is a +thing worth the hearing. + +The day appointed being come for to commence or giue degrees, all the +Loytias, with the visitor, doo enter into the royall hall whereas they +were examined, al richly apparelled, and being assembled, then do enter +in al those that shal receiue degrees, galantly apparelled without any +upper garment, and before euerie one of them, go the padrines,[121] and +after them the graduates with garments very finely made, riding on +gennets very sumptuously couered with cloth of gold and silke, that do +carie the ensignes that shalbe giuen vnto him, the which hee dooth +demande of the visitor, kneeling vpon his knees with great humilitie. +Who first sweare them, that in all offices committed vnto them, they +shall with all care and diligence doo iustice equallie vnto all men, and +that they shall not receiue any bribes or presents whatsoeuer: that they +shall be true and loyall vnto the king, and that they shall not conspire +in any confederacie or treason against him, and manie other things: +which ceremonies he standeth long about. + +This oth being taken, the visitor who presenteth the kings person, dooth +put on them the ensignes aforesaide, with the facultie belonging +thereunto, and then hee and all the Loytias imbrace them presently. This +doone, they depart out of the hal in verie decent order, at which +instant all the belles in the citie are rong, and great store of +ordinance and artilerie discharged, which continueth a good space. Then +they carrie these newe Loytias throughout the citie, accompanied with a +multitude of people in manner following. + +There go first before them many souldiers, marching in good order, with +drommes and trumpets and other musicall instruments verie melodious: +after them are borne many maces, then follow all the Loytias, some on +horsebacke and some are carried in litter chaires, in most gallant +order, after which follow the Padrines. Then the new commenced Loytias, +without any upper garment as before is saide, all mounted vppon white +horses verie richly couered with cloth of golde; hauing euerie one of +them a tippet of taffeta vpon his shoulder, and on his head a hat with +two small tippets hanging downe behinde, much after the fashion of those +that hang on the bishops miter; this is permitted unto none but vnto +those of their orders abouesaide: vpon their hats they haue two branches +of golde, or of siluer and guilt, made like vnto a bunch of fethers: +before euerie one of them are carried sixe frames, couered with satten, +and euerie one is carried by foure men: in these frames are written in +letters of golde their disputation, facultie, and title giuen them for +the same, and their armes, with manie other things which I omit for +breuitie sake, because this marching and passing holdeth eight houres +togither. The citizens there keepe this day festiuall, and do ordeine +manie dances and sportes. And the better sort doo celebrate three or +foure daies after, banquetting the newe made Loytia, and giuing him ioy +of his newe preferment, euerie man seeking his good will and fauour. +From this day forwards hee is of abilitie to take vppon him any office +and gouernement whatsoeuer: and therefore straight wayes he goeth vnto +the court to procure the same, and carrieth with him the ensignes of his +commencement, and is apparelled so that he may be knowne, wherefore they +doo him great honour in the way as hee goeth, and lodge him in such +houses as the king hath appointed in euerie towne for such as they be. +When he commeth to the court, hee goeth and dooth his duetie vnto the +president and vnto the rest of the royall counsell, who euerie one a +part, doo giue him ioy of his new dignitie, and with many words of great +curtesie and praise promise him, as occasion shall serve, to prouide him +a place, as they by their examination doo vnderstande his abilitie, and, +againe, as they see his discreete dealing and care in such matters as +they do giue him in charge, so will they preferre him to better dignitie +and honour. So the next day following they register him in their booke +of memorie, which is alwayes in the counsell chamber; and they remaine +there waiting and seruing them vntill they haue prouided them of some +gouernment, which is not long after, for that the kingdome is great, +with manie prouinces and citties, as by this historie you shal +vnderstand. + + + + +CHAP. XV. + + _How that with them they haue had the vse of Artilery long time + before vs in these parts of Europe._ + + + [Sidenote: The first inuenting of armor.] + + [Sidenote: Artilerie 1300 years before us.] + +Amongst many things worthie to bee considered, which haue beene and +shalbe declared in this historie, and amongst manie other which of +purpose I omit, because I would not be tedious vnto the reader, no one +thing did cause so much admiracion vnto the Portugals, when that they +did first traficke in Canton, neither vnto our Spaniards, who long time +after went vnto the Philippinas, as to finde in this kingdome artilerie. +And wee finde by good account taken out of their histories, that they +had the vse thereof long time before vs in Europe. It is said that the +first beginning was in the yeare 1330, by the industrie of an +Almane,[122] yet howe he was called there is no historie that dooth make +mention: but the Chinos saie, and it is euidently seene, that this +Almaine dooth not deserue the name of the first inuenter, but of the +discouerer, for that they were the first inuentors, and from them hath +the vse thereof beene transported vnto other kingdomes, where it is now +vsed. The Chinos saie that their first king, called Vitey, did first +inuent the same, and that he was taught the matter how to make them by a +spirite that came out of the earth, for to defende himselfe and his +kingdome from the Tartares, that did much molest him with warres: for, +according vnto the tokens giuen him, (as it dooth appear in their +histories,) and the industrie for the same, it appeareth that it was +some spirit, enimie vnto mankind, onely for to destroy them, as in these +daies the experience thereof is apparent vnto vs. All the which carieth +a similitude of the trueth, for that this king was a great sorcerer and +inchanter, as you may well vnderstand by the herbe that he had growing +in ye court of his pallace, whereof before I haue told you. And if this +be not credible, because so many yeres are past since this kings raigne, +yet it is of truth, yt when these Chinos went to the kingdom of +Pergu,[123] and to c[=o]quest ye east Indies more then 1500 yeares since, +they caried with them ye like instruments of warre, which did serue +them in their conquest: the which conquest being ended, they left behind +them certaine peeces of artilerie, which were found afterwards by the +Portugals, whereon were grauen the armes of China, and in what yeare +they were made, agreeing iust with the time of the conquest. + +Such artilerie as the frier Gerrarda and his companions did see at their +being there, they say it was of antiquitie, and very ill wrought, and +was for the most part peeces to shoote stones, or murderers: but it was +giuen them to vnderstande that in other prouinces of the kingdome, there +be that bee verie curiouslie wrought and faire, which may bee of such +which the Captaine Artreda did see: who in a letter that hee wrote vnto +King Phillip, giuing him to vnderstande of the secreats of this +countrie, amongst which hee saide, the Chinos doo vse all armour as wee +doo, and the artilerie which they haue is excellent good. I am of that +opinion, for that I haue seene vessels there of huge greatnesse, and +better made then ours, and more stronger. + +In euerie citie they haue certaine houses, where they make their +ordinance and artilerie continuallie: they doo not plant them on castles +(for that they haue not the vse of them in all the kingdome), but vppon +the gates of their cities, which hath mightie great and thicke walles, +and deepe ditches, which they doo fill with water out of the next riuer, +at all times when neede requireth, which they account the greatest +strength in all the kingdome. At euerie gate of the citie there is a +captaine with manie souldiours, that keepeth watch and warde, night and +daie, to suffer no stranger to enter in without especiall lycence of the +gouernour of the citie or towne. By this that I haue alredie saide, as +seemeth vnto me, is apparantlie shewed and declared the antiquity of +artilerie in this kingdome: and howe that they were the first inuentors +thereof. Likewise it dooth plainely appeere that there was the first +inuention of printing, a thing as strange as the other, whose antiquitie +in that kingdome shall be shewed in the chapter following. + + + + +CHAP. XVI. + + _Of the antiquitie and manner of printing bookes, vsed in this + Kingdome, long before the vse in our Europe._ + + +The admirable inuention, and the subtill ingenie of printing is such, +that for lacke of the vse thereof, should haue beene forgotten the +worthinesse of manie excellent men, and of their deedes doone in the +happie daies and times long past: and manie in these our daies woulde +not trouble themselues so much as they doo, in learning to get honour +and promotion, or in feates of warres, if that their fame should no +longer continue in writing then their liues on the earth. Leauing apart +the woonderfull effectes of this subtile inuention, least speaking +thereof I should be ouer tedious, I will heere onlie goe about to prooue +that which this chapter dooth propounde, with some ensamples, whereof +manie are found in their histories, and likewise in ours. It doth +plainlie appeare by the vulgar opinion, that the inuention of printing +did beginne in Europe in the yeare 1458, the which was attributed vnto +Toscan,[124] called John Cutembergo: and it was saide of trueth, that +the first mould wherewith they doo print was made in Maguncia, from +whence an Almaine called Conrado[125] did bring the same inuention into +Italie. And the first booke that was printed, was that which saint +Austine did write, intituled _De ciuitate Dei_: wherein manie authors +agree. But the Chinos doo affirme, that the first beginning was in their +countrie, and the inuentour was a man whome they reuerence for a saint: +whereby it is euident that manie yeares after that they had the vse +thereof, it was brought into Almaine[126] by the way of Ruscia and +Moscouia, from whence, as it is certaine, they may come by lande, and +that some merchants that came from thence into this kingdome, by the +Redde Sea, and from Arabia Felix, might bring some books, from whence +this John Cutembergo, whom the histories dooth make authour, had his +first foundation. The which beeing of a trueth, as they haue authoritie +for the same, it dooth plainlie appeare that this inuention came from +them vnto vs: and for the better credite hereof, at this day there are +found amongst them many bookes printed 500 yeares before the inuention +began in Almaine: of the which I haue one, and I haue seene others, as +well in Spaine and in Italie as in the Indies. The frier Herrada and his +companions, when they came from the China vnto the Philippinas, did +bring with them manie printed bookes of diuers matters, which they did +buy in the citie of Ancheo, the which were printed in diuers places of +the kingdome.[127] Yet the most part of them were printed in the +prouince of Ochian,[128] whereas is the best print: and as they did +report, they woulde haue brought a great number more, if that the vizroy +had not disturbed them, for they haue great libraries, and very good +cheape; but hee suspected that those bookes might be a meane to giue +them to vnderstande the secrets of their kingdome, the which they doo +indeuour to keepe close from strangers. The vizroy vsed a policie, and +sent them word, how that he was certified that they went about buying of +bookes for to carry them into their countrie, and howe they shoulde not +spende their money on them, for hee would giue them for nothing so manie +bookes as they woulde haue, which afterward hee did not performe, +possible for the reason aforesaide, or else he did forget his promise. + +At such time as this commandement came vnto them, they had bought a good +number, out of the which are taken the most things that wee haue put in +this small historie, for to giue a briefe notice of them and of that +kingdome, till such time as by a true certificate the experience of +manie shall cause more credite thereunto: for that vnto this day, by +reason of the small notice wee haue, we cannot with so great authoritie +make it so credible as wee hope that time hereafter will doo. The which +hath moued mee, yea and constrained me, to leaue to intreat of manie +things, which in those parts are to bee credited, yea and are most true: +and for the same I haue beene blamed and reprehended by such as haue had +perfite notice thereof. + +And nowe for that I will not go from my purpose, you shall vnderstand in +the chapter following, whereof these bookes that they brought doo +intreat, that the better you giue credite vnto the curiositie and +policie of that kingdome, as in manie places I haue declared, and +hereafter will declare. + + + + +CHAP. XVII. + + _The substance and manner of those bookes that Frier Herrada and + his companions brought from China._ + + +They brought with them a great number of bookes, as wee haue said, that +did intreate of diuers matters, as you shall perceiue in the sequell. + +Of the description of all the whole kingdome of China, and the placing +of the 15 prouinces, and the length and bredth of euery one of them, and +of other kingdomes bordering vppon them. + +Of all tributes and rentes belonging vnto the king, and of all the +orders of his royall pallace, and of his ordinarie pensions that hee +giueth, and the names of all officers in his house, and how far euery +office doth extend. + +How many tributaries euerie prouince hath, and the number of such as are +free from tribute, and the order and time, how and when they are to be +recouered. + +For the making of ships of all sorts, and the order of nauigation, with +the altitudes of euery port, and the quantitie of euery one in +particular. + +Of the antiquitie of this kingdome of China, and of the beginning of the +world, and in what time and for whome it beganne. + +Of the kings that have raigned in this kingdome, and the order of their +succession and government, with their liues and customes. + +Of the ceremonies they vse in doing sacrifice vnto their idols (which +they hold as gods), and the names of them: of their beginnings, and at +what time they shoulde make their sacrifices. + +Their opinions of the immortalitie of the soule, of the heauen, of hell, +of the manner of their funerals, and of their mourning apparel that +euery one is bounde to weare, according as he is alianced unto the dead. + +Of the lawes of the kingdome, and when and by whome they were made; and +the punishment executed on those which violate the same, with manie +other matters touching their good government and policie. + +Manie herbals, or bookes of herbes, for phisitions, shewing how they +should be applied to heale infirmities. + +Many other bookes of phisicke and medicine, compiled by authors of that +kingdome, of antiquitie and of late daies, containing in them the maner +how to vse the sicke, and to heale them of their sicknes, and to make +preseruatiues against all sicknesses and infirmities. + +Of the properties of stones and mettals, and of things natural that haue +vertue of themselues; and wherefore pearles, gold, and silver, and other +metals, may serue for the vtility of man, comparing with the one and the +other the vtilitie of euerie thing. + +Of the nomber, and moouings of the heauens: of the planets and stars, +and of their operations and particular influences. + +Of such kingdomes and nations as they haue notice off, and of particular +things that are in them. + +Of the life and behauiour of such men, whom they holde for saints, where +they lead their liues, and where they died and were buried. + +The order howe to play at the tables, and at the chests, and how to make +sports of legerdemaine and puppets. + +Of musicke and songs, and who were the inuentors thereof. + +Of the mathematicall sciences, and of arithmeticke, and rules how to use +the same. + +Of the effectes that the children doo make in their mothers wombs, and +how they are euery moneth sustained, and of the good and bad times of +their birth. + +Of architecture, and all manner of buildings, with the bredth and length +that euerie edifice ought to haue for his proportion. + +Of the properties of good and bad ground, and tokens how to know them, +and what seede they will beare euery yeare. + +Of astrologie naturall, and judiciarie, and rules to learne the same, +and to cast figures to make coniectures. + +Of chiromancia and phisiognomia, and other signes and tokens, and what +euery one doth signifie. + +The order how to write letters, and how to give euerie one his title, +according to the dignitie of his person. + +How to bring vp horses, and to teach them to runne and trauaile. + +How to deuine vpon dreames, and cast lottes when they beginne any +iourney, or take any thing in handes, whose ende is doubtfull. + +Of apparell worne in all the kingdome, beginning with the king, and of +the ensignes or coates of armes of such as doo gouerne. + +How to make armour and instruments of warre, and howe to firme a +squadron. + +These bookes, and many others that the fryers brought, out of the which +(as afore saide) haue been taken all such thinges as haue beene and +shall be declared in this historie, interpreted by persons naturally +borne in China, and brought vp in Philippinas with the Spaniards that +dwell there, who affirme that they haue seene great libraries in cities +where they abode, but especially in Ancheo and Chincheo. + + + + +CHAP. XVIII. + + _The order that these Chinos obserue in making bankets, and in + celebrating their festiuall daies._ + + +For that in some parts of this historie wee haue touched the bankets +that the Chinos do make, it shall not bee amisse to declare here the +order they vse therein, for that they are curious, and differ verie much +from our order and vse in their banquetting, the which we haue perceiued +as well by their feeding as by many other thinges. + +Amongest these Chinos, more than amongest any other people of the world, +are vsed bankets and feastes, for they are rich and without care, and +also without the light of heauen, albeit they do confesse and beleeue +the immortalitie of the soule, and the rewarde or punishment in an other +worlde, according vnto their workes in this life (as we haue saide). All +that euer they can, they doo giue themselues vnto the contentment of the +flesh, and vnto all maner pastimes, wherein they liue most delicately, +and in verie good order. Their custome is, although they haue a hundred +guestes, yet euerie one must sit and eate at a table by himselfe. Their +tables be verie fine, gilt and painted full of birdes and beastes, and +other varieties verie pleasant vnto the eye. They do not vse to put +table clothes on them, but onely a forefront of damaske, or some other +silke, on euerie one of them, which hangeth downe to the ground; and on +the foure corners they doo sette manie little baskettes curiously +wrought with golde and siluer wyre, full of flowers and knackes of +sugar, made with great curiositie, as elefantes, grayhoundes, hares, and +all other kinde of beastes and foules, gylt and painted: in the middest +of the table they doo sette the victualles in maruelous good order, as +flesh of diuerse sortes, fowle, and fishes: of the which they make +diuers manners of brothes passing well dressed, and are serued in fine +earthen dishes of great curiositie, and of siluer (although these they +vse verie seeldome, except for the viceroyes): they haue no neede of +table clothes nor napkins, for they eate so delicately, that they doo +not touch the meate with their handes, but with little forkes of golde +or siluer, with the which they eate so cleanly, that although it be +verie small that they eate, yet will they let nothing fall: they drinke +often, but a little at a time, and therefore they vse verie little +cuppes. + +At these bankettes and feastes, there are present alwayes women gesters, +who doo play and sing, vsing manie prettie gesters to cause delight, and +make mirth to the gestes: besides these they haue diuerse sortes of men +with other instruments, as tomblers and players, who doo represent their +comedies verie perfectly and naturally: in these bankets they spende the +greatest part of the day, by reason of so manie diuersities of meates +that they serue in. They passe manie times a hundreth sundrie dishes, +when that the estate of the person that is inuited, or of him that +maketh the banket, dooth require. As may shew the report of the +Augustine fryers, in the beginning of the second part of this historie: +where one doth tell of bankets that were made him by the Insuanto, a +gouernor of the prouince of Chincheo, and the uiceroy of Ancheo, and of +the gallant deuices they had to driue away the time so long as the +banket lasted. Unto euerie one of their guestes they doo set a table, +euerie table standing one along by an other, making a difference of the +number of them, according vnto the qualitie of the persons: vpon the +first table (where sitteth he that is inuited) they set the victualles +readie dressed, sweete meates, or march-panes,[129] which is the last +seruice: and on the rest, although they be twentie, they set great store +of diuerse kindes of meates, all rawe, as capons, ducks, teales, hennes, +peeces of salt and martlemas biefe, gammons of bacon, and many other +thinges. All these doo remaine vppon the tables till the banket be +ended, and the guestes departed: then doo the seruantes of him that made +the banket take all these rawe meates, and carrie them before their +guestes till they come vnto their houses or lodges, where they doo leaue +it with great ceremonies. When they doo make any banket to a viceroy or +to any embassadour, it is with so great cost and sumptuousness, that +they spend a great substance therein. These bankets do commonly indure +twentie daies together, continuing vntill the last day as royally and as +plentifully as the first day. + +They do celebrate all their festiuall dayes in the night, which is +ordinarily their newe moones; and they doo solemnize them with much +musicke and newe inuentions. But more particularly they doo celebrate +the first day of the yeare, which is, after their account, the first day +of the moneth of March: on this day they apparell themselues verie +costlye and sumptuouslie, both men and women, and doo adorne themselues +with all their iewelles and newe toyes, and doo hang their houses and +doores with carpettes and clothes of silke and cloth of golde, and +dresse them vppe trimme with roses and other flowers, for at that time +there is great store in that country: likewise they doo sette at all +their doores great trees, on the which they doo hang manye lightes, and +all the triumphall arches that bee in the streetes (which bee verye +manie, as wee haue sayde) are decked with bowes this day: wherein they +put manie lightes, and set full of canapies of cloth of gold, damaske, +and manie other sundrie sorts of silkes. + +Their priestes doo assist them in these feastes very richly apparelled, +and doo offer sacrifice vpon their altars vnto the heauen, and vnto +their idolles, and they sing many songes. + +This day dooth all people generally sport themselues with great singing +and sounding of instruments, in the which they are very cunning. Such +instruments as the Augustine fryers did see, were lutes, gytternes, +vyalles, rebbukes, wayghtes, virginalles, harpes, and flutes, and other +instrumentes which wee doo vse, although they doo differ something in +the fashion of them, but yet easie to be knowen. They do tune their +voyces vnto their instrumentes with great admiration: they haue all +commonly very good voyces. In these feasts they do make many +representations of great pastime according vnto nature, with vestiments +that they haue for the purpose. All the dayes that these feastes do +indure, their tables be full of diuerse sorts of meates, as well of fish +as of flesh, and of all sortes of fruites, and excellent good wine, the +which they make of the palme tree, with certaine mixtures, which maketh +it have an excellent good taste. All the day, they and their priestes do +eate and drinke so much till they can no more. They haue it for a thing +most certaine amongest them, that looke how they are in disposition that +day, so shall they passe the whole yeare, eyther sorrowfull or merrie. I +omit the feastes which they make at marriages, and at any good successe, +though they be in great number and very sumptuous, because I would not +be tedious: in all things they couett to auoyde melancholy. + + + + +CHAP. XIX. + + _How they salute one another in this countrie, and of some part of + their ceremonies._ + + +There is no nation in all the worlde, be it neuer so barbarous, that +hath been found out vntill this day, without a manner of courtesie, or +some ceremony of salutation in their meetinges and visitinges, or when +they do assemble in any particular businesse: whereof wee haue large +notice by auncient histories, and sufficient experience in that wee haue +seene and vnderstoode in these kingdomes and prouinces which in our +dayes hath beene discouered: although herein (as I am fully perswaded) +those of this kingdome do exceede all nations of the world (as is +affirmed by them that haue had the experience), for they haue so many +ceremonies and vsages of courtesie and ciuilitie amongest them, that +they haue bookes to teach them only how they should behaue themselues in +making difference of persons. Of all the which, such as shall seeme +expedient to giue notice of, I will declare in this chapter, using +therein the breuitie that this historie requireth. + +They esteeme it a great discourtesie, not to salute one an other when +they see or meete one an other, although the acquaintance betwixt them +be but small. + +The salutation that the common people do vse is, when they do meete the +one with the other, to shut the left hande, and to couer it with the +right, ioyning therewith their breastes together, with much bowing their +heades downewardes, signifying that loue and amitie is as firme betweene +them as their handes are fast, and that their friendshippe is not +alonely in the ceremonie, but also in the heart: the which they giue to +vnderstande by woordes at the same time. But amongest courtyers and +gentlemen they vse an other manner of courtesie, which seemeth vnto them +of much more curiositie, that is: at such time as they doo meete, they +make a little staye, then they caste abroad their armes, and claspe +their fingers together, remayning in compasse, humbling themselues manie +times, and contending one with an other about their parting for to +prosecute his waye; and the higher estate they are of, the more is their +contention. When that anie meane person doth meete with a principall +man, who for dignitie or for any other occasion dooth acknowledge +superioritie, straight wayes hee dooth stay with great silence, +declining his head, till such time as he is past by, although the most +part of them dooth it more for feare than for courtesie: for that +experience hath taught them, that he that dooth it not, is straight +wayes punished and whipped cruelly. + + [Sidenote: A strange kind of courtesie.] + +When that any of these commeth to speake with any Loytia, at the +entering in at the hall whereas he is, hee kneeleth downe, declyning his +head and looking vpon the ground: and on this sort he goeth vpon his +knees till hee come into the middest of the hall, and there he stayeth +and declareth his petition by worde of mouth, with an humble and meeke +voyce, or else presenteth it by writing: and hauing receiued answere, +hee dooth returne on his knees backwardes, without turning his backe to +the Loytia, vntill hee bee quite out of the hall. And if they which doo +meete or visite one an other be equall in dignity, they shew great +courtesie on both sides, contending who shall surpasse in courtesie and +wordes: wherein they are verie ceremonious. When one doth goe to visite +an other, he that is visited, after the visitation done, doth bring the +other vnto the streete doore. This custome is vsed most amongest the +common people, being equal in degree, or differing little. Likewise they +vse one thing verie strange, and neuer heard of amongest other nations, +that is: if that one doo come out of the countrie, to visite an other +that is in the citie or towne (although he be a nigh kinsman, and long +time acquainted), if that knocking at the doore or in the streete hee +doo meete with him whome he dooth come to visite (hee being not well +apparelled), although he speake vnto him, yet will hee not make any +aunswere, nor any resemblance that euer he sawe or knewe him before: but +straightwayes returneth home to his house in all haste possible, and +doth apparell him selfe with the best apparell that he hath, and then he +goeth foorth and receiueth his guest and friend, dissembling as though +he had not before meete nor seene him. + +This ceremonie amongest them is infalliblie kept, for that it is +amongest them an auncient tradition, and founded vppon their religion. +They giue great intertainement vnto their guestes, and make them +straightwayes a beuer[130] or collation with manie sortes of conserues +and fruites, and good wine, and an other kinde of drinke, that is +generally vsed thorough out the whole kingdome, and is made of diuerse +physicall hearbes, good to comfort the heart, the which they warme when +they drinke thereof. + +These ceremonies they vse when that one neighbour dooth visite an other. +But when that one of the towne dooth meete with a stranger that hee +dooth knowe, and hath beene in the towne certaine dayes, and he not +seene him, then hee of the towne dooth aske of the other if that hee +hath eaten any thing: if he aunswere no, he dooth by and by, without any +delay, carrie him to the next victualling house, whereas hee dooth +banket him deliciously: for in euerie towne there is good opportunitie +for the same, by reason that in the market places and streetes, and in +the suburbes, there is great store of victualling houses, that doo keepe +tabling verie orderly, and for little cost: for there (as we haue sayde) +all kinde of victualles are verie good cheape. But if the stranger dooth +aunswere that he hath eaten, then dooth the citizen or townesman carrie +him to an other kinde of victualing houses, where are to be had al +sortes of conserues and iunkettes, fruites and marchpanes, and there +dooth hee make him a banket with great love and good will. Of the women +as well strangers as towneborne, or of what degree soeuer, they haue +great respect, but especially of the married women: vnto whome if any +man giue an ill or dishonest woorde, he is accounted infamous: and +likewise if he doo not offer to them courtesie, and giue them place or +way when they passe the streetes, which is seeldome seene. But when they +doo passe they behaue themselues so discreetly that they giue no +occasion that anye shoulde misuse them: towardes strangers they vse +verye great courtesie: but especially the principallest: as you shall +perceiue in the relation of the seconde part of this historie, where it +shall be declared by experience. + + + + +CHAP. XX. + + _Of the great closenesse that the women of this kingdome do liue + in, and with what condition they permit common women._ + + +The principall intent that this king and his gouernors haue, as is +gathered by their lawes, is to preserue their common weale from vices; +for the which he dooth set downe great penalties, and executeth the same +without any remission; and least any should offend they vse great +vigilancie, and do iudge that the libertie and dishonestie of the women +is most preiudiciale thereunto, and is the occasion that their common +wealth falleth to decay, being neuer so well gouerned: therefore they +haue ordained many preseruatives and remedies by their lawes and +customes to preuent the same, which is the only occasion (that although +it is so long since this kingdome first began, and againe, being so +great as you may vnderstande), yet in this one point there is lesse +inconuenience or preiudice than in any other countrey of lesse +antiquitie and fewer people. So that a dishonest woman is knowen by +name, although it be in a great citie, the which is seldome seene, and a +rare thing. And the best way they haue to preuent this is, that all +people that haue daughters are commaunded by expresse order, that they +shall bring them vp (after they haue the vse of reason) in their owne +houses very close, and not be seene, but alwayes to doo something to +auoide idlenesse, for that it is the mother of all vices, whereby it may +take no roote in them. This lawe dooth comprehende married women, and is +kept in such sort that the wiues of the viceroyes and gouernours do +obserue it, yea they say that the queenes themselues doo obserue it, and +that they are alwayes spinning golde, silke, or flaxe, or doing some +other exercise with their handes, esteeming all idle persons woorthie to +be hated and contemned: so that the children being brought vp in this +manner, seeing the good example of their mothers, is the occasion that +this vertuous exercise, worthie to be imitated, is conuerted vnto a +dayly and perpetuall custome, in such sort, that they think it a +perpetuall torment to commaunde them to be idle. These ordinarie and +voluntarie exercises haue the women of this kingdome in such sort, that +it is newes and a strange thing to meete a woman in the streetes of any +citie or towne, neither at the windowes, which is a signe that they liue +honest. If it so fall out that of force they must go abroad, as to the +buriall of parents and kinsfolkes, or to visite any one being sicke, or +vpon any like occasion, then are they carried in litter chaires where +they are seene of none, as we told you before: but other superfluous +visitations or meetings of gossips are not there vsed. Albeit tendering +the conseruation of this honest crewe, and to eschewe greater euils in +the common wealth, they permit common women as a necessarie thing: yet +they do allow them in such sort, that their euill example may not be +hurtfull vnto the honest state of them which liue chast. And therefore +they do build for them houses out of the cities and townes in the +suburbes, giuing them straight commandement there to remaine in the said +houses, and not to straggle and go abroad at all. And whilst they liue +there they are prohibited, vppon paine of death, to enter into the gates +of the citie or any part thereof. + +Such women as doo vse this facultie are nothing esteemed amongst them, +for they are for the most part of the basest sort, as strangers, slaues, +or such as haue beene bought of their mothers being yoonge, which is a +kinde of perpetuall bondage, yea a great crueltie which is vsed amongst +them there, and yet suffered amongst them. You shall vnderstande, that +such as are poore widowes and driuen by necessitie, cannot sustaine +themselues, may for the supplying of their want, sell their children and +binde them to perpetuall seruitude, the which is permitted in such sort, +that there are amongst them rich merchants that deale in no other thing: +and all the maiden children that they buy so bee brought vp with great +care, and taught to plaie and sing, and other things appertaining vnto +pleasure. Then after, when they are of yeares, they carrie them vnto the +houses aforesaid ordained for common women. The first day that they doo +dedicate her to this ill office, before shee is put into this common +house, they carrie her before a iudge, which the king hath ordained for +euerie house appertaining to any cittie or towne appointed to bee their +keeper, and see that there bee no euill rule kept amongst them: and this +iudge dooth place her in the house himselfe, and from that day forwards +her master hath no more to doo with her, but to go euerie moneth vnto +the iudge to recouer his tribute, which is a certaine summe set downe by +the iudge, by agreement made betweene them both, and hee appointeth +besides this the time when hee shall be paide for her, and for that was +spent in her bringing vp and teaching. + +These women be very much haunted, and passe away the time maruellous +pleasantly by reason of their singing and playing, which they doo with +great cunning: and according vnto the report of the Chinos, they +apparell themselues with great curiositie, and paint themselues. They +haue amongst them many blinde women, that are free and not bonde: these +are trimmed, dressed, and painted by others that haue their sight; and +such as haue spent all their youth in these houses, can not goe foorth +so long as they liue, as is commaunded by a lawe publike, least by their +dishonest demeanure they should be an occasion of some harme and an +euill example to others. Whatsoeuer profite dooth remaine vnto these +women when they haue payed their maister, they giue vnto the iudge their +superiour, who doth keepe it faithfully and carefully, and giueth a good +account thereof euerie yeare vnto the uisitors. And afterwardes when +these women waxe olde, it is repaied vnto them againe by order of the +said iudge. But it is bestowed in such sort, that they shall not lacke, +neither haue vrgent necessitie. But if it so fall out that they should +lacke, they will giue them a stipend to maintaine them, onely for to +dresse and trimme the blinde women, or else they will put them into the +kinges hospitall, a place ordeyned for such as cannot helpe themselues. + +The men children which they buy, and are solde to supplie their +necessitie, in the order aforesaide, of the women, they put to learne +some occupation, and after that they are expert therein, they doo serue +a master in the same trade for a certaine time; the which being expired, +their masters are not only bound to giue them their libertie, but also +to provide them of wiues and to marrie them, prouiding also for them +houses and necessaries wherewith they may get their liuing. Which, if +they doo not of their owne free will, they are compelled by iustice to +doo, whether they will or no. And they for a token of greatefulnesse +must come vnto their masters the first day of the yeare, and other dayes +appointed, and bring them some present. The children of these be all +free, and subiect to no bondage for the benefite doone vnto their father +for their bringing vp. + + + + +CHAP. XXI. + + _The fashion of their ships, as well of those that passe the seas, + as of those that doo roade riuers, which are manie and great: and + howe they doo prouide themselues of fish for all the yeare._ + + +There is in this kingdome a great number of shippes and barkes, with the +which they sayle all a long their coastes, and vnto ilandes neere hande, +and into their riuers, the which doo runne cleane through the most part +of all their prouinces: and there dwelleth so much people vpon these +riuers in shippes and barkes, that it seemeth to be some great citie; +there is so many of them that they do esteeme that there is almost as +many people that dwell vpon the water as vpon the lande. + +They make them slightly and with small cost, for they haue in all partes +of this countrie great aboundance of tymber, iron, and other thinges +necessarie for this vse: but in especiall a kinde of glew, wherewith +they doo dawbe and trimme their shippes, that is much more tougher and +stronger then the pitch which wee vse, which after it is layde on, +sticketh fast and maketh their shipping as harde as stones; the +aboundance whereof, and the great number of ship-wrightes, and againe +for that there is not on the lande roome enough for the people to +inhabite, being so many in number, causeth them to build so great a +number of shippes and barkes. They vse their shippes and barkes of many +fashions, euery one hath his proper name. Such ships as they haue to +saile long voiages be called Iuncos, but for the warre they make huge +and mightie vessels, with high castles, both on the prowe and sterne, +much after the fashion of them that come out of the Easterne Seas, and +vnto those with which the Portingales sayle into the East India. They +haue these in so great number, yt a generall may ioine together in 4 +dayes an armie of more than 600. Those which they do commonly vse for +burden and to lade, are much after ye same fashion and greatnes, and +smal difference there is betweene them, but that they are lower both +before and at the sterne. There is an other sort of lesser vessels, and +are much like vnto pinases, and haue foure great ores on ech side, +whereat row sixe men at euery ore and foure at the least. These are +excellent good to rowe in and out ouer their bard hauens, or into any +place where is litle water: they do call them Bancoens. There is an +other sort that is more brode than these, which they call Lanteas, and +carie eight ores on a side, with sixe men at euerie ore. Of these two +last sorts of vessels pirates and rouers at the sea do commonly vse (for +in those seas there be very many), for that they be very nimble to fly +and to giue assalt as occasion doth serue. They haue an other sort of +vessels yt are long, like vnto a galley, but more square, being very +brode and neede little water: they do vse them likewise to transport +merchandise from one place to an other: they are swift and run vp the +riuers with smal force of the armes. Many other sorts of barks they +haue, besides the aforesaid, some with galleries and windows painted and +gylt, but chiefely those which the uiceroyes and gouernours doo make for +their recreation. Of those sortes of shipping afore sayd, which they +call Iuncos, the king hath in al his prouinces great armies, and in them +souldiers with their captaines to defend the coastes, that as well all +ships of their owne countrie, as those that doo come from other places +to traficke with them, may goe and come in safetie, and not bee spoyled +and robbed of the roauers that be there abouts. In the riuers there are +pynases well equipped appointed for the same purpose. And the king doth +out of his rentes pay all these ordinarie souldiers, and that with great +liberalitie. + +The pitch wherewith they doo trimme their shippes (as we haue sayde) is +founde in that kingdome in great aboundance; it is called in their +language Iapez, and is made of lyme, oyle of fish, and a paste which +they call Vname:[131] it is verie strong and suffereth no wormes, which +is the occasion that one of their shippes dooth twise out last one of +ours: yet dooth it hinder much their sayling. The pumpes which they haue +in their shippes are much differing from ours, and are farre better: +thay make them of many peeces, with a wheele to draw water, which wheele +is set along the shippes sides within, wherewith they do easily clense +their shippes, for that one man alone going in the wheele, doth in a +quarter of an houre cleanse a great shippe, although she leake verie +much. + +Many men be borne and brought vp in these shippes and barkes (as is +aforesayde), and neuer in all their liues haue beene on lande, and doo +knowe none other occupation wherewith to liue, but that which they doo +inherite of their fathers, which is, to goe in one of these shippes or +barkes, carrying and recarrying of merchandise from place to place, or +to ferrie people ouer the riuers. They haue in them their wiues and +their children, and haue like neighborhood amongst them on the riuers as +in their cities and townes, of whom they stand in little need, for they +do bring vp within their ships all things necessarie for their +sustenance, as hens, duckes, pigeons, and other foules good to be eaten: +and if they do lacke any thing, they haue it in victualing houses and +shops, which they haue amongst them on the same riuers in great +abundance: and of other superfluous thinges such as may bee founde in a +citie, they are well furnished: as of many sorts of silkes, amber, and +muske, and other things more curious then needefull. They haue also in +their shippes, pots with little orange trees and other fruits, and +gardins with flowers, and other herbes for their recreation, and in the +wide shippes pooles of water, wherein they haue great store of fish +aliue, and yet doo dayly fishe for more with nettes. This kingdome is +the best prouided of fish of any that is knowen, by reason of the great +number of these barkes, as also because they haue many fisher men at sea +and in the riuers, that continually fish with nettes and other engines +for the same purpose: and doo carrie the same fishe (in infinite number) +aliue into their pooles fiue hundreth leagues vp into the lande by the +riuers, which they doo with great ease in shifting the water euerie day, +and doo feede them with thinges fit for the nature of the fish. + +The chiefe and principallest time of fishing in this countrie, is in +three monethes of the yeare, which is Februarie, March, and Aprill, at +such times as are the spring tides, which do bring the fish out of the +mayne sea into the riuers, and there they do spawne and leaue their +young: then these fisher men, who doo liue by that facultie, doo take +them and put them into their pondes, and feede and nourish them in the +ships till they come to bignesse to be solde. + +Unto these fishermen repayre many barkes from diuerse partes of the +countrie to buye their fishe, and doo bringe with them wicker baskets +lyned with a certaine thicke paper for that purpose, and annoynted with +oyle, so that the water can not goe out: wherein they doo put their +fish, and do shift them euerie day, and feede them as aforesaide. All +people doo buye of this fish, although they bee verie small and leane, +and doo put them in their pondes which euerie one hath in his house (as +common vse in all that countrie is), whereas in a small time they waxe +great, fitte to be eaten. They doo feede them with a paste made of cowes +doung, buffes doung, and pigins doong. + +Likewise they doo throwe of these small fishes into the mootes of their +cities, which is the occasion that they are so full of fish. But all +that breede in them do appertaine vnto the gouernors or iudges of the +cities, so that none without their expresse commandement dare fish for +them. These gouernors and iudges doo vse much to recreate themselues +vppon the riuers, and haue for the same purpose barkes made close, and +chambers in them verie curiously wrought, with windowes and galleries +likewise hanged with rich clothes, and many other thinges for their +contentment and pleasure. + + + + +CHAP. XXII. + + _A curious order that these Chinos haue to bring vp ducks in great + abundance, and with small cost: and of a pleasant and ingenious + order of fishing which they vse._ + + +The great number of people that is in this countrie, and not permitting +any idle people to liue therein, is the occasion that it doth stirre vp +the wits of poore men (being constrained thereunto by necessitie, the +inuenter of manye thinges) to seeke new inuentions to get their liuing, +to relieue and supply their necessities. So that many of this kingdome, +seeing the whole countrie so throughly inhabited and tilled, that there +is not one foote without an owner, they do take them vnto the riuers +(which are verie great), and there they do make their dwellinges in +ships and barkes (as is aforesaide), where they have their whole +families vnder borde to defende them from the sunne and rayne, and +inclinations of the heauens. There they do vse the occupation that they +do knowe, or that which they did inherite of their father, and many +misteries to liue by, verie strange: whereof the most principall is to +bring vp in some of their barkes so great quantitie of duckes, that they +sustaine a great part of the countrey therewith; and the vse thereof is +as followeth. + +They haue cages made of canes so bigge as the vpper most holde of the +barke, in the which may be foure thousand duckes at once. They haue in +certaine places of these cages made nestes, where these duckes do almost +euery day laye egges, the which they take: and if it be in the sommer, +they doo put them in buffes doong, or in the doong of those duckes, +which is verie warme, where they leaue them so many dayes as experience +hath taught them that they will come foorth. Then they doo take them out +of the doong, and do breake them one by one, and take a little ducklin, +the which they do with so great cunning that almost none of them doth +perish, which is yt which causeth great admiration vnto some that go to +see it: although they bee but few, for that it is an auncient custome +vsed for long time in that countrie. And for to haue the fruition of +this benefite all the yeare, in the winter they must vse an artificiall +helpe: to giue a little warmenes vnto the doong for the bringing forth +of their egs, they do vse then an other inuention as ingenious as the +first, and that is this: they take a great number of canes tied one by +another, whereon they do laye the doong, then vppon that they doo lay +their egges, and do couer them verie well with the same: this being +done, they put vnder the canes straw, or some other like thing, and set +it on fire, but in such sort that it dooth not burne, but keepeth a +naturall heat all the time, till they thinke that they are readie to be +taken out. Then doo they take and breake them, as aforesaide, so that +their pultrie dooth increase in such number as though they were antes. +Then doo they put them into an other cage for the same purpose, wheras +be old duckes brought vp for no other purpose but to couer the little +ones vnder their winges and keepe them warme: and there they doo feede +them euery day, till such time as they can feede themselues, and go +abroad into the fieldes to profit themselues in the companie of the olde +duckes. Many times they haue in number aboue twentie thousand, yet do +they maintain them with a small cost, and it is in this order: euery +morning they do giue them a small quantitie of boyled rice, then do they +open a doore of the cage, which is towardes the riuer, and doo put a +bridge of canes that doth reach vnto the water: then doo they come +foorth with so great haste one vpon an other, that it is a pastime to +see them. All the day after they do passe the time vpon the water, and +in the fieldes of rice vpon the land, wheras they do feede: the owners +of the rice doo giue vnto the owners of the duckes somewhat to let their +duckes go into their fields, for that they do destroy all the grasse and +other weeds in it, and hurt nothing of the rice. + +When that the euening draweth on, then they of the barke do make a sound +with a taber or such like, ye which being heard of his duckes, they +throwe themselues with great speede into the water, and swimme straight +vnto their owne barke, whereas their bridge is readie put for them; and +euerie flocke doth know his owne barke by the sounde, without missing at +any time, although there be many flockes together. For euerie barke doth +vse a different sound the one from the other, to the which the duckes +are vsed, and their ears full thereof, so that they neuer fayle their +owne barke. + +This manner of liuing is greatly vsed in all that countrie, and verie +profitable, for that it is a victuall most vsed amongst them, and is +esteemed as a thing of great sustentation and of small price, by reason +that at al times there is breeding of them and of small cost. + +Likewise in this country they do vse a kinde of fishing, that is of no +lesse industrie then the bringing vppe of these duckes, and a thing to +be scene. The king hath in euerie citie founded vppon the riuers, houses +wherein euerie yeare is brought vp many cormorantes or sea rauens, with +whome they doo fishe in those monethes that the fish dooth spawne, and +that is in this maner following. They take the cormorantes out of their +cages, and carrie them vnto the riuer side, whereas they haue many +barkes ordeyned for their fishing, and they are halfe full of water. +Then they take their cormorantes, and with a corde they do binde their +mawes, in such sort that no fish can fall into it: then they do cast +them into the riuer to fish, the which they do with such good will and +couetousnesse, that it is a woonder to see; they throwe themselues into +the water with great swiftnesse, and diue, whereas they do fill their +throate with fish. Then they come foorth, and with the like hast they go +vnto the barkes that are halfe ful of water, and the fish which they +have taken they put in that water, which is put there for that purpose, +that the fish may not die; the which being done, they returne againe +vnto their fishing as they did before. + +In this order they do indure their fishing foure houres together, in +such sort that the one doth not trouble the other; and when yt their +boates with water are ful of fish, then do they vnbind them, and turne +them againe into the riuer for to fish for themselues, for they haue +neede thereof, for that alwayes the day before that they will fish they +keepe them from their ordinarie victualles, which is a litle _millio_, +that they may ye better do their office. So after a while that they +haue filled their bellies and recreated themselues, they take them out +of the water and carrie them vnto the ordinarie places, whereas they are +kept; and euerie third day during the time of this fishing, they do take +them forth for the same exercise, which for them is so great pastime, +that they would it should indure all the yeare. + +In these three monethes they do take so much fish, that they do prouide +the whole kingdome for all the yeare; as in the chapter past it hath +beene tolde you, which is the occasion that they are as well prouided of +fish as of any other thing: so that, if they please, they may eate +euerie day fresh fish, although they are farre from the sea. + + + + +CHAP. XXIII. + + _Of the curtesie that the king of this mightie kingdome doth vnto + the ambassadors that come to him from anie other king, prince, or + comonaltie._ + + +We should in the chapter following intreate of the ambassage that king +Philip of Spaine, with the Christian zeale that he had, to sende vnto +the king of this kingdome, who being mooued by certaine causes and +reasons, did referre it till a better occasion, and we do beleeue that +it will be offered shortly. Therefore now it shall not be from our +purpose to declare in this chapter the honour and curtesie that this +king doth vnto the ambassadours of kings, princes, or any other +prouince, that doth come vnto him, in what sort soeuer it be; and for +that it is of great curiositie, it shall be necessarie to declare it +with the circumstance wherewith it is done. + +All such as doo enter into this kingdome, with the title of ambassadour, +be it from a king that is a friend or enemie, they are respected, +intreated, and made of, with so great care and diligence, as though they +came themselues in person that doo send them. Unto whome, besides the +obseruing the law of nations, which is obserued and kept among all kings +in the worlde, in especiall that their persons shall not receiue neither +incurre any danger, although their ambassage bringeth discontent or +harme vnto the king; besides all the which, there is granted vnto them +great and particular priuiledges. When that he doth enter into the +kingdome, by any of the prouinces whatsoeuer, the iudge or gouernor of +the first towne dooth in person go forth to meete and receiue him, and +giue him his welcome, with great complement of words and ceremonies. All +the loytias, captaines, souldiers, and the inhabitants of the towne, doo +accompanie the iudge or gouernour, when that they go to receiue him. But +at his disembarking to come a shore, they will not suffer him to set his +feete vppon the ground (although it be but a little way that he should +go), but hath at the waters side in a readinesse eight men, with a +chaire made of yuorie, or of some other pretious thing, with the +curteines of ueluet, damaske, or cloth of golde: which for the like +oportunitie, they haue in euerie cittie or principall towne appointed by +the king, wherein they do carrie him to his lodging. Likewise they haue +in euerie citie and great towne throughout all the kingdome, a +principall house, and sufficient for to lodge such like personages. It +is also vsed to lodge such iudges as are sent by the king to execute his +commandement, when they passe by anie of such cities or townes. There is +in euery one of these houses a lieutenant, and he hath in it maruellous +and excellent household stuffe, as hangings, beddes, seruants, and all +other necessaries, not only to lodge one ambassador, but many, if they +should there meete, and not one to disturbe another. So as aforesaide, +they doo beare him company (either on horsebacke, or in a chaire, which +is the ordinarie carriage amongst them) till hee come vnto this house, +whereas they do leave him with much curtesie and many ceremonies, +alonelie with them that waite vppon him and serue him. And also a +captaine with a thousand or two thousande souldiers for to garde him +continuallie, and to beare him companie till hee returne againe out of +the kingdome. + +Then the next day following, the iudge or gouernour that did receiue him +dooth go and visite him. And after that they haue demanded of him such +ordinarie thinges as is vsed in such like visitations, then doo they +learne of his estate, and of the prince that hath sent him, and in +summe, the effect of his comming and ambassage: then doo they +straightways at the houre dispatch a post vnto the gouernour or vizroy +of the prouince, who is alwayes resident in the chiefe or metropolitan +citie thereof, and hee at the same instant dooth dispatch another post +with that message vnto the king and his counsel. And he dooth sende +order vnto the ambassador, either to stay, or a safe conduct for him to +go vnto the place whereas hee is. Likewise hee sendeth order vnto the +iudge, how hee shall intreate that ambassador, which is giuen according +vnto the relation sent him, wherein he did vnderstande the state of the +king and prince that sent him. Likewise the number of souldiers yt +shall beare him companie, and of all other thinges needefull for him in +his iourney: all the which is set downe in order, and in particular, as +what they shall giue euery man to eate for him and his seruants, and in +what townes, and howe hee shall be lodged. His safe conduct is brought +him, written vppon a whited table (after the fashion as we haue tolde +you heere before in manie places), and is with great letters, wherein is +contained from what king that ambassador is sent. This table is borne +alwayes before him, wheresoeuer hee dooth go. But that pasport, which is +sent him afterwards from the royall councell, with facultie, that hee +may go vnto the court, is after another sort: for that it is written in +parchment and gallantlie lymned, and with the kings seale of golde +hanging at it, which is neuer giuen but at such like occasion, or for +some prouision giuen to a vizroy. + +Looke what is spent vppon this ambassadour in all his iourney, and vppon +them that doo beare him companie for all necessaries, is vppon the kings +cost and charges, and is paide by the kinges treasurers in euerie place +whereas they doo go. Generallie in all partes, they doo make him great +feastes and banquets, with pastimes and presents, that day that hee +dooth enter into the cittie of Taibin or Paquin, whereas the king is. + +There goeth foorth to meete him without the citie, all the gentlemen of +the court, with the royall councel and president, who, according vnto +the saying of the Chinos, goeth forth with little lesse maiestie and +companie than the king: who, if the ambassadour be from a king that is +mightie, they giue him the right hand, if not they giue him the left +hand: and in this sort they go, ether talking with himselfe, or, by +interpreters, demaunding of him of his health, and of his trauail in +comming, and other thinges, till hee come into the court of the pallace, +whereas he is lodged; and there they doo leaue him, with some to beare +him companie, and hee dooth returne vnto his house with all this company +aforesaid. But when they do depart from him, they doo giue him power in +the name of the king, to make a certaine number of loytias, and to set +at libertie a certaine number of prisoners, such as are condemned to +die, and other good deeds particular. + +Those that doo enter in this kingdome with the title of an ambassador, +they cannot do him any griefe, for anie delight or euill that he doth, +although they can make good proofe thereof. And for that it is of a +truth, you shall vnderstande the proofe by experience. There was sent +vnto this king, one Bartholomew Perez, a Portugall, and his company, by +order of the vizroy of the India, with an ambassage from the king Don +Manuel of Portugall, and they were accused before the vizroy of the +prouince of Canton, by the ambassadors of the king of Malaca, that were +there present, who were bounde vnto the court to treat of matters of +their king; they did testifie that the ambassage that the Portugall did +bring was false, and they were spies sent from the vizroy of the India +for to view the fortresses of the citie, that they might come afterwards +and take it, as they had done in many places of the India: they +perseuering still in the euill and mischieuous intent, did will the +vizroy to apprehend them, and to punish them as such spies did deserue, +offering themselues to giue good information for the same. + +Who, after that he had well considered thereof, and consulted with the +loytias of the citie, and with his counsailors, they commanded that they +should be apprehended and put in straite prison, whereas their +declarations were taken with great care, deceit, and pollicie: and by +reason that in them they found contrarieties: some for feare confessed +much more then that which was demanded, and other saide that it was of +truth; so that by their confessions, according vnto the lawes of the +countrie, they were condemned to die, and sent their iudgment vnto the +roiall councell for to confirme the same, with intent and great desire +for to execute the same. The which being seene by the roiall councell, +and considering with what title they entred into that kingdome, did not +onely make voide the sentence and would not confirme the same, but did +send commandement vnto the vizroy to set them at libertie, and to +returne freely back againe vnto the India from whence they came, and +that hee shoulde furnish them with all things necessarie in aboundance, +til they were entred into the same, although in this time the +ambassadors of the king of Malaca, who were in the court, did still +perseuer in their malicious intent. + +In which commandement, although it were true all that which the +foresaide ambassadors did testifie, and that they for feare of death did +confesse it, yet it is sufficient that they entred into his kingdom with +the title of ambassador, whereby they should receiue any harme. But now +let vs returne to our purpose. So after this ambassador hath refreshed +himselfe of his iourny, and receiued many banquets and orations of the +gentlemen of the court: vpon a day appointed he goeth to speake with the +king, accompanied with all the gentlemen of the court, and with the +president of the councell, who doth giue him audience in one of the +three rich hals aforesaide, at all times as his businesse doth require. +So when that all his busines is dispatched and gratified with many +gifts, he returneth backe againe from whence he came; and looke with +what curtesie they did receiue him at his comming, the like they doo +vnto him at his returne. + +But if an ambassador doo come from any common wealth of the said +kingdome, they do not giue him the intertainement abouesaid, but cleane +contrarie thereunto, for that he dooth enter into the citie, accompanied +onely with the iustice, whose charge it is to lodge him in such houses +as the king hath ordeined to the same effect, and to giue him all that +is necessarie, takeing of him the summe and effect wherefore he doth +come: and he doth giue relation thereof vnto the president of the +councell, and the president doth giue the king to vnderstand therof: +then doo they appoint the day of audience, with this condition, that +when he dooth go thither, hee must go on foote, or else on horse back +without a bridle, with onely a halter on his horse head, in token of +humility, and acknowledging to be a subject. The day of his audience, he +commeth forth obseruing the order and condition aforesaid, accompanyed +with the iustice. And when hee doth come into a great place, which is +right against the pallace of the king, he staieth there till an officer +of the king doth come vnto him (who is master of the ceremonies), and +hee dooth cause him to proceede forwards, and dooth shew him the place +whereas hee must first kneele downe, with his handes ioyned togither in +token of adoration or worship: and all the time of this ceremonie, his +eis must bee fixed on that part where as they say the king is. In this +sort hee goeth onwards his way, making in it other fine adorations like +vnto the first, vntill such time as he do come into the first hall of +the pallace, which is at the staires heade, whereas the president is set +with great majestie, and doth represent the kings person: who after that +hee hath hearde the effect of his ambassage, dooth sende them away +without answering one word at that time; but after that hee hath giuen +the king to vnderstande, hee dooth sende him answere by that iustice, +who hath the charge to lodge him, and to prouide him of all things +necessarie for the time that hee is in the court. + + + + +CHAP. XXIV. + + _Of the ambassage that the king of Spaine did send vnto the king of + this kingdome, and the occasions that did mooue him therevnto, as + also wherefore it was declared._ + + +For to conclude this small historie, in the which I haue declared, in +summe, all such things as I haue vnderstoode of this kingdome of _China_ +vnto this, I meane such as I might wel set forth, leauing a great number +more, of the which I haue particular note: some for that they are +vnknowne, and others for that they will cause admyration because they +haue not beene seene. And according vnto the counsell of the wise, they +should not be intreated of, vntill that time that experience dooth make +them more credible. And againe, I doo hold it for a lesse euill, to be +reprehended for breuitie (as some haue beene), then to bee prolix and +tedious in the declaring, although it bee hurtfull vnto this worke, from +the which I doo take away much that I might put in. Nowe letting all +passe, I will in this last chapter declare of the letter present, and +ambassage, wherewith the king of Spaine did sende mee in the yeare of +our Lorde one thousande one hundred and foure-score: for that in company +of other religious men of my order, I should passe from his mightie +kingdome of Mexico to China, and to present it vnto the king of that +countrie in his name: of all the which I will declare that which I doo +vnderstande and know, not exceeding the limits of fidelitie, by reason +that the ambassage was not ended, nor no conclusion in effect of that +which was pretended, but doo hope in the deuine maiestie, and with the +care and diligence that is put therein by the king of Spaine, shortlie +to haue a conclusion of that they desire, for the which the letter and +the rest was sent. + +Beeing considered of by the Spaniards (such as were dwellers in the +Ilands Phillippinas, which by another name are called the Ilands of the +Ponent or West) the thinges of great valour and riches, as of golde and +silkes and many other thinges which is brought from the kingdome of +China, and out of their ports, and how those which brought it did sel it +for a small quantitie in respect as they did esteeme it, and being +certified by the saide Chinos of many other things which were in the +firme land, wherof some of them haue beene made mention in this +historie: being mooued with the conuerting of these soules, and with the +profite that might come of trafike that they might haue with the Chinos, +it was concluded by the gouernour and principals of the citie of Manila, +with the iudgement of the prouinciall of the order of Saint Augustine, +and of many other religious men that were both graue and wise, such as +were the first, that in those parts did preach the Gospell, and did +baptize a great number of the dwellers therein, and did many other +thinges, of the which I might say much, if it were to my purpose, and +that my part were not therein: so that I say it was concluded amongst +them to sende vnto the Catholike king graue personages, vnto whome +intire credite might be giuen, for to giue relation what they +vnderstoode of that kingdome, and also of the euident necessitie (that +all those ilands that were his) had for their conseruation to holde to +friendes the Chinos their borderers, whereof might growe vnto them great +benefites and profites: and likewise to request him (if it were his +pleasure) to sende an ambassador to the king of that kingdome, the +better to confirme their friendship, and to carrie with him some things +which he vsed in his countrie, which would be maruellous well esteemed +of the Chinos, and be a way vnto the preaching of the Gospel, and bee a +beginning that a farther contraction may growe betwixt the Christians +and Chinos, of the which shall follow the aforesaid profite vnto other +countries, by the great quantitie of things, as well of riches as of +other curiosities that shalbe brought from thence. After they had well +considered with great deliberation, who should be the person that they +shoulde send vpon so long a iourney, for to request his maiestie of the +aforesaid: in the ende they did agree vppon for to desire the +prouinciall of the Augustine friers, who was called Frier Dilho de +Herrera, a man of great learning and of great experience touching +matters of those ilands, for that hee was one of the first discouerers +of them: they requested him for the loue of God and the good seruice to +his maiestie, and the benefite that might come thereby vnto these +ilands, that he would take vpon him to go with this petition, for they +were fully perswaded for that he had trauailed so manie places of those +ilands, as also for his office and vocation, there was none that better +coulde put in effect their desire, and perswade with his maiestie the +great importance of that ambassage: and manie other things necessarie +touching the gouernement of those ilands. This determination was liked +well of them all, and that they had chosen well in sending of the +prouinciall, who incontinent departed from the ilands in a shippe that +was prepared for Noua Hispania, which was in the yeare of Christ 1573. +At his imbarking, hee was accompanied with the gouernour, and all those +of that citie, of whom hee was maruellouslie well beloued for his +holinesse and good condition. Desiring him with all diligence to procure +to returne, with as much breuitie as was possible, vnto those ilands, +whereas they so much loued him, and had neede of his presence. + +He did promise them to make all the speede possible, and in paiment of +the trauel that he did take vpon him, for the benefite and profite, he +requested them al that they would pray vnto God to giue a good voyage: +they promised him to doo it, the which they did performe with particular +care. Then did the master command to weigh ankers, and to set saile, +which was in the moneth of Nouember the same yeare: and with reasonable +wether they arriued at the new Spaine, and came vnto the cittie of +Mexico, and from thence they went and embarked themselues in the North +Seas; who with prosperous winds the 13 day of August, the yeare +following, they ariued in San Lucar Debarameda, in Spaine, and caried me +in his company. From thence, the day following, we departed from Syuel, +from whence wee departed forthwith toward Madrid, whereas his maiestie +was at that present, and we came thither the fifteenth day of September +in anno 1574, the same weeke that they had newes of the losse of the +Goleta.[132] Wee went straightwayes to kisse the kings hands, and caried +the letters which we brought from his gouernor and citie: by whom both +we and the letters were receiued with his accustomed benignitie, and did +heare the petition with great satisfaction, for that the desire was holy +and profitable, and told vs that he would command his counsell to +vnderstand in the same with a particular consideration, and with so much +breuitie as the thing required: and gaue vs thankes for the great +trauell and long iourney which we tooke vpon vs in his seruice, for to +giue him notice of the discouering of this great kingdome, and of other +things touching the Ilands Philippinas. He straightwayes commanded that +we should be prouided for of all things necessarie for our sustentation +for the time that we should there remaine, and that we should go and +giue account of all things (for the which we came thither) vnto the +counsel of the Indies, who was Don Iuan de Obando, vnto whom his +maiestie did recommend the consideration to be done with great care, and +to consult vpon the same. After that they had comuned with the roiall +counsell of the Indies touching that which should be requisite and +conuenient, which was done as it appeared in effect, for that they gaue +vs facultie in a few dayes after of all things that was requested from +the said ilands, except that which did touch the ambassage vnto the king +of China, as a thing of greater importance, and requested longer time to +consider of the same: so that they did referre it till they had a better +occasion. So that with this resolution and with fortie religious men, +and manie commissions from his maiestie touching the good gouernement of +that new kingdome, wee departed from Syuell in the moneth of Ianuarie, +the yeare following, in 1575, whereas I remained by his order and for +certaine respects. But the aforesaid prouinciall did imbarke himselfe +with his fortie religious persons, and departed in the moneth of Iuly +with a faire winde and merrie passage, till they came vnto Newe Spaine, +and from thence into the South Sea, vntill they came in sight of the +ilands: whereas the wether did alter, and they were forced by the furie +thereof to ariue at an iland inhabited with Gentiles, by whome they were +all slaine, and none escaped but onely an Indian natural of the ilands, +which wee carried from thence in our companie for Spaine. He afterwards +came vnto Manilla, and gaue them to vnderstand how they were all slaine, +and how the Gentiles did teare all the papers and commissions in peeces, +and of all that happened to them. + +This beeing knowne by the gouernor, and by the rest that dwelt in the +ilands (after that they had done the rytes, with the funerall griefes, +as iustice required in such a case), they finding themselues in the same +necessitie that before they were in by reason of the losse of the +aforesaid prouinciall and his companions, and also of the letters and +prouisions sent from his maiestie, they forthwith in the same +determination did write newe letters, in requesting that which in part +the king had granted (although they had no knowledge thereof); they did +also therein write touching the ambassage that they did request for the +king of China, adding thereunto new occasions, wherby they should be +moued to do them so much fauour as to send the ambassador afore +requested, which was a thing of great importance for all those ilands. +When that these letters came in conformitie with the others before sent, +the king did ordaine for gouernor of those ilands, a gentleman, who was +called Don Gonsalo de Mercado y Ronquillo, a man of great valor and +discretion, one that had serued the king as wel in the Peru as in Mexico +with great fidelitie; who vnderstanding the earnest request wherewith +those of the ilands did aske the ambassage, and how much it did import +to haue it (as a man then elected for gouernor of those ilands, and a +matter that touched him very much), did put the king and his counsell in +memorie of the same: and in conclusion, they answered that hee should +foorthwith depart with the souldiers that were prouided for those parts, +for that it was conuenient so to be doone by reason of great necessitie +that they had of them in the said ilands; and as for the ambassage, for +that there was no such great necessitie nor haste, it should be +intreated of at more leasure, when that the counsell will aduertise +themselues of al that shalbe conuenient touching that matter, and that +they would consult and confer with his maiestie that he may, as the +right owner of them, command that which shuld be to the seruice of God +and his benefite. So with this answere the said gouernor departed. + +It happened that in the moneth of August, in the yeare following, before +that this gouernor was ariued at the ilands, there came newe letters +from thence of supplications, requesting with greater instance, that +which before at other times they had requested, sending with their +petition the whole relation of the entrie of Frier Martin de Herreda, +prouinciall of the Augustine friers and his companions, into the +kingdome of China, and of such things as they had seene and heard of (as +may be seene at large in the said declaration, which is in the second +parte of this booke). This being seene by his maiestie, he was resolued +to send the ambassage which so many times they haue requested; this +chanced at that time that he began to go vppon Portugall, a time of +trouble, but yet a great token that it was the will of God, in whose +hands (as the wise man saith) are the hearts of kings. For the +appointment of one for to go on this ambassage, the king did remit it +vnto his roial counsel of the Indies, whose president was Don Antonio de +Padilla y Meneses, who had communicated with me diuers times, touching +matters of that kingdome and of Mexico, whereas I was alwayes resident +euer since I was seuenteene yeares of age, and by reason of matters that +was committed vnto me out of that country, was the occasion that I did +vse to visit him the oftener: the which large conuersation and the good +wil that hee did beare me, did perswade him that I could put in +execution the ambassage of his maiestie, for that his will was that some +religious person should do it: and they being fully perswaded that my +good will and desire was for the saluation of those soules, and in all +respects willing to serue his maiestie: all the which, with the +knowledge that I had of that large nauigation,[133] and the qualitie of +that countrie and people, was a great helpe to the accomplishing in +effect the will of his maiestie, and desire of those that dwelt in +Philippina. + +So after this charge being committed vnto me, and his maiestie readie to +depart on his voiage for Portugal as aforesaid, he did remit my dispatch +vnto the lords of the royall counsell, who were at that time the +Licenciado Gasca de Salacar, and Doctor Gomez de Santisteuan, the +Licenciado Espadero, the Licenciado Don Diego de Zuniga, the Doctor +Vaillo, the Licenciado Eua, the Licenciado Gedeon de Hinonsosa. By whose +commandement I depart from the court vnto Syuell, where as order was +giuen that all such things should be prouided that I should carrie vnto +the king. Whereas I was procuring the same certaine dayes, and for that +they were many the which I should carrie, it was not possible by any +meanes that they should be made readie against the departure of the +fleete. Then the Licenciado Gasca de Salacar aforesaide, who was at that +present resident in the contractation house of Syuel, gaue his maiestie +to vnderstand thereof, who was at Badaioz occupied in matters touching +the kingdome of Portugal as aforesaid, and requested him to giue order +what his pleasure was to be done therein: who commanded that the fleete +should depart, and that I should stay till such time as all things were +made and concluded that I shoulde carrie with me for the king of China, +as in ample manner as hee had commanded. And when that all things were +in good order, that they should cause a shippe or galoon to bee made +readie, wherein I should made my voyage, for to ouertake or meete at the +Newe Spaine such shippes as euerie yeare dooth depart for the Ilands +Philippinas, which is at Christmas time: this commandement was delayed +vntill the beginning of Lent, as well for that the thinges were manie +that shoulde bee made, and coulde not be dispatched in the time, as also +for a generall sicknesse that was amongst them in Spaine, called the +cattarre or murre. Then after that all thinges were in order, by the +commandement of the Licenciado Gasca, hee deliuered vnto me the kinges +letter, and all other thinges. The which, for that they were manie, and +againe I haue beene tedious in this chapter, I doo not declare it; for +that the prudent lector may of himselfe conceiue, if hee doo weigh the +magnanimitie of the Catholike king that dooth sende them, and the +mightinesse and richnesse of him to whome it is sent, of the which we +haue declared enough in this small historie. I would I could +particularly declare it vnto you, as also the copie of the letter that +his maiestie did send vnto that Heathen or Gentile king, a thing worthie +of the author: but for that it came not to effect, neither had I anye +licence of him that all onelye might grant it: and againe, in place +whereas I could not aske it, therefore I dare not, for that I will not +excede the limits of fidelitie which I owe vnto my prince. But it is +sufficient that the letter and the present sent by his maiestie vnto the +king of that countrey was to no other intent, but to procure him and all +his subiects to acknowledge the true God, and to exhort them to receiue +our Catholike faith, and to giue them to vnderstand the error wherein +they are, and how ignorant they are of the knowledge of the true God, +the creator of heauen and earth, and of all the creatures of the world +visible and invisible, Sauiour and redeemer of all such as with a true +knowledge doo beleeue in him and obey his holy lawe, declared by his +worde, and confirmed by his deuine tokens, and other thinges in effect. + +So being dispatched, I prosecuted my iourny, and order, till I came vnto +the kingdome of Mexico, whereas I found a certaine inconuenience +touching a matter needful in that voiage, whereof his maiestie, in the +commission he gaue me, willed me to be well aduertised, and, if it were +needfull, to giue him notice thereof before I did passe any farther. + +The vizroy of that kingdome, who was the Earle of Couma,[134] thought it +good that I shoulde returne vnto Lysborne, whereas the king was at that +instant, and to giue him to vnderstand of the difficultie that was +found, in a meeting that the vizroy had caused to bee made of the most +grauest personages of all that kingdome, about the prosecuting of that +ambassage. + +With this resolution, I departed from that kingdome, and returned to +Spaine, and left the present in Mexico, in the power of the kings +officers, till such time as order was giuen what should be done +therewith. + +I found his maiestie in Lisborne, whereas I did deliuer him the letters +that were written touching the same matter, and did declare vnto him my +iudgement touching the meeting aforesaid: who incontinent did take the +charge vpon him to seeke occasion, for to put in effect his most +Christian intent and zeale; the which I doo beleeue he had procured, and +will by al waies possible: and that very shortly we shall see in that +kingdome planted the Catholike faith, and their false idolatrie +banished. And I hope in God it will bee very shortly, for that there be +within that kingdome religious men, of the order of Saint Augustine, and +barefoote friers of Saint Francis, and of the order of Jesus, or +Jesuits, who are called there the fathers of Saint Paule: of whom there +is placed fiue or sixe in the citie of Xanquin, whereas the vizroy doth +dwell, and hath erected a couent in that citie ever since the year 1583, +with a church, whereas they doo say masse ordinarily. And it is said, of +a truth, that they haue got license of the saide vizroy for to passe +freely thorough out all the whole kingdome of China. But if it bee so, +you must thinke that hee did it after that he had consulted with the +king, and doone by his authoritie: otherwise I am perswaded he durst not +grant any such license. + +At this present dooth there go out of Spaine, by the order and +commandement of his maiestie and his royall counsell of the Indies, a +companie of religious men, of the order of Saint Dominicke, for to aid +and helpe the rest that are there to conclude this enterprise, from whom +can proceed nothing but that which tends to great effect, by reason of +their great zeale and learning, and the better if that they doo ioyne +together in charitie as seruants to one Lord and master, and as they +which are bounde to doo all one worke. By which meanes, with the fauour +and helpe of Almightie God, putting to their diligence and industrie, +they shall easily conquest their hearts and good willes, and shall +frustrate the diuell from the possession that so long time he hath +possessed in that kingdome, and reduce them to their true Lord by +creation and redemption. It will not bee a small helpe, the manie and +evident tokens which the Chinos doo giue of desire of their saluation; +for as it is said that they haue read in their bookes, that from the +occident shall come the true and perfite law to direct them to heaven, +where they shalbe angels. And they, seeing that those religious people +which are come into their kingdome, doo come from the occident, they are +perswaded, without doubt, that the law that they doo declare vnto them +is the truth; by which meanes shall redowne vnto them great goodnesse. +They are greatly affectioned vnto the commandements of the Catholike +faith, and vnto the catechisme, which is translated into their language, +and is abrode in manie parts of that kingdome, which is the occasion (as +the fathers of the companie that are in the citie Xuquien dooth write) +that many principal persons are conuerted vnto the Catholike faith, and +others, being holpen by the heauens, and encited by the ensample of +them, doo demande the holy baptisme, which is left undone because they +will not cause any vprore in the countrie. And againe, when they shall +better conceiue thereof, they may receiue it with more firme faith. + +God, for his mercie, cause to go forwards, and with his diuine fauour, +this good worke, for his honour and glorie, and exalting his holy faith; +and that so great and infinite a number of soules, redeemed by his +pretious blood, might be saued, and to put in the hart of Christian +kings to proceed forwards in that which he hath begun: putting alwaies +in their breasts a greater augmentation, to the concluding of the same, +and to put apart from him all such perswasions as shoulde cause him to +leaue it off, which the diuell will procure by all the wayes and meanes +that he may. But against God and his diuine will there is neither power +nor wisedome. + + + + +THE END OF THE FIRST PART. + + + + +FOOTNOTES: + +[1] Purchas's _Pilgrimes_, vol. iii, p. 35, 36. + +[2] Purchas's _Pilgrimes_, vol. iii, p. 5. + +[3] Barros, dec. III, liv. ii, cap. 6. + +[4] ... Mui prospero em honra, e fazenda, cousas que poucas vezes +juntamente se conseguem, porque ha poucos homens que por sus trabalhos +as merecem pelo modo que Fernao Peres naquellas partes as ganhava. +Barros, dec. III, liv. ii, cap. 8. Goes, p. iv, cap. 24. Osorius, lib. +xi, p. 317 et seq. + +[5] Barros, dec. III, liv. vi, cap. 2, has further particulars +concerning his regulations. Concerning his person and manners the same +author says: "Como era cavalleiro de sua pessoa, muy pomposo, glorioso +e gastador, todos suas obras eram com grande magestade, etc." In +Osorius (lib. xi, p. 319 _b_) he appears more faulty and blameworthy. +"... Andradii, viri sane fortis sed temerarii, et plurimum a mente +fratris abhorrentis ... deinde in tyrannidem erupit: rapuit quae +voluit, intulit vim ingenuis virginibus, quibus voluit: multa praeterea +signa insiti furoris dedit." + +[6] For the elaboration of the route of the friars, rendered difficult +of solution by the changes in the form of names, the writer is +indebted to the kind assistance of his learned friend Dr. Neumann, +professor of Chinese in the University of Munich. + +[7] Martin de Bada, otherwise called Herrada, for an account of whom +and his companions, see Introduction. + +[8] Manilla. + +[9] Cochinchina. + +[10] Hainan. + +[11] Birman Empire. + +[12] Bernier, in his _Lettre a Colbert sur l'etendue de l'Hindoustan_, +describes the Patans as "peuples mahometans, sortis du coste du Gange +vers Bengale, qui avant l'invasion des Mogols dans les Indes avoient +sceu se rendre puissans dans plusieurs endroits, et principalement a +Dehly et faire plusieurs Rajas des environs leurs tributaires. Ces +Patans ... haissent mortellement les Mogols, souvenans toujours de ce +qu'ils ont ete autrefois, avant qu'ils les eussent chassez de leurs +grandes principautez et les eussent obligez de se retirer deca dela, +loin de Dehly et Agra dans des montagnes ou ils se sont habituez." + +[13] Moguls. + +[14] Capital. + +[15] Samarcand. + +[16] Loo Choos. + +[17] Cleanness. + +[18] Germans. + +[19] See note, page 7. + +[20] Dimocarpus leechee. + +[21] From fanega, _Span._ A measure for grain, varying in capacity in +different parts of Spain and Portugal. It contains on an average one +and three-fifths of an English bushel. + +[22] Panic-grass. + +[23] Martas zibellinas--sables. + +[24] The Spanish _Cuarto_ equals four maravedis, and is of about the +same value as a French sou, or something less than an English +halfpenny. + +[25] Misspelt for Cansi. Probably Sin-gan-fu, capital of the province +of Chen-sy is here referred to. + +[26] Misspelt for Taybinco, meaning Ta-Bing-kwo, the kingdom under the +great Bing (Ming) dynasty. + +[27] Query li. + +[28] Misspelt for Malacca. This sentence shows Olam to be Yun-nan. + +[29] After a careful collation of the following illspelt and vague +enumeration of the provinces of China with those given by Semedo, +Heningius, Heylyn, and in a very early map of the country, as well as +with some elucidatory passages in the text, the following explanations +are offered as to their respective significations. The Paguia here +mentioned is evidently Pe-che-lie. + +[30] Fo-kien. + +[31] Yun-nan, see note page 21. + +[32] Quang-see. + +[33] Chen-sy. + +[34] Chan-si. + +[35] Kiang-see. + +[36] Hou-quang. + +[37] This name which is spelt in the same manner as that given in the +second volume to the city of Fo-cheu, would seem to mean the province +of Kiang-nan, as that province is not otherwise represented in the +list. + +[38] Ho-nan. + +[39] Chan-tung. + +[40] Koei-tcheou. + +[41] Che-kiang. + +[42] Se-tchuen. + +[43] Evidently Canton, by comparison with the list in next chapter. + +[44] Quinsay or King-sze, means "the capital." + +[45] Peking. + +[46] Tay-ping-fu. + +[47] One of the five ports opened to England by the treaty of Nanking +in 1842. + +[48] Ho-chow, in the province of Shen-si. + +[49] The Tartar province of Leao-tung, in which the wall commences, +has also the name of Quantonz: see Gutzlaff's Map of China and Biot's +_Dictionnaire des noms anciens et modernes des Villes, etc., dans +l'Empire Chinois, fo. 86_. From this it is evident that our author is +now considering the work in its course from east to west, and not from +west to east, as in the commencement of this paragraph. + +[50] This is evidently Se-tchuen, as given in p. 22; for although it +is not strictly correct to say that the great wall terminates in +Se-tchuen, yet that province borders on the ancient province of +Shen-si sufficiently near to justify the conclusion that it is here +referred to, the whole of the geographical information gained by the +writers at this early period being necessarily but vague and +indefinite. + +[51] _Sic_, hot. + +[52] Germans. + +[53] A mis-print for Barbosa. Duarte Barbosa, or Barbessa, a native of +Lisbon, wrote in Portuguese an account of his travels in the south of +Asia; but according to Antonio, they have only appeared in type in an +Italian translation. An abridgement of his narrative is given in +_Ramusio_, tom. i, p. 288. Subsequently Barbosa accompanied Magellan +in his voyage round the world, and shared the melancholy fate of that +great navigator in the Island of Zebu in 1521. + +[54] Mexico. + +[55] _Saxii._ This has been supposed to mean the province of Canton, +the names of the other provinces having been pretty well identified. +The writer may have considered that the finest porcelain was made at +Canton, as it was usually exported from thence to Europe; but the +chief seat of the manufacture is, in fact, the province of +_Kiang-see_. + +[56] _Chincheou._ One of the chief districts of _Fokien_, often named +for the entire province. + +[57] This and the following details of the striking similarity which +exists between the ceremonial of the Buddhist and Roman Catholic +religions, are verified by later travellers and resident missionaries, +but there is no evidence from history to show that the former derived +these peculiarities from the latter. + +[58] The work here referred to was printed in black letter at Evora, +1569, 4to., under the title, "Tractado em que se contam muito por +estenso as cousas da China, con suas particularidades, y assi do regno +dormuz." + +[59] _Laocon Izautey._ The following particulars evidently relate, not +to the Confucian or national religion of the Chinese, but to the sect +of the _Tao-sse._ Grosier tells us, that "the sect of the Tao-see was +founded by a philosopher named _Lao-kiun_ or _Lao-Tse_, who came into +the world in the year 603 before the Christian era." Grosier's +_China_, vol. ii, p. 203. It is impossible to identify all the names +given in this legend of Chinese superstition. _Paosaos_ (see next +page) is probably the same with _Poosah_, the name generally given to +the Chinese idols. The _Sichia_, who are said to have come from +_Trautheyco_, towards the west [Thibet? _see note next page_], are +probably the disciples of the sect of _Foe_, also noticed by Grosier. +"This sect, still more pernicious and much wider diffused throughout +China than the preceding, came originally from India."--Vol. ii, p. +215. The description here given of the _religious people_ who _live +without marrying_ and _wear no hair_, tallies exactly with the +practice of the Bonzes or priests of _Foe_ of the present day. + +[60] This would seem to be Kwan-she, the same as Kwan-yin, the goddess +of mercy of the votaries of Foe. + +[61] This would appear to be Thibet (for there is no Chinese form that +we can recognize as corresponding with the word), and Thibet is the +country from which those points of belief are derived. + +[62] This superstitious practice is described in much the same terms +by Grosier. "The commonest way is to burn perfumes before an idol, and +to beat the earth several times with the forehead. Upon the altar +which supports this idol, there is always a kind of horn, filled with +small flat sticks, upon which are traced a variety of unintelligible +characters. Each of these small sticks conceals an answer. The person +who consults, lets fall, at random, one of these small sticks, the +inscription of which is explained by the Bonze who accompanies him. +When no Bonze is present, they have recourse to a paper fixed up to +the wall of the pagoda, to discover the enigmatical meaning of the +word. This manner of consulting is very common in China."--Grosier, +vol. ii, p. 235. + +[63] Pwan-koo, the Adam of the Chinese. + +[64] Better known as Teen-Hwang. + +[65] Also called Te Hwang. + +[66] Also named Laoutsze. + +[67] Also named Fuh-he-te. + +[68] Also named Shin Nung. + +[69] The Chinese pray _to_ the dead, but the practice of prayers _for_ +the dead and the doctrine of the creation of man out of nothing by +Tien, alluded to at page 50, are not found in other writers; if +therefore our author is correct, these may possibly have been relics +of early Christian teaching. + +[70] This expression is introduced by the English translator. + +[71] Severely. + +[72] This is the well-known lignum aloes of commerce. In some remarks +by the late H. T. Colebrooke, Esq., on a paper of the late Dr. +Roxburgh's recently read at the Linnean Society, occurs the following +observation: "The Portuguese _pao de aguila_ is an undoubted +corruption, either of the Arabic aghaluji, or of the Latin agallochum; +and it is by a ludicrous mistake that from this corruption has grown +the name of lignum aquilae, whence the genus of the plant now receives +its botanic appellation, _aquilaria agallocha._" Roxb. + +[73] It is thus spelt also in Steven's _Spanish Dictionary_. _Query_, +cayolizan, a Mexican shrub, giving a perfume like incense. + +[74] Rough. + +[75] A mill. Wickliffe's translation of the Bible: Matthew xxiv, has: +Two wymmen schulen be gryndynge in oo querne; oon schal be taken and +the tother left. + +[76] This sketch of the early annals of China is not altogether +correct; but agrees in the main with that given by _Du Halde_. The +names of the sovereigns are strangely misspelt; but the order of +succession, and the years of their respective reigns, render it not +difficult to identify them. _Vitey_ does not seem to be the commonly +reputed founder of the Chinese monarchy _Fo-hi_, but either his great +successor _Hoang-tie_, who had 25 sons, or the celebrated Emperor +_Yao_, whose reign lasted 100 years, and commenced B.C. 2357. +_Tzintzon_ is evidently the _Chi-Hoang-ty_ of Du Halde, who built the +great wall, and reigned B.C. 237. _Aguisi_, his son, is named by Du +Halde _Cul-chi._ The _Anchosan_ of our author is clearly the first +emperor of the dynasty of Han, named _Han-Cao-tsou_ by Du Halde. The +years of the reigns which follow correspond very exactly with those of +the several emperors of the Han dynasty; but the names are all spelt +differently. + +[77] _Spanish._ Vara--A yard. + +[78] A third. + +[79] Position, from _Span._ Estado. + +[80] For the names of the following provinces, see note, p. 22. + +[81] More properly "Mace". "The only coin in general use throughout +China is the _le_ or cash. Its intrinsic value may be about +one-twelfth part of an English penny. The nominal names are those +called _fun_, _tsien_, and _leang_, denominated by foreigners +_candareen_, _mace_, and _tael_, bearing respectively to each other a +decimal proportion."--Murray's _China_, vol. iii, p. 93. + +The mace is usually estimated at about 8_d._, and the tael 6_s._ +10_d._ sterling. + +[82] _Span._ Quilates--carats. + +[83] More properly "tael". + +[84] _Spanish._ Millo or mijo--millet. + +[85] _Spanish._ Panizo--panic-grass. + +[86] This word is spelt the same in the original. Query blankets, from +_Portuguese_ Chim--Chinese, and mantas--blankets. + +[87] Prevent. + +[88] The military and non-military in China are usually distinguished +by the terms _ping_ and _ming_. The _pon_ seems to refer to the _ping_ +or regular troops, and the _cum_ to the _ming_ or people; being only a +species of local militia. + +[89] Falchions? + +[90] Billhooks? + +[91] Bombs. + +[92] Loo chooans. + +[93] Mis-spelt for Narsinga. + +[94] Mis-spelt for Bengala. + +[95] Query, Java. + +[96] Pekin. + +[97] Tsong-tuh. + +[98] Laoye. See Chap. xiv on the title of Loytia. + +[99] Possibly this word is confounded with Colao or Chung-tang, a +minister of state. + +[100] More properly To't'ung. + +[101] More properly Po-ching-sz, or, as Du Halde has it, +Pou-ching-ssee. + +[102] More properly Too-tuh, adjutant-general. + +[103] More properly Ngan-tcha-see. + +[104] More properly Hai-tao. Respecting these offices see Du Halde, +vol. ii, fol. 32, 33. + +[105] Standard-bearer. + +[106] More properly Paou-yin. + +[107] This and the preceding title seem to be the same as those +similarly spelt on page 103. + +[108] Perhaps the Koo-ta-sze, or treasurer. + +[109] Perhaps the Che-tsze, or secretary. + +[110] Taou, tae, the intendant of circuits. + +[111] More properly Kwan-paou, commissioner of customs. See Morrison's +_View of China_, p. 94. + +[112] Perhaps Te-paou, a police runner. + +[113] More properly Yuen-chae, a police constable. + +[114] Perhaps Ching-tang, assistant officer in a prise. + +[115] Shin is the Chinese for the verb "to judge", and with +the word officer added to it will be "a judging officer". Thus also +leu--law, prefixed to che--to rule, or govern, may be the origin of +the term Leuchi. This construction is, however, entirely conjectural. + +[116] See note on page 113. + +[117] This character is so vague as to be scarcely +recognizable. The proper Chinese word for heaven is tien. The word +here given may perhaps mean tsang, _the azure sky_, which is sometimes +used metaphorically for heaven. At the same time the modern Chinese +character for Keen, also pronounced Kan [Chinese character], which is +likewise a very old word for heaven, appears somewhat to approximate +in form to the character given in the text. + +[118] Evidently hwang te, the character here given corresponding with the +modern Chinese character Hwang. [Chinese character] + +[119] This character would seem to be intended for ching,--a walled +city, the correct form of the character being [Chinese character] + +[120] Fucheou, the capital of Fokien. + +[121] _Padrinos_, _Span_.--Literally sponsors. + +[122] A German. + +[123] A misprint for Pegu. + +[124] Mis-translated from the Spanish "Tudesco", a German. The reader +will readily recognize the name of Johann Gutemberg or Ganzfleisch, of +Mentz, who disputes with Laurens Koster, of Haarlem, the honour of +having invented and first practised the art of printing with moveable +types. + +[125] Conrad Sweynheim, who, in partnership with Arnold Pannartz, +published in 1465, at the Monastery of Subiaco, near Rome, the +_Lactantii Opera_, 4to., the first work printed in Italy. The _De +Civitate Dei_ of St. Augustine, was printed by the same printers at +Subiaco two years later. It is now known that the first book printed +in Europe with metal types, was the _Mazarine Bible_, printed by +Gutemberg and Fust, at Mentz, in 1455. + +[126] Germany. + +[127] Printing without moveable types does not go back, even in China, +beyond the beginning of the tenth century of our era. The first four +books of Confucius were printed, according to Klaproth, in the +province of Sze-chuen, between 890 and 925, and the description of the +technical manipulation of the Chinese printing press might have been +read in western countries even as early as 1310, in Raschid Eddin's +Persian history of the rulers of Khatai. According to the most recent +results of the important researches of Stanislas Julien, however, an +ironsmith in China itself, between the years 1041 and 1048, A.D., or +almost 400 years before Gutemberg, would seem to have used moveable +types made of burnt clay. This is the invention of Pi-sching, but it +was not brought into application. See Humboldt's _Kosmos_, translated +by Otte, fol. 623. Moveable types are now no longer used, for as Sir +John Davis observes, vol. ii, p. 222, "the present mode of Chinese +printing with wooden stereotype blocks is peculiarly suited to the +Chinese character, and for all purposes of cheapness and expedition is +perfect". A complete set of the materials used by the Chinese in the +process of printing, may be seen in the Museum of the Royal Asiatic +Society. In the note on page 121 of Hakluyt's _Divers Voyages_, edited +for the Hakluyt Society by J. Winter Jones, Esq., the following +description is given of a book printed in 1348: "The earliest work of +which we have been able to obtain an account, from one having had the +opportunity of personally inspecting it, bears date the eighth year of +the last period of the reign of Shun Te, or A.D. 1348. Mr. Prevost, +our informant, who is at present engaged in cataloguing the splendid +collection of Chinese books in the British Museum, has favoured us +with the following description of the book. The title is 'Chin Tsaou +Tseen Wan, or the Thousand Character Classic'. It is one of the most +popular works in China, and consists of exactly one thousand different +characters, not one being repeated. It is composed in octosyllabic +verses, which rhyme in couplets; each verse presenting to the student +some useful Chinese notion, either in morals or in general knowledge. +The object of this work is to teach the written character, both in its +semi-cursive and in its stenographic form, termed Tsaou, or +grass-writing: the text is, therefore, printed in parallel columns, +alternately in the Chin, or correct, and the Tsaou, or cursive +character. The author lived in the first half of the sixth century. +This work, when seen by Mr. Prevost, was in the possession of Colonel +Tynte." The Editor has also in his own possession a Chinese bank note, +printed, or rather stamped, in the fourteenth century. + +[128] Hou-quang. + +[129] A sort of confection made of almonds, sugar, etc. + +[130] Bever, probably from bevere, _Ital._, to drink, a small +collation between dinner and supper. + +[131] _Vname_, is probably _Yew ma_,--pitch, or the resin of the pine. +In Morrison's _Dictionary_, "tar" is translated _Pa ma yew_: but the +Editor finds nothing analogous to _Ja pez_, which is probably now +obsolete. + +[132] The Goletta of Tunis was taken from the Spaniards by Sinan +Pacha, admiral of Selim II, on the 23rd of August 1574. + +[133] Mistranslated for "the extensive knowledge which I had of +navigation." + +[134] Misspelt for Corunna. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The History of the Great and Mighty +Kingdom of China and the Situation Thereof, Volume I (of 2), by Juan Gonzalez de Mendoza + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GREAT AND MIGHTY KINGDOM OF CHINA *** + +***** This file should be named 39009.txt or 39009.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/0/0/39009/ + +Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper, Melissa McDaniel +and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |